384
SERVICE MANUAL Published in Apr. ’02 842BC111 Revision 1
| Date post: | 21-Oct-2015 |
| Category: |
Documents |
| Upload: | rostocanie |
| View: | 40 times |
| Download: | 9 times |
SERVICEMANUAL
Published in Apr. ’02842BC111Revision 1
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalenttype recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to themanufacturer’s instructions.
CAUTION
Double-pole/neutral fusing.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety oftheir customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnelare advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautionsdescribed here before engaging in maintenance activities.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger andto prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliancewith warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION:Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrectcompliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific pointof attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections toone outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always checkthat it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire orelectric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may causeexplosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by theproper authorities. .............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as coolas possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this maycause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer isaccidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attentionimmediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtainmedical attention. ..............................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’sinstruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. Ifit is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light maydamage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may causeelectric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they aresafely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can causeabnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other relatedbrochures. .........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safetymechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other relatedbrochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or otherserious accident. ...............................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of apart, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removingthem; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with acable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that wereremoved, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgottenconnector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to theinstruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main
switch on.· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly tofire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outletimmediately. ......................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other thanthe specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................
1-1-1
2BC/D
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications1-1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-11-1-2 Parts names and their functions ............................................................................................................ 1-1-5
(1) Copier .............................................................................................................................................. 1-1-5(2) Operation panel ............................................................................................................................... 1-1-6
1-1-3 Machine cross section ........................................................................................................................... 1-1-71-1-4 Drive system ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1-8
(1) Drive system 1 (optical section) ....................................................................................................... 1-1-8(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train) ................................................................................. 1-1-9(3) Drive system 3 (Deck drive motor drive train) ............................................................................... 1-1-10(4) Drive system 4 (image formation motor drive train) ....................................................................... 1-1-11(5) Drive system 5 (Paper conveying motor drive train) ...................................................................... 1-1-12(6) Drive system 6 (duplex section) .................................................................................................... 1-1-13(7) Drive system 7 (DF) ....................................................................................................................... 1-1-14
1-2 Handling Precautions1-2-1 Drum ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-11-2-2 Developer and toner .............................................................................................................................. 1-2-11-2-3 Installation environment ........................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Installation1-3-1 Unpacking and installation .................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-11-3-2 Setting initial copy modes ................................................................................................................... 1-3-151-3-3 Installing the key counter (option) ....................................................................................................... 1-3-161-3-4 Installing the multi/simple finisher (option) .......................................................................................... 1-3-181-3-5 Installing the side deck (option) ........................................................................................................... 1-3-241-3-6 Installing the Network scanner kit (option) .......................................................................................... 1-3-281-3-7 Installing the Printer kit (option) ........................................................................................................... 1-3-301-3-8 Installing the tandem kit (option) ......................................................................................................... 1-3-33
1-4 Maintenance Mode1-4-1 Copier management .............................................................................................................................. 1-4-1
(1) Using the copier management mode ............................................................................................... 1-4-1(2) Setting department management items ........................................................................................... 1-4-2(3) Weekly timer .................................................................................................................................... 1-4-2(4) Copy default .................................................................................................................................... 1-4-3(5) Machine default ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-5(6) Bypass setting ................................................................................................................................. 1-4-6(7) Document management default setting ........................................................................................... 1-4-6(8) Hard disk management ................................................................................................................... 1-4-7(9) Report .............................................................................................................................................. 1-4-7
(10) Language ......................................................................................................................................... 1-4-71-4-2 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................................ 1-4-8
(1) Executing a maintenance item ........................................................................................................ 1-4-8(2) Maintenance mode item list ............................................................................................................. 1-4-9(3) Contents of maintenance mode items ........................................................................................... 1-4-12
1-5 Troubleshooting1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................. 1-5-3(3) Paper misfeeds ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-9
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-20(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................. 1-5-20(2) Self diagnostic codes ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-21
1-1-2
2BC/D-1
1-5-3 Image formation problems .................................................................................................................. 1-5-31(1) No image appears (entirely white). ................................................................................................ 1-5-33(2) No image appears (entirely black). ................................................................................................ 1-5-33(3) Image is too light. .......................................................................................................................... 1-5-34(4) Background is visible. .................................................................................................................... 1-5-34(5) A white line appears longitudinally. ............................................................................................... 1-5-34(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ............................................................................................... 1-5-35(7) A black line appears laterally. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-35(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. .................................................................... 1-5-35(9) Black dots appear on the image. ................................................................................................... 1-5-36
(10) Image is blurred. ............................................................................................................................ 1-5-36(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................. 1-5-36(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................. 1-5-37(13) Paper creases. .............................................................................................................................. 1-5-37(14) Offset occurs. ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-37(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................. 1-5-38(16) Fixing is poor. ................................................................................................................................ 1-5-38(17) Image is out of focus. .................................................................................................................... 1-5-38(18) Image center does not align with the original center. .................................................................... 1-5-38(19) Image is not square. ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-39(20) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering). ...................................................................................... 1-5-39(21) There is a regular error between the centers of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-39(22) There is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-40(23) There is a regular error between the trailing edges of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ..................................................................................................................... 1-5-40(24) When the duplex unit is used, the center of the original image and that of
the copy image do not align. .......................................................................................................... 1-5-40(25) Toner scatters at the leading edge of the image. ....................................................................... 1-5-40-1
1-5-4 Electrical problems .............................................................................................................................. 1-5-41• Copier .............................................................................................................................................. 1-5-41(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. .............................................. 1-5-41(2) The image formation motor does not operate (C2000). ................................................................ 1-5-41(3) Paper feed motor does not operate (C2500). ................................................................................ 1-5-41(4) The paper conveying motor does not operate (C2550). ................................................................ 1-5-42(5) The deck drive motor does not operate (C2600). .......................................................................... 1-5-42(6) The scanner motor does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-42(7) The paper conveying fan motor does not operate. ........................................................................ 1-5-42(8) The image formation fan motor does not operate. ........................................................................ 1-5-42(9) The cooling fan motor does not operate. ....................................................................................... 1-5-43
(10) The fixing fan motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-43(11) Eject fan motor 1 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-43(12) Eject fan motor 2 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-43(13) The HDD fan motor does not operate. .......................................................................................... 1-5-43(14) The power supply fan motor does not operate. ............................................................................. 1-5-43(15) The upper lift motor does not operate (C1010). ............................................................................ 1-5-43(16) The lower lift motor does not operate (C1020). ............................................................................. 1-5-43(17) The deck right lift motor does not operate (C1100). ...................................................................... 1-5-44(18) The deck left lift motor does not operate (C1110). ........................................................................ 1-5-44(19) The toner feed motor does not operate. ........................................................................................ 1-5-44(20) The main charger cleaning motor does not operate. ..................................................................... 1-5-44(21) The toner agitation motor does not operate. ................................................................................. 1-5-44(22) The transfer charger cleaning motor does not operate. ................................................................ 1-5-44(23) The registration clutch does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-44(24) Feed low clutch 1 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-45(25) Feed high clutch 1 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-5-45(26) Feed low clutch 2 does not operate. .............................................................................................. 1-5-45(27) Feed high clutch 2 does not operate. ............................................................................................ 1-5-45(28) Feed clutch 3 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45
1-1-3
2BC/D
(29) Feed clutch 4 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45(30) Feed clutch 5 does not operate. .................................................................................................... 1-5-45(31) Paper feed clutch 1 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-46(32) Paper feed clutch 2 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-46(33) Paper feed clutch 3 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-46(34) Paper feed clutch 4 does not operate. ........................................................................................... 1-5-46(35) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. .......................................................................... 1-5-46(36) The duplex forwarding clutch does not operate. ............................................................................ 1-5-47(37) The duplex reversing clutch does not operate. .............................................................................. 1-5-47(38) The deck feed clutch does not operate. ........................................................................................ 1-5-47(39) The bypass solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................... 1-5-47(40) The duplex eject switching solenoid does not operate. ................................................................. 1-5-47(41) The duplex pressure release solenoid does not operate. .............................................................. 1-5-47(42) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ...................................................................................... 1-5-47(43) The fixing web solenoid does not operate. .................................................................................... 1-5-48(44) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................. 1-5-48(45) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................ 1-5-48(46) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ............................................................................................ 1-5-48(47) Fixing heater M or S does not turn on (C6000). ............................................................................ 1-5-48(48) Fixing heater M or S does not turn off. .......................................................................................... 1-5-48(49) Main charging is not performed (C5100). ...................................................................................... 1-5-48(50) Transfer charging is not performed (C5110). ................................................................................ 1-5-49(51) Separation charging is not performed (C5110). ............................................................................ 1-5-49(52) No developing bias is output. ........................................................................................................ 1-5-49(53) The original size is not detected. ................................................................................................... 1-5-49(54) The original size is not detected correctly. .................................................................................... 1-5-49(55) The touch panel keys do not work. ................................................................................................ 1-5-50(56) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in drawer 1. ......... 1-5-50(57) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in drawer 2. ......... 1-5-50(58) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in drawer 3. ......... 1-5-50(59) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present in drawer 4. ......... 1-5-50(60) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the
bypass table. ................................................................................................................................. 1-5-50(61) The size of paper in drawer 1 is not displayed correctly. ............................................................... 1-5-50(62) The size of paper in drawer 2 is not displayed correctly. ............................................................... 1-5-51(63) The size of paper on the bypass table is not displayed correctly. ................................................. 1-5-51(64) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated on the touch
panel immediately after the main switch is turned on. ................................................................... 1-5-52(65) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front and right covers
are closed. ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-52(66) Others. ........................................................................................................................................... 1-5-52
• DF .................................................................................................................................................. 1-5-53(1) The original feed motor does not operate. ..................................................................................... 1-5-53(2) The original conveying motor does not operate. ........................................................................... 1-5-53(3) The original feed solenoid does not operate. ................................................................................ 1-5-53(4) The switchback feedshift solenoid does not operate. .................................................................... 1-5-53(5) The eject feedshift solenoid does not operate. .............................................................................. 1-5-53(6) The switchback pressure solenoid does not operate. ................................................................... 1-5-53(7) The original feed clutch does not operate. .................................................................................... 1-5-54(8) A message indicating cover open is displayed when the DF is closed correctly. .......................... 1-5-54(9) An original jams when the main switch is turned on. ..................................................................... 1-5-54
1-5-5 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-55• Copier ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5-55
(1) No primary paper feed. .................................................................................................................. 1-5-55(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................. 1-5-55(3) Skewed paper feed. ....................................................................................................................... 1-5-55(4) The scanner does not travel. ......................................................................................................... 1-5-55(5) Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. ................................................................................ 1-5-55
1-1-4
2BC/D
(6) No refeed. ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5-55(7) Paper jams. ................................................................................................................................... 1-5-55(8) Toner drops on the paper conveying path. .................................................................................... 1-5-56(9) Abnormal noise is heard. ............................................................................................................... 1-5-56
• DF .................................................................................................................................................. 1-5-57(1) No primary original feed. ............................................................................................................... 1-5-57(2) No secondary original feed. ........................................................................................................... 1-5-57(3) Originals jam. ................................................................................................................................. 1-5-57
1-6 Assembly and Disassembly1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Precautions ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1(2) Running a maintenance item ........................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1-6-2 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................ 1-6-3(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, upper paper feed and lower paper feed pulleys ................ 1-6-3
(1-1) Detaching and refitting the pulleys of drawers 1, 2, and 3...................................................... 1-6-3(1-2) Detaching and refitting the pulley of drawer 4 ........................................................................ 1-6-7
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys .................... 1-6-10(3) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner brush ................................................................... 1-6-13(4) Detaching and refitting the lower registration cleaner ................................................................... 1-6-13(5) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter .......................................................................................... 1-6-14(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................. 1-6-15
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing ..................................................... 1-6-15(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing...................................... 1-6-16(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing............................................................................ 1-6-17(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ......................................................................................... 1-6-18(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller ..................................... 1-6-19(6-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveying ................................... 1-6-20
1-6-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-21(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp .................................................................................... 1-6-21(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires ..................................................................................... 1-6-22
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ................................................................................................ 1-6-22(2-2) Refitting the scanner wires ................................................................................................... 1-6-25
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit ............................................................................... 1-6-27(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) ................................................................................... 1-6-30(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ........................................................................ 1-6-31(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference) .............................................................. 1-6-32
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit .................................................................... 1-6-32(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU .......................................................................................... 1-6-33
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ......................................... 1-6-34(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction .................................... 1-6-35(9) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ............................................................................ 1-6-36
(10) Adjusting the scanner center line .................................................................................................. 1-6-37(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................. 1-6-38
1-6-4 Main charging section ......................................................................................................................... 1-6-39(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wire and main charger grid .................................................... 1-6-39(2) Detaching and refitting the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning pad ............... 1-6-41
1-6-5 Drum section ....................................................................................................................................... 1-6-42(1) Detaching and refitting the drum ................................................................................................... 1-6-42
1-6-6 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 1-6-44(1) Detaching and refitting the drum ................................................................................................... 1-6-42
1-6-6 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 1-6-44(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit ................................................................................... 1-6-44(2) Detaching and refitting the developing unit upper seal .................................................................. 1-6-46(3) Adjusting the position of the magnetic brush (developing roller) (reference) ................................ 1-6-46(4) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference) .................................................................. 1-6-47(5) Detaching and refitting the developing duct filter ........................................................................... 1-6-47
1-6-7 Transfer and separation section .......................................................................................................... 1-6-48
1-1-5
2BC/D-1
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wires and cleaning pads ........................................................ 1-6-481-6-8 Cleaning section .................................................................................................................................. 1-6-50
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw and cleaning lower seal ................................... 1-6-50(2) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade .................................................................................... 1-6-52(3) Detaching and refitting the thrust gear .......................................................................................... 1-6-52(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brush ........ 1-6-53
1-6-9 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-55(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ............................................................................................ 1-6-55(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing heaters M and S ........................................................................ 1-6-55(3) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ............................................................................................ 1-6-57(4) Detaching and refitting the press roller .......................................................................................... 1-6-59(5) Detaching and refitting the lower cleaning roller ............................................................................ 1-6-60(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor ........................................................................... 1-6-61(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing web roller ................................................................................... 1-6-62(8) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claw.................................................................. 1-6-63
1-6-10 Duplex section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-64(1) Cleaning the duplex switchback rollers ......................................................................................... 1-6-64(2) Adjusting the position of the duplex eject switching solenoid ........................................................ 1-6-65(3) Setting the switchback drive .......................................................................................................... 1-6-66
1-6-11 DF section ........................................................................................................................................... 1-6-67(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulley ........................................... 1-6-67(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley ........................................................................ 1-6-67-1(3) Adjusting the DF magnification ...................................................................................................... 1-6-68(4) Adjusting the DF original center line .............................................................................................. 1-6-69(5) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is used ........................................................... 1-6-70
(5-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration........................................................................... 1-6-70(5-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration............................................................................ 1-6-71
(6) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF ......................................................... 1-6-72
1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................. 1-7-11-7-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ................................................................................................ 1-7-2
2-1 Mechanical construction2-1-1 Paper feed section ................................................................................................................................ 2-1-1
(1) Drawers 1 and 2 paper feed ............................................................................................................ 2-1-1(1-1) Detecting the paper level ........................................................................................................ 2-1-2
(2) Drawers 3 and 4 paper feed ............................................................................................................ 2-1-6(2-1) Drawer 3 paper feed ............................................................................................................... 2-1-7(2-2) Drawer 4 paper feed ............................................................................................................... 2-1-9(2-3) Raising and lowering the lift .................................................................................................. 2-1-11(2-4) Detecting the paper level ...................................................................................................... 2-1-12
(3) Paper feed from the bypass table .................................................................................................. 2-1-132-1-2 Main charging section ......................................................................................................................... 2-1-152-1-3 Optical section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-17
(1) Original scanning ........................................................................................................................... 2-1-18(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................ 2-1-19
2-1-4 Developing section .............................................................................................................................. 2-1-21(1) Formation of magnetic brush ......................................................................................................... 2-1-22(2) Toner density control ..................................................................................................................... 2-1-24
(2-1) Toner empty detection by the toner sensor .......................................................................... 2-1-24(2-2) Controlling the toner feed motor and toner agitation motor .................................................. 2-1-25(2-3) Toner empty detection by the toner level sensor.................................................................. 2-1-25(2-4) Toner control level absolute humidity correction .................................................................. 2-1-26
2-1-5 Transfer/separation and conveying sections ....................................................................................... 2-1-272-1-6 Cleaning section .................................................................................................................................. 2-1-292-1-7 Charge erasing section ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-302-1-8 Fixing section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-31
1-1-6
2BC/D
2-1-9 Feedshift and eject sections ................................................................................................................ 2-1-332-1-10 Duplex section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-342-1-11 DF ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-1-37
(1) Original feed section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-37(1-1) Original feed timing ............................................................................................................... 2-1-38
(2) Original switchback section ........................................................................................................... 2-1-39(2-1) Operation of original switchback........................................................................................... 2-1-40
(3) Original conveying section ............................................................................................................. 2-1-41(3-1) Original switchback/conveying timing ................................................................................... 2-1-42
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ............................................................................................................................ 2-2-1
(1) PCBs ............................................................................................................................................... 2-2-1(2) Switches and sensors ...................................................................................................................... 2-2-2(3) Motors .............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-4(4) Clutches and solenoids ................................................................................................................... 2-2-5(5) Other electrical components ............................................................................................................ 2-2-6(6) DF PCBs .......................................................................................................................................... 2-2-7(7) DF switches and sensors ................................................................................................................ 2-2-8(8) DF motors ........................................................................................................................................ 2-2-9(9) DF clutches and solenoids ............................................................................................................ 2-2-10
2-3 Operation of the PCBs2-3-1 Power source PCB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-12-3-2 Main PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-62-3-3 Engine PCB ......................................................................................................................................... 2-3-112-3-4 Scanner drive PCB .............................................................................................................................. 2-3-192-3-5 CCD PCB ............................................................................................................................................ 2-3-22
2-4 AppendixesTiming chart No. 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1Timing chart No. 2 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2Timing chart No. 3 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3Timing chart No. 4 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4Timing chart No. 5 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-5Timing chart No. 6 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-6Timing chart No. 7 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-7Timing chart No. 8 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8Timing chart No. 9 ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4-9Timing chart No. 10 ....................................................................................................................................... 2-4-10Chart of image adjustment procedures ......................................................................................................... 2-4-11Maintenance parts list ................................................................................................................................... 2-4-14Periodic maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................. 2-4-15Optional devices supplied parts list ............................................................................................................... 2-4-19Functions and settings combination chart ..................................................................................................... 2-4-20General wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................. 2-4-21
2BC/D
1-1-1
1-1-1 Specifications
45 cpm copierType ............................................... ConsoleCopying system.............................. Indirect electrostatic systemOriginals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" × 17"Original feed system ...................... FixedCopy paper .................................... Drawers: Plain paper (60 – 80 g/m2)
Duplex unit: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)Bypass table: Plain paper (45 – 200 g/m2)Special paper:
Transparencies, tracing paper and colored paperNote: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"Minimum: A6R/51/2" × 81/2"During duplex copyingMaximum: A3/11" × 17"Minimum: A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% incrementsAuto copy mode: Fixed ratiosMetric
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25Inch
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25100% magnification ........................ Copier: ±0.8%
DF: ±1.5%Enlargement/reduction ................... Copier: ±1.0%
DF: ±1.5%Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4/11" × 81/2": 45 copies/min.A4R/81/2" × 11": 32 copies/min.A3/11" × 17": 24 copies/min.B4 (257 × 364 mm)/81/2" × 14": 28 copies/min.B5: 45 copies/min.B5R: 36 copies/min.
When the DF is used (at 100% magnification):A4/11" × 81/2": 45 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ 3.9 s less (A4/11" × 81/2", 100% magnification, drawer 1, manual copy densitycontrol)
Warm-up time ................................. 120 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65%RH)With preheat, switchable between 90 s and 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,65%RH)
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feedCapacity:
Two 500-sheet drawersOne 1000-sheet drawer
One 1500-sheet drawerManual feedCapacity:
Bypass: 100 sheetsMultiple copying ............................. 1 – 999 copiesPhotoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 78 mm)Charging system ............................ Single positive corona chargingRecording system .......................... Semiconductor laserDeveloping system ......................... Dry, reverse developing
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and black tonerDensity control: Developer density detectionToner replenishing: Automatic from a toner bottle
Transfer system ............................. Single minus corona chargeSeparation system ......................... AC separation corona charger system
2BC/D
1-1-2
Fixing system ................................. Heat rollerHeat source:
Halogen heaters (main 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 Vspecifications, sub 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 Vspecifications)
Control temperature: 185°C/365°F (at normal ambient temperature)Abnormally high temperature protection devices: 150°C/302°F thermostatsFixing pressure: 265 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lampCleaning system ............................ Cleaning blade and fur brushScanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensorBitmap memory .............................. 128 MB (standard)Image storage memory .................. 20.0 GB (standard)Resolution ...................................... Reading: 600 × 600 dpi
Writing: 1800 equivalent × 600 dpiLight source ................................... Inert gas lampDimensions .................................... 680 (W) × 804 (D) × 1141 (H) mm
2613/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D) × 4415/16" (H)Weight ............................................ Approx. 180 kg/396 lbsFloor requirements ......................... 1331 mm (W) × 804 (D) mm
527/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D)Functions........................................ (1) Self-diagnostics
(2) Preheat(3) Automatic copy density control(4) Original size detection(5) Automatic paper selection(6) Automatic magnification selection(7) Zoom mode(8) XY zoom mode(9) Preset zoom mode
(10) Document management functions(11) Output management functions(12) Photo mode(13) Duplex copy(14) Margin modes(15) Memo mode(16) Border erase modes(17) Combine/merge copy modes(18) Booklet stitching modes(19) Sort/finished mode(20) Auto selection/filing mode(21) Copy management function(22) Language selection function
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 7.0 A (max.)
Power consumption ....................... 1500 W (max.)Options ........................................... Document finisher, key counter, printer kit, network scanner kit and tandem copy kit.
2BC/D
1-1-3
55 cpm copierType ............................................... ConsoleCopying system.............................. Indirect electrostatic systemOriginals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" × 17"Original feed system ...................... FixedCopy paper .................................... Drawers: Plain paper (60 – 80 g/m2)
Duplex unit: Plain paper (64 – 80 g/m2)Bypass table: Plain paper (45 – 200 g/m2)Special paper:
Transparencies, tracing paper and colored paperNote: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" × 17"Minimum: A6R/51/2" × 81/2"During duplex copyingMaximum: A3/11" × 17"Minimum: A5R/51/2" × 81/2"
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 25 – 400%, 1% incrementsAuto copy mode: Fixed ratiosMetric
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50/1:0.25Inch
1:1, 1:4.00/1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50/1:0.25100% magnification ........................ Copier: ±0.8%
DF: ±1.5%Enlargement/reduction ................... Copier: ±1.0%
DF: ±1.5%Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4/11" × 81/2": 55 copies/min.A4R/81/2" × 11": 38 copies/min.A3/11" × 17": 28 copies/min.B4 (257 × 364 mm)/81/2" × 14": 32 copies/min.B5: 55 copies/min.B5R: 40 copies/min.
When the DF is used (at 100% magnification):A4/11" × 81/2": 55 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ 3.9 s less (A4/11" × 81/2", 100% magnification, drawer 1, manual copy densitycontrol)
Warm-up time ................................. 120 s or less (room temperature 20°C/68°F, 65%RH)With preheat, switchable between 90 s and 30 s (room temperature 20°C/68°F,65%RH)
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feedCapacity:
Two 500-sheet drawersOne 1000-sheet drawer
One 1500-sheet drawerManual feedCapacity:
Bypass: 100 sheetsMultiple copying ............................. 1 – 999 copiesPhotoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 78 mm)Charging system ............................ Single positive corona chargingRecording system .......................... Semiconductor laserDeveloping system ......................... Dry, reverse developing
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and black tonerDensity control: Developer density detectionToner replenishing: Automatic from a toner bottle
Transfer system ............................. Single minus corona chargeSeparation system ......................... AC separation corona charger system
2BC/D
1-1-4
Fixing system ................................. Heat rollerHeat source:
Halogen heaters (main 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 Vspecifications, sub 970 W for 120 V specifications/1150 W for 220-240 Vspecifications)
Control temperature: 185°C/365°F (at normal ambient temperature)Abnormally high temperature protection devices: 150°C/302°F thermostatsFixing pressure: 265 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lampCleaning system ............................ Cleaning blade and fur brushScanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensorBitmap memory .............................. 128 MB (standard)Image storage memory .................. 20.0 GB (standard)Resolution ...................................... Reading: 600 × 600 dpi
Writing: 1800 equivalent × 600 dpiLight source ................................... Inert gas lampDimensions .................................... 680 (W) × 804 (D) × 1141 (H) mm
2613/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D) × 4415/16" (H)Weight ............................................ Approx. 180 kg/396 lbsFloor requirements ......................... 1331 mm (W) × 804 (D) mm
527/16" (W) × 3111/16" (D)Functions........................................ (1) Self-diagnostics
(2) Preheat(3) Automatic copy density control(4) Original size detection(5) Automatic paper selection(6) Automatic magnification selection(7) Zoom mode(8) XY zoom mode(9) Preset zoom mode
(10) Document management functions(11) Output management functions(12) Photo mode(13) Duplex copy(14) Margin modes(15) Memo mode(16) Border erase modes(17) Combine/merge copy modes(18) Booklet stitching modes(19) Sort/finished mode(20) Auto selection/filing mode(21) Copy management function(22) Language selection function
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A220 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 7.0 A (max.)
Power consumption ....................... 1500 W (max.)Options ........................................... Side deck, document finisher, key counter, printer kit, network scanner kit and
tandem copy kit.
DFOriginal feed system ...................... Automatic feedOriginals ......................................... SheetsOriginal weights ............................. Single-sided original mode: 35 – 160 g/m2
Double-sided original mode: 50 – 120 g/m2
Original paper ................................ Plain paper, thermal paper, art paper and colored paperOriginal sizes.................................. A3 – A5R, folio/11" × 17" – 51/2" × 81/2"No. of originals ............................... Up to 70 sheets (A3, B4, folio, 11" × 17", 81/2" × 14")
Up to 100 sheets (up to A4/11" × 81/2")Up to 30 sheets in the auto selection mode
Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copier
2BC/D
1-1-5
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions
(1) Copier
Figure 1-1-1
6
7
54
3
2
1
!
89
0
(
*&
#$%^
)
⁄
Œ
fl
fi›¤
⁄
‡
·‚‹
„ ´
—
@
1 Operation panel2 Operation right cover3 Front cover4 Drawer 15 Drawer 26 Drawer 37 Drawer 48 Bypass tray9 Insert guides0 Bypass extension! Right cover@ Waste toner box
# Original table$ Original insert guides% DF original reversing cover^ Original set indicator& Original eject table* DF opening/closing lever( Ejection extension) Deck paper conveying unit⁄ Handles for transport¤ Original size indicator lines‹ Contact glass› Total counter
fi Main switchfl Copy eject tray‡ Fixing unit handle— Paper conveying unit handle· Paper conveying unit release
lever‚ Paper conveying unitŒ Duplex unit„ Paper length guide release
levers´ Paper width guide release
levers
2BC/D
1-1-6
(2) Operation panel
7 6 5 4$%^&*0@!
9 18 32#
Figure 1-1-2
1 Start key & indicator lamp2 Stop/clear key3 Reset key4 Energy saver key & indicator lamp5 Interrupt key & indicator lamp6 Management key7 *(default setting) key8 Numeric key9 Touch panel0 Brightness adjustment control dial! Copier key & indicator lamp@ Printer key & indicator lamp
# Scanner key & indicator lamp$ Auto selection key & indicator lamp% Job build key & indicator lamp^ Repeat copy key & indicator lamp& Job queue key & indicator lamp* Document management key &
indicator lamp
2BC/D
1-1-7
1-1-3 Machine cross section
1 Paper feed section2 Main charging section3 Optical section4 Developing section5 Transfer and paper conveying section6 Cleaning section
7 Charge erasing section8 Fixing section9 Feedshift and eject section0 Duplex section! DF
Figure 1-1-3 Machine cross section
Light pathPaper and original path
2BC/D
1-1-8
1-1-4 Drive system
(1) Drive system 1 (optical section)
Figure 1-1-4
1 Scanner motor pulley2 Scanner drive belt3 Scanner drive pulley4 Scanner wire drum5 Scanner wire6 Scanner wire pulley
2BC/D
1-1-9
(2) Drive system 2 (paper feed motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-5
1 Idle gear 302 Pulley 163 Pulley 204 Developing agitation drive belt5 Gear 326 Feed gear 427 Registration clutch gear8 Feed gear 279 Feed low clutch 1 gear 340 Feed gear 49/65! Paper feed motor gear@ Paper feed gear 68
# Paper feed drive pulley 29/52$ Idle pulley 31/42% Tension pulley 20^ Paper feed drive belt& Idle gear 26* Gear 26( Gear 19) Feed high clutch 2 gear⁄ Gear 40¤ Gear 24‹ Feed low clutch 2 gear
2BC/D
1-1-10
(3) Drive system 3 (Deck drive motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-6
1 Pulley 262 Tension pulley3 Paper feed drive belt4 Idle gear 265 Paper feed clutch 3 gear6 Feed clutch 5 gear7 Deck paper feed drive pulley8 Tension pulley 209 Deck paper feed drive belt0 Feed gear 49/65
! Deck drive motor gear@ Pulley 20# Deck conveying belt$ Deck feed clutch gear% Deck gear 27/45^ Idle gear 48& Paper feed clutch 4 gear* Paper feed pulley drive gear( Gear 21) Gear 16
2BC/D
1-1-11
(4) Drive system 4 (image formation motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-7
1 Bypass paper feed idle gear2 Gear 203 Gear 304 Gear 39/255 Drum drive pulley 23/846 Image formation motor gear7 Gear 63/358 Drum pulley 519 Tension pulley
0 Drum drive belt! Gear 19@ Registration gear 24# Registration clutch gear$ Pulley 40/28% Cleaning drive belt^ Gear 26& Gear 30* Drum
Figure 1-1-8 Developing section
1 Toner supply gear2 Developing idle gear3 Developing input gear4 Developing sleeve gear
5 Spiral gear A6 Spiral gear B7 Spiral gear C
2BC/D
1-1-12
(5) Drive system 5 (Paper conveying motor drive train)
Figure 1-1-9
1 Pulley 322 Pulley 243 Pulley 224 Eject drive belt5 Eject drive gear6 Fixing gear 357 Fixing pulley 348 Fixing gear 63/329 Paper conveying motor gear0 Fixing drive belt! Duplex gear 45/30@ Duplex gear 29/42
# Gear 18/26$ Fixing joint gear% Heat roller gear^ Heat roller& Gear 26* Gear 25( Fixing eject joint gear) Pulley 22⁄ Switch back pulley 20¤ Pulley 30‹ Feed shift belt pulley› Feed shift belt
2BC/D
1-1-13
65
4
7
2^&
87%$
90
31
!@#
(6) Drive system 6 (duplex section)
Figure 1-1-10
1 Duplex joint gear2 Clutch gear 263 Paper conveying pulley 404 Paper conveying drive belt5 Paper conveying tension pulley6 Paper conveying pulley 207 Paper conveying pulley 208 Duplex registration gear 20/309 Clutch gear 26
0 Front transfer drive gear! Gear 22@ Gear 18# Gear 17$ Gear 40% Duplex forwarding clutch gear^ Gear 40& Duplex reversing clutch gear
2BC/D
1-1-14
6
9 5
4 3
!@
0
*
%&
$287
1
^
#
As viewed from machine rear
As viewed from machine front
4!
7
8
65910 3
2
(7) Drive system 7 (DF)
Figure 1-1-11 DF (inside rear of machine)
Figure 1-1-12 DF (inside front of machine)
1 Original feed motor pulley2 Pulley 35/22/223 Idle gear 264 Original feed clutch gear5 DF original feed pulley 186 DF forwarding pulley 187 Tension pulley8 Original feed drive belt9 DF forwarding belt
0 DF registration pulley 28/18! Idle gear 15@ Idle gear 20# Switch back gear 18$ DF registration drive belt% Gear 22/35^ Original conveying motor pulley& Gear 28* Original conveying drive belt 1
1 Lower original conveying pulley 25/182 Gear 18/253 Eject gear 184 Middle original conveying pulley 185 Upper original conveying pulley 186 JAM release gear 24
7 Joint gear 148 JAM release gear 149 Tension pulley0 Eject drive belt! Conveying drive belt 2
2BC/D
1-2-1
1-2-1 DrumNote the following when handling or storing the drum.• When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.• Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between –20°C/–4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not higher
than 90% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.• Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.• Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
1-2-2 Developer and tonerStore the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-3 Installation environment
1. Temperature: 10 - 35°C/50 - 95°F 2. Humidity: 15 - 85%RH 3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 12 A
220 - 240 V AC, 7.0 A (max.) 4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ±0.3%/60 Hz ±0.3% 5. Installation location
• Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or otherstrong light when removing paper jams.
• Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed ontothe machine.
• Avoid dust and vibration.• Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.• Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1° ).• Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.• Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/315/16"Machine right: 700 mm/279/16" Machine left: 600 mm/235/8"
Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions
a: 1141 mm/4415/16"b: 680 mm/2613/16"c: 804 mm/3111/16"
a
b
c
d
f
e
d: 1470 mm/577/8"e: 1030 mm/409/16"f: 1375 mm/541/8"
1-3-1
2BC/D-1
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation
(1) Installation procedure
Unpack.
Removing the securing tape and spacer.
Removing the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
Make test copies.
Removing the developing unit.
Adjusting the fixing pressure.
Adding toner.
Setting the cleaning blade.
Applying toner to the cleaning blade (run of maintenance mode U160).
Exit maintenance mode.
Start
Installing the drum.
Connect the power cord.
Initializing the developer (run of maintenance mode U130).
Adding developer.
Completion of the machine installation.
Connect the drawer heater relay cable and attach the OFF label.
1-3-2
2BC/D-1
Figure 1-3-1 Unpacking
Unpack.
1 Copier2 Machine cover3 Bottom pad4 Upper left pad5 Upper right pad6 Skid7 Hinge joints8 Eject pad9 Drawer spacer0 Drawer spacer! Drawer spacer@ Upper case# Outer case
$ Supports% Bar code labels^ Power code& Eject tray* Drum set( Tray spacer) OFF label⁄ Size palates¤ Screws (M3 × 08 flat-head taping chromate)‹ Plastic bag› Operation guidefi Plastic bag
@
*
^
&
)›
(
fi
‹
¤
# %
$
3
7
6
0
!
9
9
1
2
85
4
⁄
1-3-3
2BC/D
1. Remove the piece of tape that secures thebypass tray.
2. Remove the piece of tape that secures the rightcover.
3. Remove the two pieces of tape that secure theright rear cover.
4. Remove the four pieces of tape that secure thedrawers.
5. Remove the piece of tape that secures the frontcover.
6. Open the front cover and remove the piece oftape that secures the DF.
Removing the securing tape and the spacer.
Figure 1-3-2
Figure 1-3-4
7. Pull out the duplex unit and remove the twopieces of tape that secure the guide plates.
TapeTape
TapesTapes
Figure 1-3-3
Tapes
8. Pull out drawer 1 and drawer 2 and remove thespacer and the two blue screws from eachdrawer.
Blue screw
Blue screw
Spacer
1-3-4
2BC/D-1
Removing the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
1. Remove the securing tape from the two pins onthe light source unit 1 and from the pin on thelight source unit 2, and then remove these pins.
Light source unit 1 pins
Light source unit 2 pin
Figure 1-3-5
Figure 1-3-6
9. Pull out drawer 3, remove the spacer.10. Pull out drawer 4, remove the spacer. * The lift or the guide may be deformed or damaged when
turns the main switch on with the spacers mounted.Consequently, be sure to remove the spacers.
11. Open the DF and remove the piece of tape thatsecures the original inverse cover.
12. Remove the paper from the platen.
Figure 1-3-7
Paper
Tape
Spacer
Spacer
1-3-5
2BC/D
Removing the developing unit.
3. Remove the three screws and the connector thatsecure the image formation unit and turn downthe paper conveying unit release lever to pull outthe image formation unit.
1. Open the front cover, pull out the hinge shaft toremove, and remove the front cover.
Figure 1-3-8
Figure 1-3-10
Figure 1-3-9
Front cover
Hinge shaft
Paper conveying unit release lever
ConnectorImage formation unit
2. Remove the screw holding the image formationleft cover and then the cover. Image formation left cover
1-3-6
2BC/D
4. Remove the two screws and open the imageformation rail.
5. Remove the 1P connector from the developingunit and the 4P connector from the sub tonerhopper. Raise the shutter a little and slide ittoward the front side of the machine.
6. Turn the auxiliary toner hopper to the right of themachine.
7. Hold the front and the rear of the developing unitand remove the unit from the image formationunit.
Figure 1-3-11
Figure 1-3-13
Figure 1-3-12
Image formation rail
1P connector Sub toner hopper
4P connector
Shutter
Developing unit
1-3-7
2BC/D
Adding developer.
1. Remove the two screws and the two hooks andremove the upper developer cover.
* When adding developer, place the developingunit on a level location.
2. Shake the developer bottle sufficiently to stir thedeveloper.
3. While turning the developing magnet roller gearand the developing spiral cam in the directionsindicated by the arrows alternately, adddeveloper uniformly into the developing unit.
* Never turn the developing magnet roller gear inthe reverse direction.
4. Refit the upper developer cover to its originalposition.
Figure 1-3-14
Figure 1-3-15
Hook
Hook
Upper developer cover
Developer
CamGear
1-3-8
2BC/D-1
1. Remove the two connectors from the maincharger unit.
2. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the pin atthe rear of the main charger unit and remove themain charger unit from the image formation unit.
3. Remove the screw each from the front drumpositioning plate and the rear drum positioningplate and remove the plates.
4. Fit the front drum positioning plate and the reardrum positioning plate to the drum, and set themon the image formation unit.
5. Secure the front drum positioning plate and therear drum positioning plate with a screw each.
* Fit the drum so that the side with the thin shaft ofthe drum flange is placed on the front side of themachine and the side with the thick shaft of thedrum flange is placed on the rear side.
6. Refit the main charger unit and the developingunit to their original positions.
7. Refit the image formation unit to their originalpositions.
* Be sure to reconnect the connector of the imageformation unit.
Figure 1-3-16
Figure 1-3-18
Figure 1-3-17
Installing the drum. Main charger unitConnector
Pin
Connector
Front drum positioning plate
Rear drum positioning plate
Front drum positioning plate
Rear drum positioning plateDrum
1-3-9
2BC/D
1. Remove the blue screw that secures the paperconveying unit.
2. Pull out the paper conveying unit.
Figure 1-3-19
Figure 1-3-20
Adjusting the fixing pressure.
3. Open the eject cover. 4. Turn the fixing press nuts on the front and rear of
the fixing unit clockwise to adjust the fixingpressure.
5. Close the eject cover. 6. Push the paper conveying unit into the machine
and raise the paper conveying unit release leverto secure the unit.
Paper conveying unit
Blue screw
Eject cover
Fixing press nut
Fixing press nut
1-3-10
2BC/D
1. Refit the front cover to its original position. 2. Connect the power cord to the connector on the copier.* * 200-240 V specifications only. 3. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet. and turn on the main switch with the front cover open.
1. After warm-up starts and the message “Close the front cover.” appears, use the numeric keys toenter “10871087” to start the maintenance mode.
2. Use the numeric keys to enter “130” and press the Start key. 3. Close the front cover. 4. Press the Start key. * After approximately two minutes, the toner sensor control voltage and the toner control level will
be automatically set and the preset values will be displayed on the touch panel.Example of displayINPUT: 130 (toner sensor output voltage)CONTROL: 125 (toner sensor control voltage)TARGET: 103 (toner feed start level)HUMID: 65 (absolute humidity)
5. Press the Stop/clear key.
1. Use the numeric keys to enter “160” and press the Start key. 2. Press the Start key. * The drum will be covered with toner and driving will stop automatically.
1. Open and close the front cover, use the numeric keys to enter “001”, and press the Start key. * The machine will exit from the maintenance mode.
Figure 1-3-21
Connecting the power cord.
Initializing the developer (run of maintenance mode U130).
Applying toner to the cleaning blade (run of maintenance mode U160).
Exit maintenance mode.
Setting the cleaning blade.
1. Open the front cover. Remove the three screwsand the connector that secure the imageformation unit and turn down the paper conveyingunit release lever to pull out the image formationunit.
2. After checking that the drum is covered withtoner, loosen the blade securing pin on the leftside of the imaging unit, slide the blade releaselever in the direction indicated by the arrow, andtighten the blade securing pin.
* The cleaning blade will be set so that it touchesthe drum.
3. Push the image formation unit into the machine toset, and raise the paper conveying unit releaselever.
4. Fit the three screws and the connector to securethe image formation unit.
Blade release lever
Blade securing pin
1-3-11
2BC/D
1. Open the operation right cover.
3. Shake the toner bottle up and down and fromside to side approximately 10 times.
2. Hold a new toner bottle upside down and tap thebottom approximately 10 times.
Figure 1-3-22
Figure 1-3-24
Figure 1-3-23
Operation right cover
Toner bottle
Adding toner.
1-3-12
2BC/D
4. Push the round hole of the toner bottle to themetal pin at the opening for toner replenishment.
5. While pushing down the toner bottle, turn it 90°clockwise.
7. To drop toner completely, tap the side of thetoner bottle approximately 10 times.
6. Wait until toner drops.
Figure 1-3-25
Figure 1-3-27
Figure 1-3-26
Metal pin
1-3-13
2BC/D-1
8. Turn the toner bottle to the original position whilepushing it down, and gently remove it from theopening for toner replenishment.
9. Close the operation right cover.
Figure 1-3-28
Figure 1-3-29
Drawer heater relay cable
CN12
Power souce PCB
Drawer heater relay cable
1. Remove the lower rear cover. 2. Connect the connector of the drawer heater relay
cable to CN12 of the power source PCB. 3. Refit the lower rear cover.
Connect the drawer heater relay cable and attach the OFF label.
1-3-14
2BC/D-1
Figure 1-3-30
Make test copies.
1. Set paper in a drawer and execute a test copyrun.
Completion of the machine installation.
OFF label
4. Attach the OFF label to the OFF ( ) side of themain switch.
1-3-15
2BC/D-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes
Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance item No.
Contents Factory setting
U253U254U255U256U258U260U263U264
U266
U329U330
U331U343U344U347U350U355
User setting
Switching between double and single countsTurning auto start function on/offSetting auto clear timeTurning auto preheat/energy saver function on/offSwitching copy operation at toner empty detectionChanging the copy count timingSetting the paper ejection when copying from the DFSetting the display order of the date
Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documentsSetting Auto rotation copy/Sort copySetting the number of sheets to enter stacking moceduring sort operationSwitching the paper ejection modeSwitching between duplex/simplex copy modeSetting preheat/energy saver modeSetting auto drawer size detectionSetting the ID-code error outputSetting the output mode for face up output
Exposure modeExposure stepsOriginal image qualityPaper selectionDefault drawerDefault magnificationMargin widthBorder erase width
Copy limitAuto shutoff timeAuto preheat time
Double count (A3/LEDGER)ON90sONSINGLE MODE, 5After ejectionFACE-DOWNMonth/Day/Year (inch)Day/Month/Year (metric)
7ON
100FACE UPOFFENERGY STARONOFFFIRST PRINT
Manual1 stepText+PhotoAPSDrawer1ManualLeft: 6 mm / 1/4" Top: 0 mm / 0"Outside border: 6 mm / 1/4"Center area: 6 mm / 1/4"9999015
2BC/D
1-3-16
Figure 1-3-32
1-3-3 Installing the key counter (option)
Key counter installation requires the following parts:Key counter set (P/N 2A369703)Contents of the set:• Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010)• Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)• Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060022)• Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)• Key counter socket assembly (P/N 41529210)• Four (4) M4 × 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)• Two (2) M4 × 10 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304100)• One (1) M4 × 20 bronze TP-A screw (P/N B4304200)• One (1) M4 × 6 chrome TP-A screw (P/N B4104060)• One (1) M3 × 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080)• One (1) M4 × 30 bronze binding screw (P/N B1304300)• Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)• One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)
Procedure1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the
key counter retainer using the two screwsand nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key countercover using the two screws, and attach thekey counter retainer to the mount using thetwo screws.
Key counter retainer (66060030)
Key counter mount (66060040)
Key counter cover (2A360010)
M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
M4 × 6 screws (B4304060)
M3 nut (C2303000)
M3 × 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)
Key counter socket assembly (41529210)
2BC/D
1-3-17
3. Remove the developing duct cover andmiddle right cover.
4. Cut out the aperture plate on the middle rightcover using nippers.
5. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counterthrough the apertures in the key countercover retainer and middle right cover, andinsert into the 4-pin connector inside themachine.
6. Seat the projection of the key counter coverretainer in the aperture in the middle rightcover, and fasten them both to the machineusing the two screws.
7. Refit all the removed parts.8. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter
assembly inserted to the key counter coverretainer on the machine.
9. Insert the key counter into the key counterassembly.
10. Turn the main switch on and enter themaintenance mode.
11. Run maintenance item U204 and select“KEY-COUNTER.”
12. Exit the maintenance mode.13. Check that the message requesting the key
counter to be inserted is displayed on thetouch panel when the key counter is pulledout.
14. Check that the counter counts up as copiesare made.
Figure 1-3-33
Key counter cover retainer(66060022)
Key counter cover
M4 × 30 screw(B1304300)
M4 × 6 screw(B4104060)
4-pin connector
4-pin connector
Aperture Middle right cover
M4 × 20 screw(B4304200)
2BC/D
1-3-18
1-3-4 Installing the multi/simple finisher (option)
Preparation 1. Attach the paper insertion aid guide plate to
the left cover of the copier and lock down withthe two M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screws.
Figure 1-3-34
Figure 1-3-35
Figure 1-3-36
2. Attach the finisher connecting plate to thecopier left cover and then hold them togetherwith the two M4 × 12 binding screws.
3. Attach the connecting sponge to the finisherby aligning the sponge to the upper end “a”and front end “b” of the paper port of thefinisher.
Left cover
Paper insertion aid guide plate
Finisher connecting plate
Left cover
a
b
a
Connecting sponge
2BC/D
1-3-19
4. Open the front cover of the finisher. 5. Remove the screw and raise the connecting
lever at the bottom of the finisher. Fitting theprojection into the hole lowers the hooks.
6. Remove the screw and pull out theconnecting rail at the upper part of thefinisher.
Figure 1-3-37
Figure 1-3-38
Connecting lever
Hole
Hooks
Projection
Connecting rail
2BC/D
1-3-20
7. Join the finisher and the copier by hangingthe hooks onto the fittings inside the copier.
8. Join the finisher and the copier so that thelong pin of the finisher connecting plate isinserted into the hole at the rear of thefinisher and the two short pins into the holeson the connecting rail.
9. Make sure that the finisher is securely joinedwith the copier. Then, push the connecting railin and lock back down with the screw.
Figure 1-3-39
Figure 1-3-40
Finisher
Finisher connecting plate
Hooks Fittings
Long pin
Connecting railHoles
Hole
Short pins
Connecting rail
2BC/D
1-3-21
10. Slide the connecting lever rightward and lockdown with the screw removed in step.
Figure 1-3-41
Figure 1-3-42
Connecting lever
Separate retainers
Blue screws
Intermediate tray
Blue screws
11. Remove the four blue screws locking each ofthe two separate retainers to the intermediatetray and detach both retainers.
2BC/D
1-3-22
Figure 1-3-43
Figure 1-3-44
Figure 1-3-45
12. Pull out the intermediate tray.13. Remove the strip of fixing tape from the
release lever.
Strip of fixing tape
Intermediate tray
Release lever
14. Raise the release lever to open theintermediate tray, and then remove the fourstrips of fixing tape.
15. Insert a stapler cartridge into each of thestaplers and of the intermediate tray. Press onthe cartridges until they are securely locked.Note: With the simple finisher, attach just onestapler cartridge to the stapler.
Strips of fixing tape
Intermediate tray
Release lever
Strips of fixing tape
Strips of fixing tape
Strips of fixing tape
Stapler cartridge
Stapler
Stapler
Intermediate tray
2BC/D
1-3-23
Figure 1-3-46
Figure 1-3-47
21. Connect the signal cable of the finisher to theconnector of the copier.
22. Plug the copier’s power cable into a walloutlet and turn the copier on from the mainswitch.
16. Fit the main tray with two hexagonal nuts.17. Secure the main tray with two pins.18. Attach the sub tray to the finisher by inserting
the projections at the front and back of thesub tray into the holes of the finisher. (For themulti finisher only)
19. Attach label A to the recessed portion on theside of the main tray.
20. Attach label B to the recessed portion on theside of the sub tray. (For the multi finisheronly)
Main trayHexagonal nuts
Pins
Sub tray
Hole
Hole
Projection
Label A Label B
Projection
Signal cable
2BC/D
1-3-24
1-3-5 Installing the side deck (option)
Preparation 1. Remove the screw locking down the
developing duct cover followed by the cover.Then, disconnect the 2-pin connector fromthe cooling fan.
2. Remove the six screws locking down thebypass table and open the table. Open theright cover halfway and detach the middleright cover.
3. Remove the two pins locking down the rightrear lower cover and then detach the cover bysliding in the direction of the arrow.
4. Remove the two screws locking down theright front lower cover followed by the cover.
Figure 1-3-48
Figure 1-3-49
Figure 1-3-50
Bypass table
Right cover
Developing duct cover
2-pin connector
Middle right cover
Right front lower cover
Pin
Pin
Right rear lower cover
Knock-out pieces
Right cover
Paper feed section lower cover
Knock-out piece
5. Break off the three knock-out pieces on theright cover of the copier.Note: Be sure to remove the burrs from thecover using needle-nose pliers or a knife.
6. Remove the four screws locking down thepaper feed section lower cover followed bythe cover. Break off the knock-out piece onthe paper feed section lower cover.Note: Be sure to remove the burrs from thecover using needle-nose pliers or a knife.
2BC/D
1-3-25
Figure 1-3-51
Figure 1-3-52
Figure 1-3-53
7. Reattach the paper feed section lower cover,right rear lower cover and right front lowercover.
8. Open the right cover and remove from thecopier by raising the cover in the direction ofthe arrow.
9. Attach the upper merge guide with two M4 ×8 TP-P tight screws.Note: With the 55 cpm copier, be sure to usethe merge guide with “2BD” etched on it.
Right cover
Lower merge guide
M4 × 8 TP-P tight screws
10. Attach the upper merge guide with two M4 ×8 TP-P tight screws.
Upper merge guide
M4 × 8 TP-P tight screws
2BC/D
1-3-26
Figure 1-3-55
Figure 1-3-56
11. Lock down the upper and lower merge guideswith the four M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screws.
12. Attach the interlock switch backstop to theright rear lower cover with the M4 × 12 flathead screw.
13. Reattach the developing duct cover, middleright cover and right cover.Note: When reattaching the developing unitduct cover, be sure to reconnect the 2-pinconnector to the cooling fan.
Figure 1-3-54
Upper merge guide
Lower merge guide
M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screws
14. Pull out the retaining rail from the side deckand insert into the paper feed section lowercover of the copier.
Right rear lower cover
Interlock switch backstop
M4 × 12 flat head screw
Side deck
Paper feed section lower cover
Retaining rail
2BC/D
1-3-27
15. Open the right cover. Attach the retaining railto the copier with the V-groove of the railaligned with the center of the scale located atthe base of the copier, using the two M4 × 6TP-A chromate screws.
16. When the side deck is installed on the copier,connect the deck signal cable to theconnector on the copier rear.
Figure 1-3-57
Figure 1-3-58
Scale
Center
Retaining rail
M4 × 6 TP-A chromate screws
V-groove
Deck signal cableConnector
2BC/D
1-3-28
Figure 1-3-61
Figure 1-3-59
Figure 1-3-60
1-3-6 Installing the Network scanner kit (option)
Preparation 1. Remove three screws and remove the middle
rear B cover. 2. Remove two screws and remove the middle
rear C cover. 3. Remove four screws and remove the middle
rear cover.
4. Remove the four screws and remove theupper sequence cover.
5. Remove the two screws and remove thecover.
6. Firmly push connector CN1 on the scannerboard all the way into connector CN4 on themain PCB.
7. Fasten the scanner board to the controller-box cover with two screws.
8. Refit the covers that have been removed instep 1 to 4.
Middle rear B cover Middle rear C cover
Middle rear cover
Upper sequence coverCover
CN1
CN4
Scanner board
2BC/D
1-3-29
Figure 1-3-62
Figure 1-3-63
230 V specifications only 9. Fit the Ethernet cable to the core by winding it
one turn around the core.10. Fit the Ethernet cable described in step 9 to
the Ethernet cable connector.
11. Secure the Ethernet cable to the lower leftscrew at the lower rear cover with the clamp.
Core
Ethernet cable connector
Clamp
2BC/D
1-3-30
Figure 1-3-64
Figure 1-3-65
1-3-7 Installing the Printer kit (option)
Preparation 1. Remove two screws and take off the cover.
2. Push the printing system all the way in alongthe rails, and fasten it to the controller boxwith two screws.
Cover
Printing system
2BC/D
1-3-31
Figure 1-3-66
Figure 1-3-67
Install the (optional) printer network kit. 3. Remove two screws and take off the cover. 4. Push the printer network kit all the way in
along the rails, and fasten it to the controllerbox with two screws.
Install the (optional) hard disk. 5. Remove two screws and take off the cover. 6. Push the hard disk all the way in along the
rails, and fasten it to the controller box withtwo screws.
Cover Printer network kit
Cover Hard disk
2BC/D
1-3-32
Figure 1-3-68
Figure 1-3-69
Installing the Optional Bar-Code Reader 7. Fasten the serial connector in place with two
screws.
Serial connector
Installing the Optional Memory DIMM 8. Remove the printing system, and insert the
optional memory DIMM firmly into either ofthe memory slots. Push the DIMM firmly intothe slot so that the two hooks (one hook ateach end of the slot) snap closed.• The board provides two DIMM slots, and
can accept up to two optional DIMMs. Ifinstalling a single DIMM, you can use eitherslot.
Optional memory DIMM
Two hooks
Two hooks Memory slots
2BC/D
1-3-33
1-3-8 Installing the tandem kit (option)
Preparation 1. Remove the two screws securing the middle
rear C cover and then the cover. 2. Remove the five screws securing the middle
rear cover and then the cover. 3. Remove the five screws securing the lower
rear cover and then the cover.
4. Remove the eleven screws securing theupper and lower sequence covers and thenthe covers.
5. Remove the two screws securing theinterface mounting plate and then the plate.
6. Remove the two screws securing theinterface cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-3-70
Figure 1-3-71
Figure 1-3-72
Middle rear C cover
Middle rear cover
Lower rear cover
Upper and lowersequence covers
Interface mounting plat
Interface cover
2BC/D
1-3-34
Figure 1-3-73
Figure 1-3-74
Figure 1-3-75
7. Insert CN2 on the assembly relay PCB intoCN1 on the interface PCB for installation.
8. Insert CN1 on the assembly relay PCB intoCN5 on the main PCB of the copier.
9. Secure the interface PCB with an M4 × 6binding screw.
10. Insert the 2-pin connector on the S-BOX wireinto 2-pin connector CN1 on the interfacePCB.
Interface PCB
Assembly relay PCB
CN1
CN2
CN1
CN5
Main PCB
M4 × 6 binding screw
CN1
Interface PCB
S-BOX wire
2BC/D
1-3-35
Figure 1-3-76
Figure 1-3-77
11. Secure the interface mounting plate with thetwo screws removed in step 5.
12. Secure the connector of the interface PCB tothe interface mounting plate with two M2.6 ×5 brass binding screws.
13. Refit the upper and lower sequence covers,the lower rear cover, the middle rear cover,and the middle rear C cover.
14. Connect the interface cable to the connectorof the interface PCB.
Interface mounting plate
Screws
M2.6 × 5 brass binding screws
Interface cable
2BC/D
1-4-1
1-4-1 Copier management
This copier is equipped with the maintenance mode for service personnel and the management mode that can be used alsoby users (mainly by copier administrator). In this copier management mode, settings such as default settings can bechanged.
(1) Using the copier management mode
Press the [Management] key.
Press the [Print Form] key.
Press the [Language] key.
Enter the management code.
Press the * (Default setting) key.
Execute department manage-ment items (page 1-4-2).
Press the [Close] key.Press the [Weekly timer]([Week timer]) key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Make weekly timer settings (page 1-4-2).
Press the [Copy default] key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Make copy default settings (page 1-4-3).
Output the setting list (page 1-4-7).
Press the [Machine default] key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Make machine default settings (page 1-4-5).
Press the [Document management] key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Make document management default settings (page 1-4-6).
Press the [BOX management]([Hard Disk management]) key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Execute hard disk management items (page 1-4-7).
Press the [Close] key.
Press the [Bypass setting] key.
Press the [Close] key.
Enter the management code.
Make bypass settings(page 1-4-6).
Set the language (page 1-4-7).
Start
End
2BC/D
1-4-2
(2) Setting department management items
Registering a new department code
Sets a department code and the limit of thenumber of copies for that department.
1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key.2. Press the [Register] key and press the [#
keys].3. Enter a department code (8-digit) using the
numeric keys and press the [# keys].4. Enter the number of copies limit using the
numeric keys. The copy limit can be set to any1 page increment between 1 and 999999.Entering “0” enables unlimited copying.
5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [Close] key.7. Press the [On] key.8. Press the [Close] key.
Deleting a department code
1. Press the [ID-code Reg./Del.] key.2. Select the department code to be deleted and
press the [Delete] key.3. Select “Yes” or “No”.4. Press the [Close] key.5. Press the [On] key.6. Press the [Close] key.
Altering the copy limit
1. Press the [# of copy correct] key.2. Select the department code to be altered and
press the [Correction] key.3. Enter the number of copies limit using the
numeric keys. The copy limit can be set to any1 page increment between 1 and 999999.Entering “0” enables unlimited copying.
4. Press the [Close] key.5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [On] key.7. Press the [Close] key.
Clearing copy counts
1. Press the [Counter clear] key.2. Select “Yes” or “No”.3. Press the [Close] key.
Viewing copy counts
1. Press the [Counter by ID-code] key.2. View copy counts using the cursor up/down
keys.3. Press the [Close] key.4. Press the [Close] key.
Print management list
1. Press the [Print the list] key.If A4/11" × 81/2" paper is present, the list isautomatically printed out. Otherwise, selectthe paper source and press the start key.
Enabling/disabling department management
1. Select “On” or “Off”.
Enabling/disabling printer department management
1. Select “On” or “Off” under “Printer”.
Setting printer error report
When the printer department management isenabled, if printing is performed with an incorrectdepartment code, an error report can be output.
1. Press the [On] key under “Printer”.2. Press the [Print Err. PRT.] key.3. Press the [On] key.4. Press the [Close] key.
(3) Weekly timer
Setting weekly timer
Sets the time at which the copier is to be turnedON or OFF during each day of the week, orwhether it will be left ON or OFF all day on any ofthose days.
1. Select the day of the week and press the[Change #] key.
2. To set the time at which the copier is to beturned on or off, press the [Select work time]key and press the +/- keys to select thepower-on hour and minute and the power-offhour and minute.To set the copier OFF all day, press the [Allday-OFF] key.To set the copier ON all day, press the [Allday-ON] key.
3. Press the [Close] key.
Canceling the weekly timer function temporarily
1. Select the day of the week and press the[Change #] key.
2. Press the [On] key under “Cancel”.3. Press the [Close] key.
Turning the [weekly timer] key ON/OFF
1. Select “On” or “Off”.
2BC/D-1
1-4-3
(4) Copy default
Exposure mode
Selects the exposure mode at power-on.1. Select “Exposure mode” and press the
[Change #] key.2. Select “Manual” or “Auto”.
Exposure steps
Sets the number of exposure steps for themanual exposure mode.
1. Select “Exposure steps” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select “1 step” or “0.5 step”.
Original image quality
Selects the copy quantity mode at power-on.1. Select “Original image quality” (“Image quality
Original”) and press the [Change #] key.2. Select “Text+Photo”, “Photo” or “Text”.
Custom original size (setting No. 1 - No. 4)
Sets the custom original sizes.1. Select one of “Original size” settings (“custom
1” through “custom 4”) and press the [Change#] key.
2. Press the [On] key.3. Press the +/- keys to set Y (width).
Setting range: 2 to 11" (inch specifications)50 to 297 mm (metric specifications)
4. Press the +/- keys to set X (length).Setting range: 2 to 17" (inch specifications)50 to 432 mm (metric specifications)
Eco print
Selects the toner economy mode to beautomatically on or off at power-on.
1. Select “Eco print” and press the [Change #]key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Paper selection
Sets whether the same sized paper as theoriginal to be copied is automatically selected.
1. Select “Paper selection”(“Select paper”) andpress the [Change #] key.
2. Select “APS” or “Default cassette”.
Select paper type (APS)
Specifies paper types to be selected for the autopaper selection mode.
1. Select “Select paper type(APS)” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Press the [On] key.3. Select the paper type. (Multiple types can be
selected.)
Default drawer
Sets the drawer to be selected in cases such asafter the reset key is pressed.
1. Select “Default drawer”(“Default cassette”)and press the [Change #] key.
2. Select priority drawer.
Drawer for cover paper
Sets the drawer to be selected for cover paper.1. Select “Drawer for cover paper” and press the
[Change #] key.2. Select the drawer for cover paper.
Default magnification
Selects whether auto magnification selection or100% magnification is to be given priority whenthe sizes of the original and copy paper aredifferent.
1. Select “Default magnification”(“Default mode”)and press the [Change #] key.
2. Select “Manual” or “AMS”.
Auto exposure adjustment
Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.1. Select “Auto exposure adj. (Auto)” and press
the [Change #] key.2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjust
default setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3
Auto exposure adjustment (OCR)
Adjusts the exposure for scanning with OCR inthe scanner mode.
1. Select “Auto exposure adj. (OCR)” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjustdefault setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3
Manual exposure adjustment (Mixed)
Adjusts the exposure to be used when text andphoto original is selected for the image mode.
1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Mixed)” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjustdefault setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3
Manual exposure adjustment (Text)
Adjusts the exposure to be used when textoriginal is selected for the image mode.
1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Text)” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjustdefault setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3
2BC/D-1
1-4-4
Display register key
Sets whether or not to display the Register key inthe copy operation screen.
1. Select “Display register key” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Black-line correction
Reduces black lines that may be caused whenthe DF is used.
1. Select “Correct. fine black line” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Customize the base screen (main function)
Changes the layout of the main functions of thebase screen.
1. Select “Customize (Main function)” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Change the layout to press [Move ahead] or[Move to behind].
Customize the copy operating screen (add function)
Changes the layout of the functions except themain functions of the copy operating screens.
1. Select “Customize (Add function)” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Change the layout to press [ ← ].
Manual exposure adjustment (Photo)
Adjusts the exposure to be used when photooriginal is selected for the image mode.
1. Select “Manual exp. adj. (Photo)” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Press the [Lighter] or [Darker] key to adjustdefault setting of copy exposure.Setting range: -3 to +3
Margin width
Sets the default setting of the margin width for themargin copying.
1. Select “Default margin width” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Press the up, down, right, and left cursor keysto set the default settings.Setting range: 0 to 3/4" (inch specifications)0 to 18 mm (metric specifications)
Border erase width
Sets the default setting of the border erase widthfor the border erase mode.
1. Select “Default erase width” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Press the +/- keys to adjust default erasewidth.Setting range:
Outside border:0 to 3/4" (inch specifications)0 to 18 mm (metric specifications)
Center area:0 to 1 1/2" (inch specifications)0 to 36 mm (metric specifications)
Copy limit
Sets the number of copies limit for multiplecopying.
1. Select “Preset limit” and press the [Change #]key.
2. Press the +/- keys to set copy preset in onejob.Setting range: 1 to 999 copies
Modify Copy
Disables the modify copy function or enables themodify copy function in the default mode.
1. Select “Modify Copy” and press the [Change#] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off” under “Function”.3. Select “On” or “Off” under “Default”.
Job Queue Report
Sets whether or not the job queue report isselected.
1. Select “Job Queue Report” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select “off”, “On/All copy job” (“On/(Allcopy)”) or “On/reserved” (“On/reserv.job”).
2BC/D-1
1-4-5
Auto shutoff time
Sets the auto shutoff time.1. Select “Auto shut-off time” and press the
[Change #] key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto shutoff
time.Setting range: 15 to 240 minutes
Auto preheat time
Sets the auto preheat time.1. Select “Auto preheat time” and press the
[Change #] key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the auto preheat
time.Setting range: 1 to 45 minutesNote: Set the auto preheat time to be shorterthan the auto shutoff time.
Copy eject location setting
Sets the copy eject location when a finisher and amulti-job tray are installed.
1. Select “Select Copy output mode” and pressthe [Change #] key.
2. Select the eject location.
Key sound
Sets if a beep sounds when a key on the keypress panel is pressed.
1. Select “Key sound ON/OFF” and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Silent mode
Selects whether or not to enter silent mode aftercopying.
1. Select “Silent Mode” and press the [Change#] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
Day & time
Sets the current date and time.1. Select “Day & time” and press the [Change #]
key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the year, month, day,
hour, and minute respectively.
Time difference
Sets the time difference.1. Select “Time difference” and press the
[Change #] key.2. Press the +/- keys to set the time difference.
Setting range: +12:00 to -12:00
(5) Machine default
Auto drawer switching
Enables or disables the auto drawer switchingfunction and sets whether “All types of paper” or“Feed same paper type” is selected.
1. Select “Auto drawer switching” (“Autocassette switching”) and press the [Change #]key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.3. Select “All types of paper” or “Feed same
paper type”.
Paper size (drawer No.1 & No.2)
Sets the size of paper that is loaded in drawers 1and 2.
1. Select one of the “Paper size” settings (“1stdrawers” or “2nd drawer”) and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select the paper size.
Paper type (drawer No.1 - No.5)
Sets the type of paper for drawers 1 through 5.1. Select one of “Paper type” settings (“1st
drawer” through "5th drawer") and press the[Change #] key.
2. Select the paper type.
Select paper type (2 sided)
Sets whether or not each of custom paper types(custom 1 - custom 8) will be available for 2 sidedcopying.
1. Select “Select paper type (2 sided)” andpress the [Change #] key.
2. Select one of the “custom” paper typesettings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) andset “On” or “Off”.
Select paper type (for used paper)
Sets whether or not the used paper function willbe turned on for each custom type of paper(custom 1 - custom 8).
1. Select “Select paper (Used Paper)” [“Select‘used paper’ type”] and press the [Change #]key.
2. Select one of the “custom” paper typesettings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) andset “On” or “Off”.
Select paper type (for high-resistance paper)
Sets whether or not the high-resistance paperfunction will be turned on for each custom type ofpaper (custom 1 - custom 8).
1. Select “Sel.(High resist.paper)” [“Sel.‘Highresist.paper’”] and press the [Change #] key.
2. Select one of the “custom” paper typesettings (“custom 1” through “custom 8”) andset “On” or “Off”.
2BC/D-1
1-4-6
(6) Bypass setting
Paper size and paper type settings
Sets the paper size and paper type for thebypass settings.When using special papers such as transparency,cards, and postcards, be sure to set the papertype to prevent faulty transfer and faulty fixing.
1. To enable the auto paper size detection,press the [Auto Detection] key and select“Centimeter” or “Inch”.To set a custom size, press the [Input size]key and press the +/- keys to set the papersize.Setting range: Width: 3 7/8" - 11 5/8" (inchspecifications)Length: 5 7/8" - 17"Width: 98 - 297 mm (metric specifications)Length: 148 - 432 mm
2. Press the [Select paper type] key.3. Select the paper type.4. Press the [Close] key.
Other standard size setting
Sets a special standard size.1. Press the [Others standard] key.2. Press the [Select size] key.3. Select the paper size.4. Press the [Close] key.
(7) Document management default setting
Document list print out
Prints out each job list.1. Press the function key to print out the
document list you want.
Reset box
Prints out each job list.1. Press the function key to delete all data you
don’t want.2. Press the [Yes] key.
Box name setting
Sets the name of synergy print box.1. Press the [Box editting] key.2. Select the desired box.3. Press the [Change #] key.4. Enter the box name.5. Press the [End] key.6. Press the [Yes] key.7. Press the [Close] key.8. Press the [Job cancel] key.
Box password setting
Sets the password for the synergy box.1. Press the [Box editting] key.2. Select the desired box.3. Select “Password” and press the [Change #]
key.4. Enter the password and press the [Close]
key.5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [Job cancel] key.
Box data deletion
Deletes the data in the synergy print box.1. Press the [Box editting] key.2. Select the desired box.3. Press the [Reset Box] key.4. Press the [Yes] key.5. Press the [Close] key.6. Press the [Job cancel] key.
Duration to save document data setting
Sets the duration to save the document data inthe synergy print box.
1. Press the [Document data saving term]([Document data save period]) key.
2. Press the +/- keys to set the duration.Setting range: 1 to 7 daysTo save documents with no specific duration,press the [Save without duration] key.
3. Press the [Close] key.
Management code change
Changes the management code.1. Select “Management code change” and press
the [Change #] key.2. Enter the 4-digit management code using the
numeric keys and press the enter key.
Auto shutoff
Sets whether the auto shutoff function isavailable.
1. Select “Auto shut-off” and press the [Change#] key.
2. Select “On” or “Off”.
2BC/D
1-4-7
(8) Hard disk management
Deletes the invalid data in the hard disk.1. Press the [On] key.2. Press the [Close] key.
(9) Report
Outputs the setting reports.1. Press the [Print form] key.2. Select the report.
Copy report/Option report/Counter report/Machine report
(10) Language
Switches the language to be displayed on thepress panel.
1. Press the [Language] key.2. Select the display language.
2BC/D
1-4-8
1-4-2 Maintenance mode
The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys.
Enter “001” using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same maintenance item?
Run another maintenance item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
2BC/D-1
1-4-9
General
Initialization
Drive, paperfeed, paperconveying andcooling system
Optical
U000 Outputting an own-status report —
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode —
U002 Setting the factory default data —
U003 Setting the service telephone number ***************U004 Setting the machine number 000000
U005 Copying without paper —
U018 Displaying the ROM checksum —
U019 Displaying the ROM version —
U020 Initializing all data —
U021 Initializing all memory —
U022 Initializing backup memory —
U024 HDD formatting —
U030 Checking motor operation —
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying —
U032 Checking clutch operation —
U033 Checking solenoid operation —
U034 Setting paper timing• Leading edge registration/Leading edge registration for duplex copying 5/0• Center line/Center line for duplex copying –2.8/0
U035 Setting folio size• Length 330• Width 210
U037 Checking fan motor operation —
U050 Setting switchback drive• Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing 160• Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing 110
(for 11" × 17" copy paper only)• Duplex reversing clutch-on timing 50• Duplex reversing clutch-off timing 132
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller• Drawer 1 –10• Drawer 2 3• Bypass tray 25• Duplex copying (second face) 18
U053 Adjusting motor speed standard• Image formation motor 6• Paper conveying motor 3• Polygon motor 0
U054 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveying• Duplex paper feeding (second face) of A3, A5, 11" × 17", 70
and 51/2" × 81/2" sizes• Duplex paper feeding (second face) of B4, A4, B5, 81/2" × 14", 70
and 11" × 81/2" sizes• Paper feeding through the bypass 0
U059 Setting fan mode MODE1
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties 12
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on —
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U064 Adjusting the CCD level 9
U065 Adjusting the scanner motor speed• Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction –6/0
* Initial setting for factory default setting
SectionItem
Maintenance item contentsInitial
No. setting*
(2) Maintenance mode item list
SectionItem
Maintenance item contentsInitial
No. setting*
2BC/D-1
1-4-10
Optical
High voltage
Developing
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on thecontact glass• Leading edge registration/Leading edge registration for rotate copying –10/0
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass• Center line/Center line for rotate copying –30/0
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification –1
U071 Adjusting the DF leading timing• DF leading edge registration 10• DF trailing edge registration –15
U072 Adjusting the DF original center line• 1 sided mode/front in 2 sided mode/rear in 2 sided mode –8/–8/–7
U073 Checking scanner motors —
U074 Executing DF automatic adjustment —
U080 Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode –6
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern —
U091 Checking shading —
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically —
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient• Text and photo/text/photo 0/0/0
U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor —
U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage• Grid control voltage 168
U101 Setting the other high voltages• Developing bias step control final voltage 207• Developing bias step control initial voltage 52• Transfer control voltage for simplex copying 210• Transfer control voltage for duplex copying 210• Separation control voltage for simplex copying 200• Separation control voltage for duplex copying 230
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger 2
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count —
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time —
U114 Selecting AC mode Inch: ONMetric: NORMAL
U126 Setting effective potential correction• Drum drive time for starting correction 17000• Correction interval for effective potential correction 1000• Effective correction target value 550
U130 Initial setting for the developer —
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage 154
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly —
U135 Checking toner motors operation —
U136 Turning the toner level detection function on/off On
U137 Checking the toner level detection sensor —
U147 Setting toner loading operation MODE1: On/MODE2: Off
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output —
U156 Changing the toner control level• Toner control level 102• Toner empty level 30• Toner control reference voltage 102
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time• Image formation motor drive time 0• Paper feed motor drive time 0
* Initial setting for factory default setting
2BC/D-1
1-4-11
SectionItem
Maintenance item contentsInitial
No. setting*U158 Checking/clearing the developing count 0
U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade —
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature• Control temperature during copying 185• Primary stabilization fixing temperature 165• Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 185• Aging time after secondary stabilization 120• Compensation value for setting card stock/postcard through the bypass 10
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly —
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data —
U194 Setting the fixing web drive —
U196 Turning the fixing heater on —
U198 Setting the fixing phase control Inch: OFFMetric: ON
U200 Turning all LEDs on —
U201 Initializing the touch panel —
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system —
U203 Operating DF separately —
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter —
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender —
U207 Checking the operation panel keys —
U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck Inch: 11" × 81/2"Metric: A4
U209 Setting date and time —
U212 Setting the deck lift operation Side feed
U235 Setting output tray initialize mode HP ON
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher —
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher —
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch —
U244 Checking the DF switches —
U245 Checking messages —
U247 Setting the paper feed device —
U248 Setting the paper eject devices —
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle 400000 (45 cpm copier)500000 (55 cpm copier)
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count —
U252 Setting the destination Inch
U253 Switching between double and single counts Double count
U254 Turning auto start function on/off On
U255 Setting auto clear time 90
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off On
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection —
U260 Changing the copy count timing After ejection
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DF Face-down ejection
U264 Setting the display order of the date InchMONTH-DAY-YEAR
MetricDAY-MONTH-YEAR
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code 0
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents 7
U275 Setting the number of sheets for duplex circulation Mode0
* Initial setting for factory default setting
Developing
Fixing andcleaning
Operationpanel andsupport
Mode setting
SectionItem
Maintenance item contentsInitial
No. setting*
2BC/D-1
1-4-12
U277 Setting auto application change time 30
U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy• Auto rotation copy/Sort copy ON/ON
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation 100
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode Face-up ejection
U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1.0
U336 Setting the HDD type 0
U339 Setting the drawer heater mode ON
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function —
U342 Setting the ejection restriction —
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode Off
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode ENERGY STAR
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication —
U347 Setting auto drawer size detection On
U350 Setting the ID-code error output Off
U355 Setting the output mode for face up output First print
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing —
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass —
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF —
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 0
U504 Initializing the scanner NIC —
U505 Setting Data Base Assistant ON
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations —
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts —
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts —
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices —
U906 Resetting partial operation control —
U907 Checking and resetting the count value on each ejection location —
U908 Changing the total counter value —
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count —
U910 Clearing the black ratio data —
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes —
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value —
U922 Checking/clearing the solenoid count value —
U923 Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning count —
U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list —
U989 HDD Scandisk —
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light —
U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count —
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count
1-4-11-1* Initial setting for factory default setting
Mode setting
Printer
Imageprocessing
Networkscanner
Others
2BC/D-1
1-4-13
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-4-12
2BC/D-1
U000 Outputting an own-status report
DescriptionOutputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
PurposeTo check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items toreenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be output. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Output list
MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modesJAM List of the paper jam occurrencesSERVICE CALL List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.When A4/11" × 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
DescriptionExits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
PurposeTo exit the maintenance mode.
MethodPress the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
DescriptionRestores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
PurposeTo reset the values such as an electronic counter. Also to move the mirror frame of the scanner to the positionfor transport (position in which the frame can be fixed).
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select a mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE1(ALL) To set the language to English and return the other settings tothe factory default settings
MODE2(SELECT) To return the settings to the factory default settings withoutchanging the language
3. Press the start key.The following count values are cleared.Developing count, service call count, each paper source count, and jam countBackup data of user simulation, etc. is reset to the default values for each destination.
CompletionTurn the main switch off.
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-13
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U003 Setting the service telephone number
DescriptionSets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
PurposeTo set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
MethodPress the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits) using the numeric keys.
• To enter symbols such as hyphens and parentheses, select as required from the symbols displayed onthe touch panel as shown below. To move the cursor, press LEFT or RIGHT in the bottom row.
∗(-
LEFT
#)
(Space)RIGHT
2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004 Setting the machine number
DescriptionDisplays and changes the machine number.
PurposeTo check or set the machine number.
MethodPress the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting1. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric key.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.2. Press the start key. The machine number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-14
U005 Copying without paper
DescriptionSimulates the copy operation without paper feed.
PurposeTo check the overall operation of the machine.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Operation
PPC Only the copier operates.PPC + DF Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be
made.• Paper feed locations• Magnifications• Simplex or duplex copy mode• Number of copies: in simplex copy mode, continuous copying is performed when set to 999; in duplex
copy mode, continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting.• Copy density• Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paperpresent, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, thescreen for selecting an item is displayed.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U018 Displaying the ROM checksum
DescriptionDisplays the checksum of ROM.
PurposeTo check the checksum.
Method1. Press the start key. Program names for the copier and an optional finisher (when installed) are displayed.2. Press the start key. The ROM checksum is displayed.
Display Description
MAIN Main PCB ROM checksumMMI 1 Operation PCB ROM checksumMMI 2 Operation PCB ROM checksumLANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM checksumLANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM checksumFINISHER Finisher main PCB ROM checksum
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-15
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U019 Displaying the ROM version
DescriptionDisplays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.
PurposeTo check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number.
MethodPress the start key. The last six digits of the part number indicating the ROM version are displayed.
Display Description
MAIN Main ROM ICMMI 1 Operation ROM ICMMI 2 Operation ROM ICLANGUAGE(Stand.) Standard language ROM ICLANGUAGE(Option) Optional language ROM ICMAIN BOOT Boot of main ROM ICMMI BOOT Boot of operation ROM ICNETWORK SCANNER Optional network scanner ROM ICFINISHER Optional finisher ROM ICFINISHER BOOT Boot of optional finisher ROM ICPRINTER Optional printer ROM IC
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U020 Initializing all data
DescriptionInitializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
PurposeUsed when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for inch specifications
are set.When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the mainswitch is turned on and the display language to the initial setting of English.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
U021 Initializing all memory
DescriptionInitializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM accordingto the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
PurposeUsed to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-16
U022 Initializing backup memory
DescriptionInitializes only the data set for the optical section.
PurposeTo be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press SCANNER on the touch panel.3. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.4. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 067, U080 to 099, U403, U990 and U991) is
initialized.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
U024 HDD formatting
DescriptionFormats the HDD backup data areas for the network scanner and department administration.
PurposeTo initialize the HDD when installing or replacing the HDD after shipping.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.
The EXECUTE display flashes during initializing.Initialization results will be displayed when initializing is completed.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
U030 Checking motor operation
DescriptionDrives each motor.
PurposeTo check the operation of each motor.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motor
MAIN Image formation motor (IFM)CONV Paper conveying motor (PCM)FEED Paper feed motor (PFM)DECK Deck drive motor (DDM)
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-17
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
DescriptionDisplays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
PurposeTo check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
FEED B SW Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2)FEED C SW Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3)FEED D SW Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4)FEED E SW Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5)FEED F SW Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6)FEED DK 2SW Deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)FEED DK 1SW Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1)FEED A SW Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1)RESIST SW Registration switch (RSW)EJECT SW Eject switch (ESW)BRA SW Feed shift switch (FSSW)REV SW Face down eject switch (FDESW)DUP BRA SW Duplex feed shift switch (DUPFSSW)DUP J SW Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW)DUP1 SW Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1)DUP2 SW Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)DUP3 SW Duplex eject switch (DUPESW)
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-18
U032 Checking clutch operation
DescriptionTurns each clutch on.
PurposeTo check the operation of each clutch.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the clutch to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display Clutches
SB FEED Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)PF A Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1)PF B Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2)PF C Paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3)PF D Paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4)FEED B L Feed low clutch 2 (FCL2-L)FEED B H Feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H)FEED C Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)FEED D Feed clutch 4 (FCL4)FEED E Feed clutch 5 (FCL5)FEED DK Deck feed clutch (DFCL)FEED A L Feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L)FEED A H Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H)RESIST Registration clutch (RCL)DUP FWD Duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL)DUP REV Duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U033 Checking solenoid operation
DescriptionTurns each solenoid on.
PurposeTo check the operation of each solenoid.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the solenoid to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the solenoid turns on for
1 s.
Display Solenoids
BRANCH Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL)DUP FS Duplex eject switching solenoid (DUPESSOL)DUP PR Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL)SB SOL Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL)FIX WEB SOL Fixing WEB solenoid (FWEBSOL)MSW OFF Main switch turns on
Select MAIN SW SOL to check the operation of the main switch in auto shut off.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U034 Setting paper timing
AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-15 and 17.
2BC/D
1-4-19
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U035 Setting folio size
DescriptionChanges the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
PurposeTo prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting theactual size of the folio paper used.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Setting Setting range Initial setting
LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U037 Checking fan motor operation
DescriptionApplies power to each fan motor to turn on.
PurposeTo check the operation of each fan motor.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the desired fan motor to operate. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Switches
CONV FAN Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM)DEV FAN Image formation fan motor (IFFM)
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U050 Setting the switchback drive
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-66.
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-19.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-20
U053 Adjusting motor speed standard
DescriptionPerforms fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
PurposeUsed to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
MAIN MOTOR Image formation motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 6CONV MOTOR Paper conveying motor speed adjustment 0 to +14 3POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor speed adjustment -20 to +20 0
MAIN MOTOR /CONV MOTORIncreasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makesthe image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.POLYGON MOTORIncreasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliaryscanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction andlonger in the auxiliary scanning direction.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.Correct values for an A3/11" × 17" output are:A = 300 ± 1.5 mmB = 270 ± 1.0 mm
Figure 1-4-1
Adjustment1. Output an A3/11" × 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:A: Image formation motor speed adjustmentB: Polygon motor speed adjustment
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-21
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U054 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-20.
U059 Setting fan mode
DescriptionSets the rotation time of conveying fan motor after stop of drive.
PurposeFor prevention of faulty image caused by increase of ozone inside the machine, the rotation time of conveyingfan motor after stop of drive is set to 30 seconds (MODE1) as the default setting. If the user requests reductionof noise, change the setting to 10 seconds (MODE2).
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE1 ON for 30 seconds after stop of driveMODE2 ON for 10 seconds after stop of drive
Initial setting: MODE13. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
DescriptionAdjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
PurposeUsed when the entire image appears too dark or light.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Image scanning density 1 to +23 12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.2. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
CautionThe following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:• Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)• Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
DescriptionTurns the exposure lamp on.
PurposeTo check the exposure lamp.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-22
U063 Adjusting the shading position
DescriptionChanges the shading position.
PurposeUsed when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This isdue to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changedso that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Shading position –8 to +2 0 0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves theposition toward the machine left.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U064 Adjusting the CCD level
DescriptionAdjusts the CCD level.
PurposeTo adjust when density difference due to CCD is generated between both sides of the center of the copy image.
Setting1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
CCD level 0 to +15 9
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U065 Adjusting the scanner motor speed
AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-34 and 35.
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-36.
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-37.
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification
AdjustmentSee pages 1-6-68.
U071 Adjusting the DF leading timing
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-70.
U072 Adjusting the DF original center line
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-69.
2BC/D-1
1-4-23
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U073 Checking scanner motors
DescriptionSimulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
PurposeTo check scanner operation.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be changed. The selected item is displayed in reverse.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400%SIZE Original size See below.LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Original sizes for each setting in SIZE
Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
8 A4 42 A5R9 B5 47 Folio24 11" × 81/2" 52 11" × 17"36 A3 53 11" × 15"39 B4 55 81/2" × 14"40 A4R 56 81/2" × 11"41 B5R 58 51/2" × 81/2"
4. Press the start key. The setting is set. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.5. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-24
U074 Executing DF automatic adjustment
DescriptionUses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the DF scanning section.• Adjusting the DF magnification (U070)• Adjusting the DF scanning timing (U071)• Adjusting the DF center line (U072)• Adjusting the margins for scanning an original from the DF (U404)When you run this maintenance mode, the preset values of U70, U071, U072, and U404 will also be updated.
PurposeTo perform automatic adjustment of various items in the DF scanning section.
Method1. Set a specified original (part number: 2AC68241) in the DF.2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
CONVEY SPEED DF auxiliary scanning directionLEAD EDGE ADJ DF leading edge registrationTRAIL EDGE ADJ DF trailing edge registrationDF CENTER DF center lineDF A MARGIN DF scanning left marginDF B MARGIN DF scanning leading edge marginDF C MARGIN DF scanning right marginDF D MARGIN DF scanning trailing edge margin
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed andoperation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedurefrom the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenanceitems.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item isdisplayed.If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
U080 Adjusting exposure in toner economy mode
DescriptionAdjusts the image density in the eco-print mode.
PurposeTo increase or decrease the image density in the eco-print mode.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Exposure is toner economy mode –12 to 0 –6
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.2. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D
1-4-25
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
DescriptionSelects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the copier.
PurposeWhen performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that ofthe scanner with a non-scanned output MIP-PG pattern.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output.
Display
GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit engine output characteristics.
MONO-LEVEL To check the drum quality.
256-LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing.
1 DOT-LINE To check fine line reproducibility.To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit (lateral squareness)
PG pattern to be output Purpose
3. To change the output conditions of MONO-LEVEL and 1dot-LINE, use the cursor up/down keys to changethe preset values and press the Start key to register the setting.
Display Setting range Initial setting
Output density of MONO-LEVEL 0 or 70 01dot-LINE 0 to 21 0
4. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.5. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-26
U091 Checking shading
DescriptionPerforms scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the originalscanning values at nine points of the contact glass.
PurposeTo check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decidethe causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shadingor CCD) or other problems.Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SHD BEFORE Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.SHD AFTER Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightlydifferent from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there shouldbe no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rearindicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) iscaused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).If a black line appears, the cause may assumed to be based on the results of the scanning operation beforeshading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation aftershading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possibleto use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning atthe limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.
20 mm from the machine left
200 mm from the machine left
400 mm from the machine left
Machine center100 mm from the machine center toward machine front
100 mm from the machine center toward machine rear
Figure 1-4-2
4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for entering a maintenance item isdisplayed.
2BC/D
1-4-27
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
DescriptionMakes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.• Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the main direction(U065)• Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)• Adjusting the scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)• Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass (U403)When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
PurposeUsed to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2A068020) on the contact glass.2. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
Display Description
SCAN CENTER Scanner center lineSCAN TIMING Scanner leading edge registrationSUB SCAN Scanner auxiliary scanning directionMAIN SCAN Scanner main scanning directionDF A MARGIN Scanner scanning left marginDF B MARGIN Scanner scanning leading edge marginDF C MARGIN Scanner scanning right marginDF D MARGIN Scanner scanning trailing edge margin
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed andoperation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedurefrom the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenanceitems.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-28
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
DescriptionChanges the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,text and photo, photo).
PurposeTo set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used tomake copy image darker or lighter.
Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the image mode to be adjusted and press the start key. The screen for the selected item is
displayed.
Display Description
MIXED Density in text and photo modeTEXT Density in text modePHOTO Density in photo mode
Setting1. Select the item to be adjusted. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Adjust the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density
Density adjustment
Dark
Light
Light Center Dark
Setting: 0Setting: 3
Set to DARKER
Set to LIGHTER
Figure 1-4-3 Exposure density gradient
3. Press the start key. The value is set.4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D
1-4-29
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U099 Checking and setting the original size detection sensor
DescriptionChecks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.
PurposeTo adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensormalfunctions frequently due to incident light or the like.
Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select an item and press the start key. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission dataB/W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value
Setting original size judgment time
Method to display the data for the sensor1. Press the start key. The detection sensor transmission data is displayed.
: 123 123 123
: 123 123 123
: 255 255 255
Rear of machine
Center of machine
Front of machine
Figure 1-4-4
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting1. Select an item to be set.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
LEVEL Detection sensor threshold value 0 to 255 170WAIT TIME Original size judgment time* 0 to 100 50ORIG. AREA Original size detection position display (mm) – –SIZE Detected original size display – –
Time from activation of the original detection switch (ODSW) to original size judgment
Method to set the detection threshold value1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.
A larger value increases the sensor sensitivity, and a smaller value decreases it.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Method to set the original size judgment time1. Adjust the preset value using the cursor up/down keys.
A larger value increases the original size judgment time, and a smaller value decreases it.2. Press the start key. The value is set.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-30
U100 Checking the operation of main high voltage
DescriptionChanges the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.
PurposeTo set the surface potential or check main charging.
StartPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
DSP DATA Changing the grid control voltageMC ON Turning the main charger onMC ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and offLASER ON/OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
Method for main chager output1. Select the main charger output on the screen for selecting an item: select one from MC ON, MC ON/OFF
or LASER ON/OFF on the touch panel. The selected operation starts.2. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the grid control voltage1. Press the DSP DATA on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Change the setting using the ∗ or # keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Grid control voltage 77 to 230 168
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-31
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U101 Setting the other high voltages
DescriptionSets the developing bias control voltage, the transfer control voltage, and the separation control voltage orchecks the output of these voltages.
PurposeTo check or change the developing bias, the transfer voltage, and the separation voltage.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
DEV BIAS SET Setting of developing bias control voltageTC SET Setting and output check of transfer control voltageAC SET Setting of separation control voltage
Setting: developing bias control voltage1. Press the DEV BIAS SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Select an item to be set.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
DB DATA Developing bias step control final voltage 0 to 255 207DB DATA2 Developing bias step control initial voltage 0 to 255 52
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: transfer bias control voltage1. Press the TC SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Select an item to be set.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
TC DATA Transfer control voltage for simplex copying 0 to 255 210TC DATA (DUP) Transfer control voltage for duplex copying 0 to 255 210TC ON Transfer voltage output ON – –
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.Increasing the setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.Press the TC ON on the touch panel. The currently set transfer voltage is output. To stop the transfervoltage output, press the stop/clear key.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting: separation bias control voltage1. Press the AC SET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Select an item to be set.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
AC DATA separation control voltage for simplex copying 0 to 255 200AC DATA (DUP) separation control voltage for duplex copying 0 to 255 230
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.Increasing the setting makes the separation voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-32
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger
DescriptionExecutes a cleaning operation for the main charger and changes the intervals at which the main charger iscleaned.
PurposeTo check the cleaning operation for the main charger. Also to change the intervals for the operation. Making theintervals longer decreases the stand-by time when starting copying.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
MC ADJUST DATA Main charger cleaning operation intervalsMC TEST RUN Main charger cleaning operation ON
Setting1. Change the setting using the ∗ or # keys.
Setting range: 1 to 2 (unit: 1,000 sheets)Initial setting: 2If you select MC TEST RUN, the main charger cleaning operation will be performed once.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count
DescriptionDisplays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the main charger potential output.
PurposeTo check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.
MethodPress the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the CLEAR on the touch panel.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-33
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time
DescriptionDisplays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the high voltage based on time.
PurposeTo check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
MethodPress the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting1. Enter a five-digit drive time using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The drive time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit the maintenance mode without changing the drive time, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U114 Selecting AC mode
DescriptionSets separation control for A3, B4, A4R, 11" × 17", 11" × 15", and 81/2" × 14" sizes.
PurposeTo change the setting to solve the problem of faulty image.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
NORMAL Separation voltage ON only for the leading edgeON Separation voltage ON for overall area
Initial setting: ON (for the inch specifications)NORMAL (for the metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
SupplementNote that if the setting is changed from ON to NORMAL, faulty transfer of gray image may occur and that if thesetting is changed from NORMAL to ON, horizontal black stripes may occur.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-34
U126 Setting effective potential correction
DescriptionSets the correction interval and the correction target value for effective potential correction.
PurposeTo run when replacing the drum or when a density failure which may be caused mainly by the drum occurs.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to change the setting.2. Use the numeric keys to change the setting value.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
START (M) Drum drive time for starting correction 0 to 600000 17000INTERVAL (M) Correction interval for effective 0 to 600000 1000
potential correctionTARGET Effective correction target value 0 to 999 550RUN To run the test operation – –
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Test operation1. Select RUN and start test operation.* After correction is complete, each data will be displayed.
Display Description
VO A Dark potential measurement A acquired dataVR A Light potential measurement A acquired dataVO B Dark potential measurement B acquired dataVR B Light potential measurement B acquired dataVO TARGET Target dark potential calculation resultDB CAL Developing bias calculation result
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-33-1
1-4-35
2BC/D-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-34
U130 Initial setting for the developer
DescriptionAutomatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.
PurposeTo set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output valueCONTROL Toner sensor control voltageFIRST TARGET Toner feed start levelHUMID Absolute humidity
SupplementThe following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:• Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)• Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)• Clearing the developing drive time (U157)• Clearing the developing count (U158)• Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
CompletionPress the stop/clear key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
DescriptionDisplays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.
PurposeTo check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is toodark or light.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Adjust the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Toner sensor control voltage 0 to 255 154
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-35
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
DescriptionReplenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
PurposeUsed when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output value after start key is pressedCONTROL Current toner feed start levelTARGET Current toner sensor control voltageHUMID Absolute humidity
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when toner replenishment stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U135 Checking toner motors operation
DescriptionDrives the toner motor.
PurposeTo check the operation of the toner motor.
CautionNote that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure todrive the motor for only a few seconds.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse. The toner motor turns on.
Display Motor
MOTOR1 Toner feed motor (TFM)MOTOR2 Toner agitation motor (TAM)
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U136 Turning the toner level detection function on/off
DescriptionTurning the control based on the toner level sensor output on/off.
PurposeTo enable copying using the toner in the developing section after the toner level in the toner hopper decreases,by turning the control function off.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Controls based on the detection by the toner sensor detection sensorOFF Ignores the detection by the toner level detection sensor
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-36
U137 Checking the toner level detection sensor
DescriptionDisplays the detection status of the toner level detection sensor and toner hopper lockup detection sensor.
PurposeTo check the toner level in the toner hopper.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display Description
TE SW Toner level detection sensor (toner level in the toner hopper)
When there is toner or if the sensor connector is disconnected, on is detected , and the correspondingdisplay is displayed in reverse.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U147 Setting toner loading operation
DescriptionSets toner loading operation after completion of copying.
PurposeTo set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is necessaryfrom the initial setting.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.2. Select ON or OFF for MODE1 or MODE2. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
MODE1 Toner loading at the rate of one time every 30 sheetsON Toner loading performed in MODE1OFF Toner loading not performed in MODE1MODE2 Toner loading at the rate of one time per sheet (between two
sheets of paper)ON Toner loading performed in MODE2OFF Toner loading not performed in MODE2
Initial setting: MODE1: ON MODE2: OFF3. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
DescriptionDisplays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
PurposeTo check the toner sensor output value.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The current data is displayed.
Display Description
INPUT Toner sensor output value after start key is pressedTARGET Current toner feed level
(value corrected based on humidity and drive time)CONTROL Current toner sensor control voltageHUMID Absolute humidityOUT TEMP External temperature
3. Press the stop/clear key. The sampling operation stops.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-37
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U156 Changing the toner control level
DescriptionChanges the toner control reference voltage set in maintenance item U130 or the toner control level or thetoner empty level to be determined by the difference from the toner control level. The setting for thismaintenance item does not need to be changed.
PurposeTo check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
TARGET Toner control levelEMPTY Difference between the toner control level and toner empty levelFIRST TARGET Toner control reference voltage for initial developer setting
Setting for the toner control level1. Press the TARGET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Toner control level 0 to 255 102
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.3. Press the start key. The time is set.
Setting for the toner empty level1. Press the EMPTY on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Difference between the toner control level 0 to 255 30and the toner empty level
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner emptyis detected.
3. Press the start key. The time is set.
Setting for the toner control reference voltage1. Press the FIRST TARGET on the touch panel of the screen for selecting an item.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Toner control reference voltage 0 to 255 102
3. Press the start key. The time is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-38
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
DescriptionDisplays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a referencewhen correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
PurposeTo check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
MAG TIME(M) Image formation motor drive timeAGT TIME(M) Paper feed motor drive time
Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The drive time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be changed.2. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.3. Press the start key. The drive time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the drive time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158 Checking/clearing the developing count
DescriptionDisplays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference whencorrecting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
PurposeTo check the developing count after replacing the developing unit.
MethodPress the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade
DescriptionApplies toner to the cleaning blade.
PurposeTo apply toner to the drum to coat the cleaning blade. To be executed when replacing or cleaning the cleaningblade or the drum.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. Operation starts.
When the operation is complete, the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed after openand close the front cover.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without performing operation, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-39
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
DescriptionChanges the fixing control temperature.
PurposeNormally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve afixing problem on thick paper.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
CONT TEMP Control temperature during copying 170 to 200 (°C) 1851ST TEMP Primary stabilization fixing temperature 140 to 200 (°C) 1652ND TEMP Secondary stabilization fixing temperature 170 to 200 (°C) 185TIME Aging time after secondary stabilization 0 to 180 (s) 120THICK ADJ Compensation value for setting card 0 to 15 (°C) 10
stock/postcard through the bypass
Setting1. Select the item to be set. The selecting item is displayed in reverse.2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
The respective temperatures are to be set such that 2ND TEMP >= 1ST TEMP.3. Press the start key. The value is set.
Interrupt copy modeWhile this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly
DescriptionStops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
PurposeTo forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key. The screenfor selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data
DescriptionResets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
PurposeTo prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-40
U194 Setting the fixing web drive
DescriptionSets the interval (number of copies) for turning on the fixing web solenoid.
PurposeTo be executed when the fixing web roller becomes extremely soiled.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Interval for turning on the fixing web solenoid 1 to 40 30
2. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
DescriptionTurns the fixing heater M or S on.
PurposeTo check fixing heaters turning on.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the heater to be turned on. The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off.
Display Description
MAIN Fixing heater M (FH-M)SUB Fixing heater S (FH-S)
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when fixing motors M and S are off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No.is displayed.
U198 Setting the fixing phase control
DescriptionSets the use of fixing phase control to reduce electrical noise generated by the copier.
PurposeNormally no change is necessary. If electrical noise generated by the copier causes flickering of the lightsaround the copier, select fixing phase control to reduces the noise.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Fixing phase control presentOFF Fixing phase control absent
Initial setting: ON (220-240 V specifications) / OFF (120 V specifications)2. If you select ON, use the ∗ or # key to set 0 (100 V system fixing heater phase control) or 1 (200 V system
fixing heater phase control).3. Press the start key. The value is set.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current value, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-41
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U200 Turning all LEDs on
DescriptionTurns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
PurposeTo check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
MethodPress the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance itemNo. is displayed.
U201 Initializing the touch panel
DescriptionAutomatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.
PurposeTo automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed, and the + key displayed at the upper left of the
touch panel flashes.2. Press on the center of the + key. The + key on lower right flashes.3. Press the center of the flashing +. Initialization of the touch panel is complete, and the screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without initializing, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance mode No. is displayed.
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
DescriptionInitializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no settingis necessary.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-42
U203 Operating DF separately
DescriptionSimulates the original conveying operation separately in the DF.
PurposeTo check the DF.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.3. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Operation
ADF With paper, single-sided originalRADF With paper, double-sided originalADF (NON-P) Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)RADF (NON-P) Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)
4. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
DescriptionSets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
PurposeTo run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed
Setting1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected counter is
displayed in reverse.
Display Description
KEY-CARD The key card is installedKEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-43
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender
DescriptionSets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, suchas mode and unit price.This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no settingis necessary.
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
DescriptionChecks operation of the operation panel keys.
PurposeTo check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. "COUNT1" is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom,the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are pressedand if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top LED in thatline will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U208 Setting the paper size for the large paper deck
DescriptionSets the sizes of paper placed in drawer 3, drawer 4 and optional side deck (55 cpm copier only) respectively.
PurposeTo set the size when the size of paper placed in drawer 3, drawer 4 or optional side deck is changed.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the paper size (A4/11" × 81/2" or B5). The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Initial setting: A4/11" × 81/2"2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-44
U209 Setting date and time
DescriptionSets the real time clock.
PurposeTo set the date and time after initializing data.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed. The current setting for the year is displayed.2. Set the year (last two digits of the year) using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. For
years 2000 to 2009, enter only the last digit. The current setting for the month is displayed.3. Set the month using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current setting for the date
is displayed.4. Set the date using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current time setting for hours
is displayed.5. Set the hours using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. The current time setting for
minutes is displayed.6. Set the minutes using the numeric or Up/Down keys and press the start key. Setting is complete, and the
screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
SupplementTo return to the last screen, press the stop/clear key while setting.
CompletionTo stop this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key at the screen forthe year setting. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U212 Setting the deck lift operation
DescriptionSets the operation of the side deck (55 cpm copier only) lift motor for when paper in the optional side deck isexhausted.
PurposeTo be set according to the paper loading method.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the method to load paper.
Display Description
SIDE FEED Load paper through the right coverUPPER FEED Load paper through the upper cover
Initial setting: SIDE FEED2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U235 Setting output tray initialize mode
DescriptionSets whether or not initialization (shift of eject position to main tray) is performed when auto clear is triggered ifa multi-job tray is installed to an optional finisher.
PurposeTo be set as required according to the user.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be set. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
HP ON Job tray initialization is performed.HP OFF Job tray initialization is not performed.
Initial setting: HP ON
2BC/D-1
1-4-45
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
DescriptionTurns each motor, clutch and solenoid of the optional document finisher ON.
PurposeUsed to check the operation of each motor, clutch and solenoid of the optional document finisher.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item will be displayed.2. Select the motor, clutch or solenoid that you want to check the operation for. The selected item is displayed
in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motors, clutches and solenoids
CONV MOTOR Paper conveying motor (PCM)PUNCH MOTOR Punch motor (PUNM)WID T MOTOR Front/rear upper side-registration guide motor (SRGM-FU/SRGM-RU)WID U MOTOR Lower side-registration guide motor (SRGM-L)MTRAY MOTOR Main tray elevation motor (MTEM)JTRAY MOTOR Multi job tray elevation motor (MJTEM)BRA A SOL Feedshift solenoid A (FSSOLA)BRA B SOL Feedshift solenoid B (FSSOLB)BRA C SOL Feedshift solenoid C (FSSOLC)PUNCH P SOL Punch solenoid (PUNSOL)MTRAY SOL Paper holder solenoid (PHSOL)EJEC SOL Eject guide solenoid (EGSOL)PUNCH I SOL Paper entry guide solenoid (PEGSOL)MIDDLE SOL Movable guide solenoid (MGSOL)DRAM CL Siding drum clutch (SDCL)FEED IN CL Paper conveying clutch (PCCL)PUNCH CL Punch clutch (PUNCL)SADDLE ROL1 Main motor (MM)SADDLE ROL2 Main motor (MM)SADDLE BLD Centerfold blade motor (SBLM)SADDLE INI1 Centering plate motor (CPM)SADDLE INI2 Side-registration guide motor (SRGM)SADDLE SOL Pressure release solenoid (PRSOL)
3. To turn ON a clutch or solenoid with the motor driving, press the interrupt key before selecting the clutch orsolenoid.* The driving motor will start operation, and the selected clutch or the solenoid will remain ON until the
interrupt key is pressed again.4. To stop motor driving, press the interrupt key again.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key with the motor stopped.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U235
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-46
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
DescriptionDisplays the status of each switch of the optional document finisher.
PurposeUsed to check the operation of each switch of the optional document finisher.
Method1. Press the start key to run the maintenance item.2. Turn each switch ON manually.
* When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted.
Display Switches
CONV Paper entry sensor (PES)EJECT SUB Paper ejection sensor (PEJS)CONV TRAY Intermediate tray paper conveying sensor (ITPCS)EJECT MAIN Sub tray paper ejection sensor (STPES)TRAY U PAP Upper paper sensor (PS-U)TRAY L PAP Lower paper sensor (PS-L)MTRAY U LMT Main tray upper limit detection sensor (MTULDS)MTRAY L LMT Main tray lower limit detection sensor (MTLLDS)MTRAY POS Main tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercepting sensor
(MTPUSDLES/MTPUSDLIS)MTRAY PUSH Paper holder detection sensor (PHDS)MTRAY OVER1 Main tray load 1000 detection sensor (MTLDS-10)MTRAY OVER2 Main tray load 1500 detection sensor (MTLDS-15)MTRAY OVER3 Main tray load 3000/2000 detection sensor (MTLDS-30/MTLDS-20)JOB U LMT Multi job tray upper limit detection sensor (MJTULDS)JOB L LMT Multi job tray lower limit detection sensor (MJTLLDS)JOB SAFETY Multi job tray front/rear switch (MJTSW-F/MJTSW-R)JOB POS Multi job tray position sensor (MJPS)JOB OVER Multi job tray paper upper surface detection light emitting/intercepting sensor
(MJTPUSDLES/MJTPUSDLIS)JOB PAP1 Paper detection switch 1 (PDSW1)JOB PAP2 Paper detection switch 2 (PDSW2)JOB PAP3 Paper detection switch 3 (PDSW3)JOB PAP4 Paper detection switch 4 (PDSW4)JOB PAP5 Paper detection switch 5 (PDSW5)SDL CONV Centerfold unit paper entry sensor (CUPES)SDL EJECT Eject switch (ESW)SDL PAP Eject tray paper detection switch (ETPDSW)SDL BIN PAP Inside tray detection sensor (ITDS)
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-47
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch
DescriptionTurns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the DF on.
PurposeTo check the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch .
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motors, solenoids and clutch Operation In operation
F MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operationC MOT Original paper conveying motor (OCM) On for 0.5 sFD CL Original feed clutch (OFCL) On for 0.5 sEJ SL Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) On for 0.5 sRJ SL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 sFD SL Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) On and offRP SL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On and off
3. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244 Checking the DF switches
DescriptionDisplays the status of the respective switches in the DF.
PurposeTo check if respective switches in the DF operate correctly.
Start1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Type of switches
SW On/off switchesVR Volume switch
Method for the on/off switches (SW)1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches
SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)FEED SW Original feed switch (OFSW)REV SW Original switchback switch (OSBSW)TMG SW DF timing switch (DFTSW)SZ A SW Original size length switch (OSLSW)
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-48
U244 Method for the volume switch (VR)1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.
Numerical value
A5R
B5R
Folio/A4R
B4/B5
CF (11" × 15")
A3/A4
Original width to be detected
51/2" × 81/2"
81/2" × 14"/81/2" × 11"
11" × 17"/11" × 15"/11" × 81/2"
000
49.664
50.176
61.440
61.952
103.936
104.448
139.264
139.776
146.432
146.994
197.120
197.632
197.720
223.232
256
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
····
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are adjustedfor A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D
1-4-49
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U245 Checking messages
DescriptionDisplays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
PurposeTo check the messages to be displayed.
Method1. Press the start key.2. Select the item to be displayed.3. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys to display each message one at a time.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the messagecorresponding the specified number is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U247 Setting the paper feed device
DescrioptionDrives each motor of the optional side deck.
PurposeTo check the operation of the optional side deck.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the motor to be operated. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display Motor
SDECK MOT Side deck drive motor (SDDM)SDECK FAN Suction fan motor (IFM)SDECK LIFT Side deck lift motor (SDLM)SDECK CVCL Side deck paper conveying clutch (SDCCL)SDECK FDCL Side deck paper feed clutch (SDPFCL)
3. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-50
U248 Setting the paper eject devices
DescrioptionAdjusts the amount of slack in the paper for finisher punch mode, the booklet stapling position, and the centerfolding position for the copier with an optional finisher installed. Also, displays and clears the punch-hole scrapcount.
Purpose• Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch mode
Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper while in the punch section if, in punch mode, paper jams or is Z-folded frequently due to too much slack in the paper, or, the position of punch holes varies due to too littleslack in the paper.
• Punch-hole scrap count display (clearing)Used to manually clear the punch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch-hole scrap isshown on the touch panel after collection.
• Adjustment of booklet stapling positionAdjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
• Adjustment of center folding positionAdjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
StartPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Operation
PUNCH TIMING Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper in punch modePUNCH TIMING(TURN) Adjustment of the amount of slack in the paper at reversed
paper ejection in punch modePUNCH COUNT Punch-hole scrap count displaySADDLE STAPLE ADJUST Booklet stapling position adjustmentSADDLE ADJUST Adjustment of center folding positionSADDLE ADJUST 2 Adjustment of center folding position (correction of number of
sheets of a batch)
Setting the amount of slack in the paper1. Select PUNCH TIMING on the screen for selecting an item.2. Select the paper size to be set.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
B5 Amount of slack in the paper of B5 size -15 to +15 0A4/11 × 8.5 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A4/11" × 81/2" sizeB5R Amount of slack in the paper of B5R size -15 to +15 0A4R/8.5 × 11 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A4R/81/2" × 11" sizeB4/8.5 × 14 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
B4/81/2" × 14" sizeA3/11 × 17 Amount of slack in the paper of -15 to +15 0
A3/11" × 17" size
If the position of punch holes varies, increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger.If paper jams or is Z-folded frequently, decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller.Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
2BC/D-1
1-4-51
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U248 Setting the amount of slack in the paper at reversed paper ejection1. Select PUNCH TIMING(TURN) on the screen for selecting an item.2. Select the paper size to be set.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
B5 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of B5 size
A4/11 × 8.5 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of A4/11" × 81/2" size
B5R Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of B5R size
A4R/8.5 × 11 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of A4R/81/2" × 11" size
B4/8.5 × 14 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of B4/81/2" × 14" size
A3/11 × 17 Amount of slack in the paper at -15 to +15 0reversed paper ejection of A3/11" × 17" size
If the position of punch holes varies, increase the setting to make the amount of slack larger.If paper jams or is Z-folded frequently, decrease the setting to make the amount of slack smaller.Changing the value by 1 changes the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Displaying the punch-hole scrap count1. Select PUNCH COUNT on the screen for selecting an item. The punch-hole scrap count is displayed.2. Press the reset key.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Punch-hole scrap count 0 to 999999 -(current number of punching times)
3. Press the start key to clear the count.4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the booklet stapling position1. Select SADDLE STAPLE ADJUST on the screen for selecting an item.2. Select the size to be set.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description
A4R/LTR Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4R/LETTER sizeB4R Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4R sizeA3R/LDR Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3R/LEDGER size
Setting range: –10 to +10Initial setting: 0Change in value per step: 0.6 mm
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-52
Left stapling Right stapling Adjustment method
Proper
Decrease the preset value.
Increase the preset value.
Upper side is longer. Lower side is longer.
Lower side is longer. Upper side is longer.
U248
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the center folding position1. Select SADDLE ADJUST on the screen for selecting an item.2. Select the size to be set.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description
A4R/LTR Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER sizeB4R Adjustment of center folding position for B4R sizeA3R/LDR Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size
Setting range: –10 to +10Initial setting: 0Change in value per step: 0.55 mm
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Setting the center folding position (correction of number of sheets of a batch)1. Select SADDLE ADJUST 2 on the screen for selecting an item.2. Select the item to be set.3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description
A4R/LTR(2) Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER size(Number of sheets of a batch: 6 - 10 sheets)
B4R(2) Adjustment of center folding position for B4R size(Number of sheets of a batch: 6 - 10 sheets)
A3R/LDR(2) Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size(Number of sheets of a batch: 6 - 10 sheets)
A4R/LTR(3) Adjustment of center folding position for A4R/LETTER size(Number of sheets of a batch: 11 - 16 sheets)
B4R(3) Adjustment of center folding position for B4R size(Number of sheets of a batch: 11 - 16 sheets)
A3R/LDR(3) Adjustment of center folding position for A3R/LEDGER size(Number of sheets of a batch: 11 - 16 sheets)
Setting range: -10 to +10Initial setting: 0Change in value per step: 0.55 mm
4. Press the start key. The value is set.5. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
1-4-51-1
2BC/D-1
1-4-53
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U248 SupplementIf the items of SADDLE ADJUST are changed, those of SADDLE ADJUST 2 will also be changed. SADDLEADJUST 2, therefore, need not be changed in principle. Only if any problem occurs at the center foldingposition depending on the number of sheets of a batch, adjust SADDLE ADJUST 2.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-51-2
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-52
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
DescriptionDisplays and changes the maintenance cycle.
PurposeTo check and change the maintenance cycle.
MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Maintenance cycle 0 to 600000 400000 (45 cpm copier)/500000 (55 cpm copier)
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
DescriptionDisplays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
PurposeTo check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
MethodPress the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-53
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U252 Setting the destination
DescriptionSwitches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
PurposeTo be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by runningmaintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the destination. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specificationsINCH Inch (North America) specificationsEUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specificationsASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as whenthe power is turned on.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
SupplementThe specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. Tochange the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.• Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric,item No. Asia Pacific
253 Switching between double and single counts Single Double Double255 Setting auto clear time 120 s 90 s 90 s
U253 Switching between double and single counts
DescriptionSwitches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
PurposeAccording to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/LEDGER or B4/LEGEL paper is to be counted asone sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select double or single count. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paperDOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) Double count for A3/LEDGER paper onlyDOUBLE COUNT(B4/LEGEL) Double count for B4/LEGEL size or larger
Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER)2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-54
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
DescriptionSelects if the auto start function is turned on.
PurposeNormally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve theproblem.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select either ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Auto start function onOFF Auto start function off
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U255 Setting auto clear time
DescriptionSets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
PurposeTo be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the samesettings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.
MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Auto clear time 0 to 270 (s) 90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-55
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
DescriptionSelects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.
PurposeAccording to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without therecovery time from preheat mode.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Auto preheat/energy saver function onOFF Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
When the setting is changed from OFF to ON, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15minutes.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-56
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
DescriptionSelects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that canbe made after the detection.
PurposeTo change the copying operation after detection of toner empty status.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
EMPTY COUNT Number of copies to be made after turning off of the tonerlevel sensor before indicating toner empty
EMPTY MODE Operation of copies after toner empty detection
Setting the number of copies after turning off of the toner level sensor before indicating toner empty1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Number of copies to be made after turning off of 100 to 300 (copies) 200the toner level sensor before indicating toner empty
The setting can be changed by 100 per step.2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting the copy operation after toner empty detection1. Select single or continuous copying. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
SINGLE Enables only single copying.CONTINUE Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: SINGLE2. Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Number of copies after toner empty detection 0 to 200 (copies) 5
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-57
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U260 Changing the copy count timing
DescriptionChanges the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
PurposeTo be set according to user (copy service provider) request.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paperejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is countedbefore the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, thecopy timing should be made later.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the copy count timing . The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FEED When secondary paper feed startsEJECT When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U263 Setting the paper ejection when copying from the DF
DescriptionSets whether the copies will be ejected in the same or opposite order as the originals when copying from theDF.
PurposeSet according to the preference of the user.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the ejection order.
Display Setting
FACE-DOWN (NOMAL) Face down ejectionFACE-UP (SPEED) Face up ejection with bitmap copyFACE-UP (MEMORY) Face up ejection with memory copy
Initial setting: FACE-DOWN2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-58
U264 Setting the display order of the date
DescriptionSelects year, month and day as the order of that appears on lists, etc.
PurposeSet according to the user preference.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the desired order.
Display Setting
YEAR-MONTH-DATE Year/Month/DayMONTH-DATE-YEAR Month/Day/YearDATE-MONTH-YEAR Day/Month/Year
Initial setting: MONTH-DATE-YEAR (for the inch specifications)DATE-MONTH-YEAR (for the metric specifications)
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
DescriptionSets the OEM purchaser code.
PurposeSets the code when replacing the main PCB and the like.
MethodPress the start key.
Setting1. Use the numeric keys or cursor up/down keys to adjust the preset value.2. Press the start key. The count is set , and the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-59
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U266 Setting the number of days after which to automatically delete documents
DescrioptionSets the number of days to save documents on the HDD before automatically deleting.
PurposeTo change the number of days to retain data that is saved within the auto-delete area of the HDD beforeautomatically deleting.
MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Number of days after which to automatically delete documents 0 to 7 (days) 7
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U275 Setting the number of sheets for duplex circulation
DescrioptionSets the number of sheets for circulation in the duplex copy mode.
PurposeTo reduce the number of sheets for circulation if paper jams occur frequently in the duplex copy mode.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select an item to be set.
Display Description
MODE0 Circulation of five sheetsMODE1 Circulation of four sheets
Initial setting: MODE03. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U277 Setting auto application change time
DescriptionSets the time that passes until the machine starts automatically printing after completing copying or operationwhen the machine is used as a printer (only if the printer kit is installed).
PurposeAccording to user request, changes the setting.
MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Switching time 30 to 270 (s) 30
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-60
U329 Default setting Auto rotation copy/Sort copy
DescriptionSets the initial mode for the Auto rotation copy/Sort copy selected when auto clear is triggered or the reset keyis pressed.
PurposeTo be set as required according to the user.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the item to be set.
Setting Auto rotation copy1. Select ON or OFF.
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting Sort copy1. Select ON or OFF.
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U330 Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation
DescriptionSets the number of copies at which copy ejection will be switched from the optional document finisher's subtray to its main tray when sorting is turned ON in the setting for the output mode under user simulation.
PurposeTo be set as required according to the number of copies the user makes.
MethodPress the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
Number of copies to be ejected on the sub tray 0 to 100 (sheets) 100
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U331 Switching the paper ejection mode
DescrioptionSets whether to eject copied sheets with the printed face facing up or down.
PurposeTo be set according to user request.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select the ejection mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FACE UP Face-up ejectionFACE DOWN Face-down ejection
Initial setting: FACE UP2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-61
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
DescriptionSets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size. The coefficient set here is used toconvert the black ratio in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size and to display the result in user simulation.
PurposeTo set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/11" × 81/2" size forcopying and printing respectively.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select copying (COPY) or printing (PRT).2. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
COPY Size parameter for copying 0.1 to 3.0 1.0PRT Size parameter for printing 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U336 Setting the HDD type
DescrioptionSets the manufacturer and type of the HDD.
PurposeTo set data according to the manufacturer and type of the new HDD after replacement.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
Description Setting range Initial setting
HDD type 0 to 255 0
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U339 Setting the drawer heater mode
DescriptionSets the drawer heater to ON or OFF for the sleep mode.
PurposeChange of setting is not needed in principle.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON The drawer heater is on even if the main switch is off.(The drawer heater is always on except during driving.)
OFF The drawer heater is on only if the main switch is off.(The drawer heater is off if the main switch is on.)
Initial setting: ON3. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-62
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
DescriptionSets a paper feed location specified for printer output (only if a printer kit is installed).
PurposeTo use a paper feed location only for printer output.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the paper feed location for the printer. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
CASSETTE 1 Drawer 1CASSETTE 2 Drawer 2CASSETTE 3 Drawer 3CASSETTE 4 Drawer 4SIDE DECK Optional side deck (55 cpm copier only)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
DescriptionSets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject trayis selected as the eject location.
PurposeAccording to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Sets restriction on the number of sheetsOFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
DescriptionSwitches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
PurposeTo be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Duplex copyOFF Simplex copy
Initial setting: OFF2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-63
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode
DescriptionChanges the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
PurposeAccording to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select control mode. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
INSTANT READY The fixing control temperature is not lowered and only the display onthe operation panel is turned off.
ENERGY STAR The fixing control temperature is lowered by 30°C/86°F and forcedstabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
E 2000 The fixing control temperature is lowered by 30°C/86°F and forcedstabilization is performed 30 seconds after exiting preheat.
TOP RUNNER Control in accordance with Top Runner is performed.
Initial setting: ENERGY STAR2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
DescriptionSets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting thenumber of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenancecount reaches the set value, the message is displayed.This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-64
U347 Setting auto drawer size detection
DescriptionTurns the auto drawer size detection function on/off.
PurposeTo be used when turning the auto paper size (in the drawers) detection off and making copies onto only thespecified size paper.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Detects the paper sizes in the drawers automatically.OFF Does not detect the paper sizes in the drawers automatically.
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U350 Setting the ID-code error output
DescrioptionSets whether or not an error report is output when an ID-code error occurs.
PurposeAccording to user request, changes the setting.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Error report is outputOFF Error report is not output
Initial setting: OFF2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D
1-4-65
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U355 Setting the output mode for face up output
DescrioptionSpecifies whether to output from the first page so that the pages after the second page are stacked on the firstpage or to output from the last page so that the first page is stacked at the top when outputting face up inprinting.
PurposeSet according to the preference of the user.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Setting1. Select The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FIRST PRINT To output from the first pageORDER OF PAGE To output from the last page
Initial setting: FIRST PRINT2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-18.
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-38.
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-72.
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
AdjustmentSee page 1-6-16.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-66
U504 Initializing the scanner NIC
DescriptionInitializing the optional scanner NIC to its factory default.
PurposeTo return to a setup at the time of factory shipments.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. All data in the scanner NIC is initialized.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectinga maintenance item No. is displayed.
U505 Setting Data Base Assistant
DescriptionSets whether or not the database linkage setting is enabled if an optional network scanner is installed.
PurposeAccording to user request, changes the setting.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting1. Select ON or OFF. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
ON Database linkage setting is enabled.OFF Database linkage setting is disabled.
Initial setting: ON2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
DescriptionDisplays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
PurposeTo check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
Display Paper feed locations
BYPASS Bypass trayFIRST Drawer 1SECOND Drawer 2THIRD Drawer 3FORTH Drawer 4SIDE DECK Optional side deck (55 cpm copier only)DUPLEX Duplex unit
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance
item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-67
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
DescriptionDisplays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
PurposeTo check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
ImplementationPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the jam countsTOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts
Method: Displays/clears the jam counts1. Select COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The count for jam detection by type is displayed.2. Change the screen using the ∗ or # keys.3. Select the counts for all jam codes and press the reset key.4. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Method: Displays the total jam counts1. Select TOTAL COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The total number of jam counts by type is
displayed.2. Use the ∗ or # keys to switch the display.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
DescriptionDisplays or clears the service call code counts by types.
PurposeTo check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacingconsumable parts.
ImplementationPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
COUNT Displays/clears the call for service countsTOTAL COUNT Displays the total call for service counts
Method: Displays/clears the call for service counts1. Select COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The count for call for service detection by type is
displayed.2. Change the screen using the ∗ or # keys.3. Select the counts for all service call and press the reset key.4. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Method: Displays the total call for service counts1. Select TOTAL COUNT in the screen for selecting an item. The total number of call for service counts by
type is displayed.2. Use the ∗ or # keys to switch the display.
The total number of call for service count cannot be cleared.To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-68
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
DescriptionDisplays or clears the counts of the DF or optional finisher.
PurposeTo check the use of the DF and optional finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked. The count of the selected device is displayed.
• DF
Display Description
CHANGE Original replacement countADF No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DF in ADF modeRADF No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DF in RADF mode
• Finisher
Display Description
CP CNT No. of copies that has passedSTAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activatedPUNCH Frequency the punch has been activatedSTACK Frequency the stacker has been activatedSADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated
Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse. Select the counts for all, press the
reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.3. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. isdisplayed.
U906 Resetting partial operation control
DescriptionResets the service call code for partial operation control.
PurposeTo be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and therelated parts are serviced.
Method1. Press the start key.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel.3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine
returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.
2BC/D
1-4-69
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U907 Checking and resetting the count value on each ejection location
DescriptionDisplays and resets the count value of ejected sheets on each ejection location.
PurposeChecks the replacement period for maintenance parts. Also resets the count value after replacing themaintenance parts.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.The count value on each ejection location is displayed
Display Description
STRAIGHT Straight ejection countSWITCH BACK Reversed ejection countAUTO DUPLEX Duplex tray ejection count
Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all, press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance
item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U908 Changing the total counter value
DescriptionDisplays, clears and changes the total counter value.
PurposeTo check the total counter value.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for total count value is displayed.
Display Description
TOTAL COUNT Electronic total counter valueTOTAL COUNT (MACHINE) Mechanical total counter value entered at the beginning
Clearing1. Select the count to be cleared. The selected item is displayed in reverse.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count
DescriptionDisplays and clears the count of the fixing web roller operation.
PurposeTo clear the fixing web counts after replacing the fixing web roller during maintenance or for other reasons.
MethodPress the start key.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D
1-4-70
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
DescriptionClears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets.
PurposeTo clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method1. Press the start key.2. Press CANCEL on the touch panel.3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item is displayed.
U911 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper sizes
DescriptionDisplays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
PurposeTo check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.
Clearing1. Select the paper size. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear all counts, press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
When clearing all counts, the screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value
DescriptionDisplays and clears the count value of waste toner box
PurposeTo check the period of replacement of waste toner box. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
MethodPress the start key.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
2BC/D-1
1-4-71
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
U922 Checking/clearing the solenoid count value
DescriptionDisplays and clears the count value of solenoid
PurposeTo check the period of replacement of solenoid. Also to clear the count value after replacement.
MethodPress the start key.
Display Description
BRA SOL COUNT Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL)DPRAS SOL COUNT Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL)
Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be changed.2. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance No. item is displayed.
U923 Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning count
DescriptionDisplays or clears the count value for transfer charger cleaning.
PurposeTo clear the count value before replacing maintenance parts.
MethodPress the start key. The count value for transfer charger cleaning is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The value is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U960 Outputting the machine used circumstances list
DescriptionOutputs machine used circumstances list and clears the data.
PurposeTo check the machine operation situation. Also to clear the data.
MethodPress the start key.
Outputting the list1. Select OUTPUT.2. Press the start key to output the list.
Clearing1. Select COUNT CLEAR.2. Press the start key to clear the count.
CompletionPress the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-72
U989 HDD Scandisk
DescriptionRestores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
PurposeIf power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the hard disk drivemay be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.
Method1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.2. Press EXECUTE on the touch panel. It is displayed in reverse.3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without executing scandisk, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance item No. is displayed.
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
PurposeTo check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp afterreplacement.
MethodPress the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a six-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen forselecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-71-1
2BC/D-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
MaintenanceDescriptionitem No.
2BC/D-1
1-4-74
U991 Checking/clearing the scanner count
DescriptionDisplays or clears the scanner operation count.
PurposeTo check the status of use of the scanner.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
TOTAL SCAN COUNT Counts of scanner operationNT SCAN COUNT Counts of network scanner operation
Clearing1. Select the item to be cleared.2. Press the reset key.3. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Select the item to be changed.2. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric key.3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance No. item is displayed.
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count
DescriptionDisplays, clears or changes the print count of the printer when the optional printer board is installed.
PurposeTo check the frequency of use of the printer.
MethodPress the start key. The screen for the printer count of the printer is displayed.
Clearing1. Press the reset key.2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Setting1. Enter a seven-digit count using the numeric keys.2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
CompletionTo exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting amaintenance No. item is displayed.
1-4-72
2BC/D
1-5-1
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection
(1) Paper misfeed indicationWhen a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the drawer, front cover or right cover. When paper is jammed in the DF, openthe DF original reversing cover. To clear a jam in the feedshift and duplex sections, draw out the duplex unit.Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch 1 or 2 off and on.
• Misfeed in drawerJam code 10Jam code 11Jam code 12Jam code 13Jam code 16Jam code 17Jam code 31
• Misfeed in bypassJam code 14
• Misfeed in right coverJam code 18Jam code 19Jam code 20Jam code 21Jam code 22Jam code 24Jam code 25Jam code 26Jam code 27Jam code 28Jam code 29
• Misfeed in side deck*1
Jam code 15
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
2BC/D
1-5-2
• Misfeed in paper conveying sectionJam code 23Jam code 30Jam code 32
• Misfeed in fixing sectionJam code 40Jam code 50Jam code 52Jam code 53
• Misfeed in duplex sectionJam code 51Jam code 60Jam code 61Jam code 62Jam code 63Jam code 64Jam code 65Jam code 66Jam code 67Jam code 68
• Misfeed in DFJam code 70Jam code 71Jam code 72Jam code 73Jam code 74Jam code 75Jam code 76
• Misfeed in document finisher*2
Jam code 80 to 95
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
2BC/D
1-5-3
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
OFSW
OSBSW
DFTSW
PFSW6
PFSW5
DPCSW1DPCSW2
BYPPSWBYPPFCL
DFCL
FCL5
FCL4
FCL3
PFCL3
PFCL2
PFCL1
FCL2-H
FCL1-H
DUPFSSW
FSSW
DUPPCSW1DUPFWDCL
DUPREVCL
DUPPCSW2 DUPESW
DUPJSW
FDESWESW
FCL1-L
FCL2-L
RCLRSW
PFCL4
PFSW4
PFSW3
PFSW2
PFSW1
Figure 1-5-1
2BC/D
1-5-4
Section Jam code Description Conditions
Paper feedsection
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
No paper feed fromdrawer 1
No paper feed fromdrawer 2
No paper feed fromdrawer 3
No paper feed fromdrawer 4
No paper feed from by-pass
No paper feed from sidedeck*1
Misfeed in deck paperconveying section 1
Misfeed in deck paperconveying section 2
Misfeed in copier verticalpaper conveying section1
Misfeed in copier verticalpaper conveying section2
Misfeed in copier verticalpaper conveying section3
Misfeed in copier verticalpaper conveying section4
Misfeed in copier verticalpaper conveying section5
Misfeed in convergingsection
Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn on within 660 msof paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on; the clutch is thensuccessively turned off for 1 s and turned back on once, butthe switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) does not turn on within 660 msof paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on; the clutch is thensuccessively turned off for 1 s and turned back on once, butthe switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) does not turn on within 660 msof paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3) turning on; the clutch is thensuccessively turned off for 1 s and turned back on once, butthe switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn onwithin 660 ms of paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4) turning on; theclutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned backon once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 980 msof the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on; theclutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned backon once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 980 ms.
Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn on within 660 msof the side deck paper feed clutch (SDPFCL) turning on; theclutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned backon once, but the switch again fails to turn on within 660 ms.
Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn onwithin 760 ms of deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)turning on.
Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) does not turn on within 840 msof deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) turning on.Deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) does not turn offwithin 760 ms of deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2)turning off.
Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 760 msof paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) turning on.
Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn on within 800 msof paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turning on.
Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn on within 800 msof paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turning on.
Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) does not turn on within 800 msof paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turning on.
Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) does not turn on within 760 msof paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) turning on.
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 740ms of paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turning on.
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
2BC/D
1-5-5
Section Jam code Description Conditions
Paper feedsection
Paper con-veyingsection
Fixing sec-tion
Eject sec-tion
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
40
50
51
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion 1
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion 2
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion 3
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion 4
Multiple sheets in copiervertical conveying sec-tion 5
Multiple sheets in con-verging section
Multiple sheets in deckpaper conveying section
Misfeed in registration/transfer section
Misfeed in fixing section
Misfeed in eject section
Misfeed in face downeject section
Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 1470 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off within 800 msof paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turning off.
Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) does not turn off by the previ-ous paper within 1330 ms of duplex eject switch (DUPESW)turning on.
Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 1470 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) does not turn off within 800 msof paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turning off.
Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 1470 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) does not turn off within 800 msof paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turning off.
Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 1470 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) does not turn off within 760 msof paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) turning off.
Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 1470 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) does not turn off within 930 msof deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) turning off.
Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn off within thetime required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 2179 ms of turning on.Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn off within 667 msof paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) turning off.
Deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) does not turn offwithin the time required to convey the length of the used pa-per size plus 1470 ms of turning on.
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 670ms of paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turning off.
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within 2260 ms ofthe registration clutch (RCL) turning on.Even if 2260 ms elapses after the registration clutch (RCL)turns on, the OFF status of the eject switch (ESW) for thepreceding paper is not detected.
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within the time re-quired to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2180ms of turning on.
The face down eject switch (FDESW) does not turn off withinthe time required to convey the length of the used paper sizeplus 2180 ms of turning on.
2BC/D
1-5-6
Section Jam code Description Conditions
Feedshiftsection
Duplexsection
DF
52
53
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
70
71
Misfeed in feedshift sec-tion
Misfeed in feedshift de-tention section
Misfeed in duplex traysection
Misfeed in duplexfeedshift section (facedown eject)
Misfeed in duplexfeedshift section (duplex)
Misfeed in duplex paperconveying section 1
Misfeed in duplex paperconveying detention sec-tion 1
Misfeed in duplex paperconveying section 2
Misfeed in duplex paperconveying detention sec-tion 2
Misfeed in duplex ejectsection
Misfeed in duplex ejectdetention section
No original feed
An original jam in theoriginal feed section 1
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within 1190ms of the eject switch (ESW) turning on.
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within 1190ms of the eject switch (ESW) turning off.Even if 1190 ms elapses after the eject switch (ESW) turnson, the OFF status of the feedshift switch (FSSW) for thepreceding paper is not detected.
The duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) does not turn onwithin 860 ms of the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)turning on.
The face down eject switch (FDESW) does not turn on within1120 ms of the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turningon.
Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does notturn on within 910 ms of the duplex feedshift switch(DUPFSSW) turning on.Even if 860 ms elapses after the duplex reverse clutch(DUPREVCL) turns on, the ON status of the duplex feedshiftswitch (DUPFSSW) for the preceding paper is not detected.
Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does notturn on within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1(DUPPCSW1) turning on.
Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does notturn off within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1(DUPPCSW1) turning off.Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does notturn off within 1280 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1(DUPPCSW1) turning on.
The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn on within1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)turning on.
The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn off within1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)turning off.The duplex eject switch (DUPESW) does not turn off within1270 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2)turning on.
Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn on within 1200ms of the duplex eject switch (DUPESW) turning on.
Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) does not turn off within 1200ms of the duplex eject switch (DUPESW) turning off.
In the primary original feed for the second original or after inthe 1 sided or 2 sided original mode, even if retry operation isperformed two times, primary original feed is not performed.
In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided original mode,even if the specified number of pulses of the original feedmotor (OFM) passes after the original switchback switch(OSBSW) turns on, the ON status of the DF timing switch(DFTSW) is not detected.
2BC/D-1
1-5-7
Section Jam code Description Conditions
DF 72
73
74
75
76
An original jam in theoriginal feed section 2
An original jam in theoriginal conveying sec-tion
An original jam remainingafter retries
An original jam in theswitchback section 1
An original jam in theswitchback section 2
In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided original mode,even if the specified number of pulses of the originalconveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timing switch(DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the original feed switch(OFSW) or the original switchback switch (OSBSW) is notdetected.In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, evenif the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor(OFM) passes after the original feed switch (OFSW) turnson, the OFF status of the original feed switch (OFSW) is notdetected and the ON status of the original switchback switch(OSBSW) is not detected.
In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-nal mode, even if the specified number of pulses of the origi-nal conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timingswitch (DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the DF timingswitch (DFTSW) is not detected.In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-nal mode, before the specified number of pulses of the origi-nal conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DF timingswitch (DFTSW) turns on, the OFF status of the DF timingswitch (DFTSW) is detected.
In the secondary original feed in the 1 sided or 2 sided origi-nal mode, even if retry operation is performed five times,secondary original feed is not performed.
In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, evenif the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor(OFM) passes after the original switchback switch (OSBSW)turns on, the OFF status of the original switchback switch(OSBSW) is not detected.In the secondary original feed in the 2 sided original mode,even if the specified number of pulses of the original feedmotor (OFM) passes after the original conveying motor(OCM) turns on, the ON status of the DF timing switch(DFTSW) is not detected.In the original switchback in the 2 sided original mode, evenif the specified number of pulses of the original feed motor(OFM) passes after the original feed switch (OFSW) turnson, the OFF status of the original feed switch (OFSW) is notdetected and the OFF status of the original switchbackswitch (OSBSW) is detected.
While the back side of an original is being scanned in the 2sided original mode, even if the specified number of pulsesof the original conveying motor (OCM) passes after the DFtiming switch (DFTSW) turns on, the ON status of the originalswitchback switch (OSBSW) is not detected.
2BC/D
1-5-8
Section Jam code Description Conditions
Finisher*2 80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Jam between the finisherand copier
Paper jam during paperinsertion to the finisher
Paper jam during paperinsertion to the finisherand paper ejection to thesub tray
Paper jam at the sidingdrum
Paper jam during paperinsertion to the intermedi-ate tray
Paper jam during ejectionof stack of paper
Jam in eject section ofmain tray
Jam in eject section(middle tray) of main tray
Jam in eject section ofmain tray
Jam in cover open
Jam in stapler
Jam in saddle paper en-try section
Jam in saddle paper en-try section
Jam in saddle tray sec-tion
Jam in saddle eject sec-tion
Jam in saddle eject sec-tion
There is no reply.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
See the finisher service manual.
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
2BC/D
1-5-9
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(3) Paper misfeeds• Copier
(1)A paper jam in thepaper feed, convey-ing or eject sectionis indicated as soonas the main switchis turned on.
(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 1).Jam code 10
A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround paper feed switch1/2/3/4/5/6, the registrationswitch or eject switch.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Defective paper feedswitch 2.
Defective paper feedswitch 3.
Defective paper feedswitch 4.
Defective paper feedswitch 5.
Defective paper feedswitch 6.
Defective registrationswitch.
Defective eject switch.
Paper in drawer 1 is ex-tremely curled.
Check if the upper paperfeed pulley, lower paperfeed pulley or upper for-warding pulley of drawer 1are deformed.
Broken paper feed switch3 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 3.
Check visually and remove it, if any.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 2 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 2 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 3 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 3 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 4 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 4 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 5 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 6 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch onand off manually. Replace the registration switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Change the paper.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 3 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 3 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 3 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
2BC/D
1-5-10
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(2)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 1).Jam code 10
(3)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 2).Jam code 11
(4)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 3).Jam code 12
(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 4).Jam code 13
Check if paper feed clutch1 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 1.
Paper in drawer 2 is ex-tremely curled.
Check if the upper paperfeed pulley, lower paperfeed pulley or upper for-warding pulley of drawer 2are deformed.
Broken paper feed switch4 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 4.
Check if paper feed clutch2 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 2.
Paper in drawer 3 is ex-tremely curled.
Broken paper feed switch6 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 6.
Check if paper feed clutch3 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 3.
Paper in drawer 4 is ex-tremely curled.
Broken deck paper con-veying switch 1 actuator.
Defective deck paper con-veying switch 1.
Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 1 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-46).
Change the paper.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 4 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 4 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 4 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 2 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-46).
Change the paper.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 6 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 6 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 3 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-46).
Change the paper.
Check visually and replace deck feed switch 1 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn deck paper conveyingswitch 1 on and off manually. Replace deck paper conveyingswitch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
2BC/D
1-5-11
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(5)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from copierdrawer 4).Jam code 13
(6)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from bypass).Jam code 14
(7)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (no paperfeed from sidedeck*). Jam code 15
(8)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam in deckpaper conveyingsection).Jam code 16/17
Check if paper feed clutch4 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with pa-per feed clutch 4.
Paper on the bypass tableis extremely curled.
Check if the forwardingpulley, upper or lower pa-per feed pulleys of the by-pass are deformed.
Broken paper feed switch1 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Check if the bypass paperfeed clutch malfunctions.
Electrical problem with thebypass paper feed clutch.
Check if the side deck pa-per feed clutch malfunc-tions.
Electrical problem with theside deck paper feedclutch.
Broken deck paper con-veying switch 2 actuator.
Defective deck paper con-veying switch 2.
Broken paper feed switch5 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 5.
Check if the deck feedclutch malfunctions.
Electrical problem with thedeck feed clutch.
Run maintenance item U032 and select paper feed clutch 4 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-46).
Change the paper.
Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 1 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the bypass paper feedclutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-46).
Check and repair if necessary.
Check.
Check visually and replace deck paper conveying switch 2 if itsactuator is broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn deck paper conveyingswitch 2 on and off manually. Replace deck paper conveyingswitch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 5 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 5 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the deck feed clutch onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-47).
*Optional for 55 cpm copier only.
2BC/D
1-5-12
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(9)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam incopier vertical paperconveying section).Jam code 18/19/20/21/22
Broken paper feed switch1 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Broken paper feed switch2 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 2.
Broken paper feed switch3 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 3.
Broken paper feed switch4 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 4.
Broken paper feed switch5 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 5.
Broken paper feed switch6 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 6.
Check if the feed pulleys,feed roller and vertical pa-per conveying rollers A,B,C,D and E do not con-tact each other.
Check if the feed pulleys,feed roller and vertical pa-per conveying rollers A,B,C,D and E are de-formed.
Check if the feed clutch 3/4/5 malfunctions.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 1 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 2 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 2 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 2 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 3 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 3 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 3 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 4 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 4 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 4 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 5 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 5 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 6 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 6 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the feed clutch 3/4/5 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
2BC/D
1-5-13
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(9)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam incopier vertical paperconveying section).Jam code 18/19/20/21/22
(10)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (jam in con-verging section).Jam code 23
(11)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier ver-tical conveying sec-tion).Jam code 24/25/26/27/28/29
Electrical problem with thefeed clutch 3/4/5.
Defective registrationswitch.
Broken paper feed switch2 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 2.
Broken paper feed switch3 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 3.
Broken paper feed switch4 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 4.
Broken paper feed switch5 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 5.
Broken paper feed switch6 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 6.
Check if the feed pulleys,feed roller and vertical pa-per conveying rollers A,B,C,D and E do not con-tact each other.
Check (see page 1-5-45).
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch onand off manually. Replace the registration switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 2 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 2 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 2 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 3 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 3 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 3 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 4 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 4 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 4 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 5 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 5 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 6 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 6 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
2BC/D
1-5-14
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(11)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copier ver-tical conveying sec-tion).Jam code 24/25/26/27/28/29
(12)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in copierconverging section).Jam code 30
(13)A paper jam in thepaper feed sectionis indicated duringcopying (multiplesheets in deck pa-per conveying sec-tion).Jam code 31
(14)A paper jam in thepaper conveyingsection is indicatedduring copying (jamin registration/trans-fer section).Jam code 32
(15)A paper jam in thefixing section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in fixingsection).Jam code 40
Check if the feed pulleys,feed roller and vertical pa-per conveying rollers A,B,C,D and E are de-formed.
Check if the feed clutch 3/4/5 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with thefeed clutch 3/4/5.
Deformed guides alongthe paper conveying path.
Broken paper feed switch1 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Check if the deck paperconveying rollers are de-formed.
Check if the registrationclutch malfunctions.
Electrical problem with theregistration clutch.
Check if the upper andlower registration rollerscontact each other.
Check if the upper andlower feed rollers contacteach other.
Check if the registrationclutch malfunctions.
Electrical problem with theregistration clutch.
Check if the upper andlower registration rollerscontact each other.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the feed clutch 3/4/5 onthe touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-45).
Repair or replace if necessary.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 1 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutchon the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-44).
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutchon the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-44).
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
2BC/D
1-5-15
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(15)A paper jam in thefixing section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in fixingsection).Jam code 40
(16)A paper jam in theeject section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in ejectsection).Jam code 50
(17)A paper jam in theeject section is indi-cated during copy-ing (jam in facedown eject section).Jam code 51
(18)A paper jam in thefeedshift section isindicated duringcopying (jam infeedshift section).Jam code 52/53
Check if the upper andlower feed rollers contacteach other.
Check if the fixing unitfront guide is deformed.
Check if the press roller isextremely dirty or de-formed.
Check if the heat rollerseparation claws are dirtyor deformed.
Check if the heat roller andits separation claws con-tact each other.
Broken eject switch actua-tor.
Defective eject switch.
Check if the eject rollerand eject pulley contacteach other.
Broken eject switch actua-tor.
Defective eject switch.
Defective face down ejectswitch.
Check if the left or rightface down feed roller isdeformed.
Check if the right middle orleft face down eject guideis deformed.
Broken feedshift switchactuator.
Defective feedshift switch.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Clean or replace if necessary.
Clean or replace if necessary.
Remedy if the separation claw springs are out of place.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-ken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is bro-ken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the eject switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the face down eject switchon and off manually. Replace the face down eject switch if indi-cation of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-played in reverse.
Check visually and replace any deformed rollers.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Check visually and replace the feedshift switch if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch onand off manually. Replace the feedshift switch if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
2BC/D
1-5-16
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(18)A paper jam in thefeedshift section isindicated duringcopying (jam infeedshift section).Jam code 52/53
(19)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex tray section).Jam code 60
(20)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex feedshift sec-tion).Jam code 61
(21)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex feedshift sec-tion).Jam code 62
Electrical problem with thefeedshift solenoid.
Deformed lower feedshiftguide.
Check if the left and rightfeedshift rollers contacteach other.
Broken duplex feedshiftswitch actuator.
Defective duplex feedshiftswitch.
Check if the duplex pres-sure release solenoid mal-functions.
Electrical problem with theduplex pressure releasesolenoid.
Check if the duplex ejectswitching solenoid mal-functions.
Electrical problem with theduplex eject switching so-lenoid.
Defective face down ejectswitch.
Broken duplex paper con-veying switch 1 actuator.
Defective duplex paperconveying switch 1.
Defective duplex feedshiftswitch.
Check (see page 1-5-47).
Repair or replace if necessary.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check visually and replace the duplex feedshift switch if its ac-tuator is broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex feedshift switchon and off manually. Replace the duplex feedshift switch if indi-cation of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-played in reverse.
Run maintenance item U033 and select the duplex pressure re-lease solenoid on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Checkthe status and remedy if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-47).
Check and repair if necessary.
Check (see page 1-5-47).
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the face down eject switchon and off manually. Replace the face down eject switch if indi-cation of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-played in reverse.
Check visually and replace duplex paper conveying switch 1 ifits actuator is broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveyingswitch 1 on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveyingswitch 1 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex feedshift switchon and off manually. Replace the duplex feedshift switch if indi-cation of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis-played in reverse.
2BC/D
1-5-17
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(22)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex paper convey-ing section).Jam code 63/64/65/66
(23)A paper jam in theduplex section isindicated duringcopying (jam in du-plex eject section).Jam code 67/68
Broken duplex paper con-veying switch 2 actuator.
Defective duplex paperconveying switch 2.
Broken duplex eject switchactuator.
Defective duplex ejectswitch.
Check if upper and lowerduplex registration rollers,upper and lower duplexpaper conveying rollersand upper and lower du-plex eject rollers contacteach other correctly.
Check if upper or lowerduplex registration roller,upper and lower duplexpaper conveying roller orupper and lower duplexeject roller are deformed.
Broken paper feed switch1 actuator.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Broken duplex eject switchactuator.
Defective duplex ejectswitch.
Check visually and replace the duplex paper conveying switch 2if its actuator is broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn duplex paper conveyingswitch 2 on and off manually. Replace duplex paper conveyingswitch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Check visually and replace the duplex eject switch if its actuatoris broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex eject switch onand off manually. Replace the duplex eject switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Check visually and replace paper feed switch 1 if its actuator isbroken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace paper feed switch 1 if indication of thecorresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in re-verse.
Check visually and replace the duplex eject switch if its actuatoris broken.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the duplex eject switch onand off manually. Replace the duplex eject switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
2BC/D
1-5-18
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
• DF
(1)An original jamswhen the mainswitch is turned on.
(2)An original jamsduring continuouscopying of multipleoriginals.
(3)An original jams inthe DF is indicatedduring copying (nooriginal feed).Jam code 70
(4)An original jams inthe DF during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal feed/con-veying section).Jam code 72/73
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the original feedswitch.
Defective original feedswitch.
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the originalswitchback switch.
Defective originalswitchback switch.
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the DF timingswitch.
Defective DF timingswitch.
Defective original feedswitch.
Check if the original feedmotor or the original con-veying motor malfunction.
Defective original feedswitch.
Check if the original feedmotor malfunctions.
Defective DF timingswitch.
Defective original feedswitch.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchbackswitch on and off manually. Replace the original switchbackswitch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch onand off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor/original conveying motor on the touch panel to be turned on andoff. Check the status and remedy if necessary.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motoron the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch onand off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
2BC/D
1-5-19
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(4)An original jams inthe DF during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal feed/con-veying section).Jam code 72/73
(5)An original jams inthe DF during copy-ing (a jam in theoriginal switchbacksection).Jam code 75/76
(6)Original jams fre-quently.
Defective originalswitchback switch.
Check if the original feedmotor malfunctions.
Check if the DF originalfeed pulley or the DFseparation pulley is de-formed.
Check if the DF registra-tion roller or the DF regis-tration pulley is deformed.
Check if the lower originalconveying roller or thefront scanning pulley isdeformed.
Check if the original con-veying motor malfunctions.
Defective originalswitchback switch.
Defective DF timingswitch.
Check if the original feedmotor malfunctions.
Check if the original con-veying motor malfunctions.
An original outside thespecifications is used.
The DF forwarding pulleys,DF original feed pulley orDF switchback pulley isdirty with paper powder.
The DF original feed pulleyand the DF separation pul-ley do not contact cor-rectly.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchbackswitch on and off manually. Replace the original switchbackswitch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motoron the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
Check visually and replace the deformed pulley.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveyingmotor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchbackswitch on and off manually. Replace the original switchbackswitch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch onand off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motoron the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status andremedy if necessary.
Run maintenance item U243 and select the original conveyingmotor on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the sta-tus and remedy if necessary.
Use only originals conforming to the specifications.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check and remedy.
2BD/C
1-5-20
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic functionThis unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problemdisplayed as a code consisting of "C" followed by a number between 0040 and 7810, indicating the nature of the problem.A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches 1 or 2 off and back on.
Figure 1-5-2 Service call code display
012345678901234
C2000
Call for service.
2BC/D
1-5-21
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0040
C0100
C0110
C0210
C0240
C0250
Network scanner PCB* problem• Correct communication data is not
obtained from network scanner PCB.
Backup memory read/write problem• Read and write data does not match.
Backup memory data problem• Data in the specified area of the
backup memory does not match thespecified values.
Operation unit PCB communicationproblem• There is no reply after 20 retries at
communication.
Printer PCB* communication prob-lem• There is no reply after 20 retries at
communication.
Network scanner PCB* communica-tion problem• There is no reply, in during regular
communication from network scannerPCB to main PCB.
Defective networkscanner PCB.
Defective backupRAM or mainPCB.
Problem with thebackup memorydata.
Defective backupRAM.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective mainPCB or operationunit left PCB.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective mainPCB or printerPCB.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective mainPCB or networkscanner PCB.
Replace the network scanner PCB andcheck for correct operation.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Turn safety switch 1 off and back on andrun maintenance item U020 to set the con-tents of the backup memory data again.
If the C0110 is displayed after re-settingthe backup memory contents, replace thebackup RAM or main PCB.
Check the connection of connectors CN10on the main PCB and CN2 on the opera-tion unit PCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.
Replace the main PCB or operation unitleft PCB and check for correct operation.
Check the connection of connector CN3 onthe main PCB and the connector on theprinter PCB. Repair or replace if neces-sary.
Replace the main PCB or printer PCB andcheck for correct operation.
Check the connection of connector CN4 onthe main PCB and the connector on thenetwork scanner PCB. Repair or replace ifnecessary.
Replace the main PCB or network scannerPCB and check for correct operation.
*: Optional.
2BC/D
1-5-22
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0420
C0440
C0610
C0630
Side deck*1 communication problem• An error code from the side deck is
detected eight times in succession.No communication: there is no replyafter 3 retries.Abnormal communication: a commu-nication error (parity or checksum er-ror) is detected five times in succes-sion.
Finisher*2 communication problem• An error code from the side deck is
detected eight times in succession.No communication: there is no replyafter 3 retries.Abnormal communication: a commu-nication error (parity or checksum er-ror) is detected five times in succes-sion.
Bitmap (DIMM) problem• There is a problem with the data or
address bus of the bitmap DRAM.
DMA problem• DMA transmission of compressed,
decompressed, rotated, relocated orblanked-out image data does notcomplete within the specified periodof time.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective mainPCB.
Defective sidedeck main PCB.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective mainPCB.
Defective finishermain PCB.
Defective mainPCB.
DIMM installedincorrectly.
Defective DIMM.
Defective mainPCB.
Check the connection of connectors CN13on the main PCB and CN3 on the sidedeck main PCB, and the continuity acrossthe connector terminals. Repair or replaceif necessary.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Replace the side deck main PCB andcheck for correct operation.
Check the connection of connectors CN24on the main PCB and CN2 on the finishermain PCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Replace the finisher main PCB and checkfor correct operation.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Check if the DIMM is inserted into thesocket on the main PCB correctly.
Replace the DIMM and check for correctoperation.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
*1: Optional for 55 cpm copier only. *2: Optional.
2BC/D-1
1-5-23
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0640
C1010
C1020
Hard disk drive problem• The hard disk drive cannot be ac-
cessed.
Upper lift motor problem [Drawer 1]• When the drawer 1 is inserted, the lift
limit switch 1 does not turn on within5.5 s of the upper lift motor turningon.
• During copying, the lift limit switch 1does not turn on within 200 ms of theupper lift motor turning on.
Lower lift motor problem [Drawer 2]• When the drawer 2 is inserted, the lift
limit switch 2 does not turn on within5.5 s of the lower lift motor turning on.
• During copying, the lift limit switch 2does not turn on within 200 ms of thelower lift motor turning on.
Poor contact ofthe hard disk driveconnector termi-nals.
Defective harddisk drive.
Defective mainPCB.
Broken gears orcouplings of theupper lift motor.
Defective upperlift motor.
Poor contact ofthe lift motor 1connector termi-nals.
Defective lift limitswitch 1.
Poor contact ofthe lift limit switch1 connector termi-nals.
Broken gears orcouplings of thelower lift motor.
Defective lower liftmotor.
Poor contact ofthe lower lift motorconnector termi-nals.
Defective lift limitswitch 2.
Poor contact ofthe lift limit switch2 connector termi-nals.
Check the connection of connectors CN2on the main PCB and hard disk drive, andthe continuity across the connector termi-nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Run U906 (Resetting partial operation con-trol) to cancel partial operation control. RunU024 (HDD formatting) without turning thepower off to initialize the hard disk.Replace the hard disk drive and check forcorrect operation if the problem is still de-tected after initialization.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Replace the upper lift motor.
Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the upper lift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Check if CN 7-6 on the engine PCB goeslow when the lift limit switch 1 is turned off.If not, replace the lift limit switch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Replace the lower lift motor.
Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the lower lift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Check if CN7-22 on the engine PCB goeslow when the lift limit switch 2 is turned off.If not, replace the lift limit switch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
2BC/D
1-5-24
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1100
C1110
Deck right lift motor problem[Drawer 3]• When the drawer 3 is inserted, the
Deck lift limit switch 1 does not turnon within 33 s of the deck right lift mo-tor turning on.
• During copying, the deck lift limitswitch 1 does not turn on within 200ms of the deck right lift motor turningon.
Deck left lift motor problem[Drawer 4]• When the drawer 4 is inserted, the
deck lift limit switch 2 does not turn onwithin 33 s of the deck left lift motorturning on.
• During copying, the deck lift limitswitch 2 does not turn on within 200ms of the deck left lift motor turningon.
Broken gears orcouplings of thedeck right lift mo-tor.
Defective deckright lift motor.
Poor contact ofthe deck right liftmotor connectorterminals.
Defective deck liftlimit switch 1.
Poor contact ofthe deck lift limitswitch 1 connec-tor terminals.
Broken gears orcouplings of thedeck left lift motor.
Defective deck leftlift motor.
Poor contact ofthe deck left liftmotor connectorterminals.
Defective deck leftlift limit switch 2.
Poor contact ofthe deck lift limitswitch 2 connec-tor terminals.
Replace the deck right lift motor.
Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the deck right lift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Check if CN8-2 on the engine PCB goeslow when the deck right lift limit switch 1 isturned off. If not, replace the deck lift limitswitch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Replace the deck left lift motor.
Check for continuity across the coil. Ifnone, replace the deck left lift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Check if CN26-8 on the engine PCB goeslow when the deck lift limit switch 2 isturned off. If not, replace the deck lift limitswitch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
2BC/D
1-5-25
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1140
C1150
C2000
C2500
Side deck* lift motor (going up)problem• When the side deck’s right cover is
closed, the upper limit detectionswitch does not turn on within 17 s ofthe side deck lift motor turning on.
• When the upper limit detection switchdetects edge of turning off signal, theupper limit detection switch does notturn on within 200 ms of the side decklift motor turning on.
Side deck* lift motor (going down)problem• When the side deck’s right cover is
closed, the lower limit detectionswitch does not turn on within 17 s ofthe side deck lift motor turning on.
• When the lower limit detection switchdetects edge of turning off signal, thelower limit detection switch does notturn on within 200 ms of the side decklift motor turning on.
Image formation motor problem• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1
s, 1 s after the drive motor has turnedon.
Paper feed motor problem• LOCK DRIVE signal remains high for
1 s, 1 s after the paper feed motorhas turned on.
Poor contact inthe upper limit de-tection switchconnector termi-nals.
Defective upperlimit detectionswitch.
Defective sidedeck main PCB.
Poor contact inthe lower limit de-tection switchconnector termi-nals.
Defective lowerlimit detectionswitch.
Defective sidedeck main PCB.
Poor contact inthe image forma-tion motor con-nector terminals.
Defective imageformation motorrotation controlcircuit.
Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.
Poor contact inthe paper feedmotor connectorterminals.
Defective paperfeed motor rota-tion control circuit.
Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the upper limit detection switch.
Replace the side deck main PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the lower limit detection switch.
Replace the side deck main PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the image formation motor.
Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the paper feed motor.
Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.
*: Optional for 55 cpm copier only.
2BC/D
1-5-26
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C2550
C2600
C2640
Paper conveying motor problem• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1
s, 1 s after the paper conveying motorhas turned on.
Deck drive motor problem• LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1
s, 1 s after the deck drive motor hasturned on.
Side deck* drive motor problem• SDDM ALM signal remains high for 1
s, 1 s after the side deck drive motorhas turned on.
Scanner carriage problem
Poor contact inthe paper convey-ing motor connec-tor terminals.
Defective paperconveying motorrotation controlcircuit.
Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.
Poor contact inthe deck drivemotor connectorterminals.
Defective deckdrive motor rota-tion control circuit.
Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.
Poor contact inthe side deckdrive motor con-nector terminals.
Defective sidedeck drive motorrotation controlcircuit.
Defective drivetransmission sys-tem.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the paper conveying motor.
Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the deck drive motor.
Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the side deck drive motor.
Check if the rollers and gears rotatesmoothly. If not, grease the bushings andgears. Check for broken gears and replaceif any.
*: Optional for 55 cpm copier only.
2BC/D
1-5-27
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C3100
C3300
C4000
C4010
• The home position is not correctwhen the power is turned on or copy-ing the document placed on the con-tact glass.
Optical system (AGC) problem• After AGC, correct input is not ob-
tained at CCD.
Polygon motor synchronizationproblem
• The polygon motor does not reachthe stable speed within 9 s of theSTART signal turning on.
Polygon motor steady-state problem• The polygon motor rotation is not
stable for 600 ms after the polygonmotor rotation has been stabilized.
BD steady-state problem
Poor contact ofthe connector ter-minals.
Defective scannerhome positionswitch.
Defective enginePCB or scannerdrive PCB.
Defective scannermotor.
Insufficient expo-sure lamp lumi-nosity.
Defective enginePCB.
Incorrect shadingposition.
CCD PCB outputproblem.
Poor contact inthe polygon motorconnector termi-nals.
Defective polygonmotor.
Defective powersource PCB.
Defective enginePCB.
Poor contact inthe polygon motorconnector termi-nals.
Defective polygonmotor.
Defective powersource PCB.
Defective enginePCB.
Check the connection of connector CN10on the engine PCB and the continuityacross the connector terminals. Repair orreplace if necessary.
Replace the scanner home position switch.
Replace the engine PCB or scanner drivePCB and check for correct operation.
Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the exposure lamp or inverterPCB.
Replace the engine PCB and check forcorrect operation.
Adjust the position of the contact glass(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the ISU.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the LSU.
Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN1-4 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the powersource PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is output from CN14-14on the engine PCB. If not, replace the mainPCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the LSU.
Check if 24 V DC is supplied to CN1-4 onthe main PCB. If not, replace the powersource PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is output from CN14-14on the engine PCB. If not, replace the mainPCB.
2BC/D-1
1-5-28
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C4100
C4110
C4200
C5100
C5110
C5300
BD initialization (A) problemWhen power is turned on, only laser Ais output and MIP detects a BD error for600 ms.
BD initialization (B) problemWhen power is turned on, only laser Bis output and MIP detects a BD error for600 ms.
• The VTC detects a BD error for 600ms after the polygon motor rotationhas been stabilized.
Main charger problemMC ALM signal is detected continu-ously for 400 ms when MC REM signalis turned on.
Transfer/separation charger problemSC/TC ALM signal is detected continu-ously for 400 ms when SC/TC REMsignal is turned on.
Eraser problemAfter completion of potential adjustment(automatic adjustment), the drum sur-face potential is 400 V or more.
Defective laserscanner unit.
Defective mainPCB.
Defective laserscanner unit.
Defective mainPCB.
Defective laserdiode.
Defective polygonmotor.
Defective mainPCB.
Leakage duringmain charging.
Defective highvoltage trans-former PCB.
Leakage duringtransfer/separa-tion charging.
Defective highvoltage trans-former PCB.
Poor contact inthe image forma-tion unit connectorterminals.
Poor contact inthe eraser lampconnector termi-nals.
Defective eraserlamp.
Defective enginePCB.
Defective mainPCB.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
Check and clean the main charger unit.
Replace the high voltage transformer PCBand check for correct operation.
Check and clean the transfer charger unit.
Replace the high voltage transformer PCBand check for correct operation.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Replace the eraser lamp.
Replace the engine PCB and check forcorrect operation.
Replace the main PCB and check for cor-rect operation.
2BC/D-1
1-5-29
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C5500
C5510
C5600
Drum surface potential sensor prob-lem 1Drum surface potential sensor outputvoltage is 0.5 V or less when MC REMsignal is turn on. (except during step-ping control)
Drum surface potential sensor prob-lem 2Drum surface potential sensor outputvoltage is 4.5 V or less when MC REMsignal is turn on. (except during step-ping control)
Drum surface potential problem 1• Maximizing the grid output cannot set
the potential.
Poor contact inthe drum surfacepotential sensorconnector termi-nals.
Defective drumsurface potentialsensor.
Defective enginePCB.
Defective highvoltage trans-former PCB.
Defective drumsurface potentialsensor.
Deteriorated maincharger.
Grid or maincharger shield isdirty.
Defective highvoltage trans-former PCB.
Defective enginePCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,repair or replace the cable.
Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
Replace the engine PCB and check forcorrect operation.
Replace the high voltage transformer PCBand check for correct operation.
Replace the drum surface potential sensor.
Check the main charger wire and replace itif necessary.
Clean the grid or main charger shield ifnecessary.
Replace the high voltage transformer PCBand check for correct operation.
Replace the engine PCB and check forcorrect operation.
1-5-28-1
2BC/D-1
This page is intentionally left blank.
2BC/D
1-5-31
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C5610
C6000
C6020
C6030
C6050
Drum surface potential problem 2• Minimizing the grid output cannot set
the potential.
Broken fixing heater wire• The fixing temperature does not in-
crease for 40 s after the fixing heatershave been turned on for warming up.
• The fixing temperature remains below50°C/122°F for 10 s continuously af-ter the fixing heaters have beenturned on during stabilization.
Abnormally high fixing unit ther-mistor temperature• The fixing temperature exceeds
220°C/446 °F for 10 s.• The fixing unit temperature detection
circuit on the engine PCB detects andabnormally high temperature.
Broken fixing unit thermistor• The fixing temperature remains at
0°C/32°F for 30 s continuously whenthe fixing heater is on.
Abnormally low fixing unit ther-mistor temperature• The fixing temperature remains below
120°C/248°F for 10 s.
Defective highvoltage trans-former PCB.
Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistor con-nector terminals.
Fixing unit ther-mistor installedincorrectly.
Fixing unit ther-mostat triggered.
Fixing heater Mand S installedincorrectly.
Broken fixingheater M and Swire.
Shorted fixing unitthermistor.
Broken fixingheater control cir-cuit on the powersource PCB.
Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistor con-nector terminals.
Broken fixing unitthermistor.
Poor contact inthe fixing unitthermistor con-nector terminals.
Broken fixing unitthermistor wire.
Fixing unit ther-mistor installedincorrectly.
Fixing unit ther-mostat triggered.
Fixing heater Mand S installedincorrectly.
Broken fixingheater M and Swire.
Replace the high voltage transformer PCBand check for correct operation.
Check the connection of connector CN25on the engine PCB and the continuityacross the connector terminals. Repair orreplace if necessary.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing heater M and S.
Measure the resistance. If it is 0 Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.
Replace the power source PCB and checkfor correct operation.
Check the connection of connector CN25on the engine PCB and the continuityacross the connector terminals. Repair orreplace if necessary.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Check the connection of connector CN25on the engine PCB and the continuityacross the connector terminals. Repair orreplace if necessary.
Measure the resistance. If it is ∞ Ω, replacethe fixing unit thermistor.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing unit thermostat.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Check for continuity. If none, replace thefixing heater M and S.
1-5-29
2BC/D
1-5-32
Code ContentsRemarks
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C6400
C7100
C7300
C7800
C7810
Zero-crossing signal problem• The main PCB does not detect the
zero-crossing signal (Z CROSS SIG)for the time specified below.At power-on: 3 sOthers: 5 s
Toner sensor problem• The toner sensor output voltage is
outside the range of 0.5 to 4.5 V dur-ing copying or in maintenance itemU130.
• The toner sensor control voltage can-not be set within the range in mainte-nance item U130.
Toner hopper problem• Toner level is not detected when
toner empty is detected.
Broken external temperature ther-mistor• The input voltage is 4.5 V or more.
Short-circuited external temperaturethermistor• The input voltage is 0.5 V or less.
Poor contact inthe connector ter-minals.
Defective powersource PCB.
Defective mainPCB.
Defective tonersensor.
Poor contact inthe toner sensorconnector termi-nals.
Defective devel-oper.
Defective tonerlevel detectionsensor.
Poor contact inthe toner level de-tection sensorconnector termi-nals.
Poor contact inthe humidity sen-sor PCB connec-tor terminals.
Defective externaltemperature ther-mistor.
Defective externaltemperature ther-mistor.
Defective humiditysensor PCB.
Check the connection of connectors CN17on the main PCB and CN2 on the powersource PCB, and the continuity across theconnector terminals. Repair or replace ifnecessary.
Check if the zero-crossing signal is outputfrom CN2-7 on the power source PCB. Ifnot, replace the power source PCB.
Replace the main PCB if C6400 is de-tected while CN2-7 on the power sourcePCB outputs the zero-crossing signal.
Replace the toner sensor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the developer.
Replace the toner level detection sensor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for con-tinuity within the connector cable. If none,remedy or replace the cable.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB andcheck for correct operation.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB andcheck for correct operation.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB andcheck for correct operation.
1-5-30
2BC/D
1-5-31
1-5-3 Image formation problems
(20)Image contrast is low(carrier scattering).
See page 1-5-39
(1) No image appears(entirely white).
See page 1-5-33
(2) No image appears(entirely black).
See page 1-5-33
(3) Image is too light.
See page 1-5-34
(4) Background is visible.
See page 1-5-34
(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.
See page 1-5-34
(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.
See page 1-5-35
(7) A black line appearslaterally.
See page 1-5-35
(8) One side of the copyimage is darker thanthe other.
See page 1-5-35
(9) Black dots appear onthe image.
See page 1-5-36
(10) Image is blurred.
See page 1-5-36
(11)The leading edge of theimage is consistentlymisaligned with theoriginal.
See page 1-5-36
(12)The leading edge of theimage is sporadicallymisaligned with theoriginal.
See page 1-5-37
(13)Paper creases.
See page 1-5-37
(14)Offset occurs.
See page 1-5-37
(15) Image is partly missing.
See page 1-5-38
(16)Fixing is poor.
See page 1-5-38
(17) Image is out of focus.
See page 1-5-38
(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.
See page 1-5-38
(19) Image is not square.
See page 1-5-39
2BC/D-1
1-5-32
(21)There is a regular errorbetween the centers ofthe original and copyimage when the DF isused.
See page 1-5-39
(22)There is a regular errorbetween the leadingedges of the originaland copy image whenthe DF is used.
See page 1-5-40
(24)When the duplex unit isused, the center of theoriginal image and thatof the copy image donot align.
See page 1-5-40
(25)Toner scatters at theleading edge of the im-age.
See page 1-5-40-1
(23)There is a regular errorbetween the trailingedges of the originaland copy image whenthe DF is used.
See page 1-5-40
2BC/D-1
1-5-33
(1) No image appears(entirely white).
Causes1. No transfer charging.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No transfer charging.
A. Broken transfer charger wire.
B. The connector terminals of the high voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.
C. Defective engine PCB.
D. Defective high voltage transformer PCB.
Replace the transfer charger wire.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN12-3 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenanceitem U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-7 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 isrun. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire.
B. Leaking main charger housing.
C. The connector terminals of the high voltagetransformer PCB make poor contact.
D. Defective engine PCB.
E. Defective high voltage transformer PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
A. The connector terminals of the exposurelamp make poor contact.
B. Defective inverter PCB.
(2) No image appears(entirely black).
Causes1. No main charging.2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
Replace the main charger wire.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN12-12 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenanceitem U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check if main charging takes place when CN1-12 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 isrun. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within theconnector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1-5 and 1-6 on theinverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,replace the inverter PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-34
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty or flawed transfer charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
3. Flawed drum.
4. Dirty shading plate.
(5) A white line appearslongitudinally.
Causes1. Dirty or flawed transfer charger wire.2. Foreign matter in the developing section.3. Flawed drum.4. Dirty shading plate.
(3) Image is toolight.
(4) Background is visible.
Causes1. Insufficient toner.2. Deteriorated developer.3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Insufficient toner.
2. Deteriorated developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Causes1. Deteriorated developer.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Deteriorated developer. Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If ithas reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment,replace the cartridge.
Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If ithas reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached,replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
Clean the transfer charger wire or, if it is flawed, replace it.
Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace thedeveloper.
Replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
Clean the shading plate.
2BC/D
1-5-35
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
(6) A black line appearslongitudinally.
Causes1. Dirty contact glass.2. Dirty or flawed drum.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Clean the contact glass.
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-42).
Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
Clean the scanner mirror.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty main charger wire.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
(7) A black line ap-pears laterally.
Causes1. Flawed drum.2. Dirty developing section.3. Leaking main charger housing.
(8) One side of thecopy image isdarker than theother.
Causes1. Dirty main charger wire.2. Defective exposure lamp.
Replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
Clean any part contaminated with toner or carrier in the developingsection.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
Clean the main charger wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.
Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replacethe exposure lamp (see page 1-6-21).
2BC/D
1-5-36
(11)The leading edge ofthe image is consis-tently misaligned withthe original.
Causes1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
(10) Image is blurred.
(9) Black dots appearon the image.
Causes1. Dirty or flawed drum.2. Dirty contact glass.3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Dirty or flawed drum.
2. Dirty contact glass.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
Causes1. Scanner moves erratically.2. Deformed press roller.3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scannerrails. If any, remove it.
Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-59).
Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-15).
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-42).
Clean the contact glass.
Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
2BC/D-1
1-5-38
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Misadjusted image center line. Readjust the image center line (see page 1-6-17).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line. Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-37).
3. Original placed incorrectly. Place the original correctly.
(18) Image center does notalign with the originalcenter.
(17) Image is out of fo-cus.
Causes1. Defective image scanning unit.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-30).
Causes1. Misadjusted image center line.2. Misadjusted scanner center line.3. Original placed incorrectly.
(15) Image is partly miss-ing.
Causes1. Paper damp.2. Paper creased.3. Drum condensation.4. Flawed drum.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper creased. Replace the paper.
3. Drum condensation. Clean the drum.
4. Flawed drum. Replace the drum (see page 1-6-42).
(16)Fixing is poor. Causes1. Wrong paper.2. Defective pressure springs.3. Flawed press roller.4. Proper paper type is not set.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Wrong paper. Check if the paper meets specifications.
2. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-59).
4. Proper paper type is not set. Set the paper type. (Refer to page 1-4-6.)
2BC/D
1-5-39
(19) Image is notsquare.
Causes1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.
(20)Image contrast islow (carrier scatter-ing).
Causes1. No developing bias output.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. No developing bias output.
A. Developing bias wire makes poor contact.
B. Defective engine PCB.
C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit(see page 1-6-32).
Adjust the installation position of the image scanning unit(see page 1-6-33).
Check the developing bias wire. If there are any problems, replace it.
Check if CN12-9 on the engine PCB goes low when maintenanceitem U030 is run. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check if developing bias is output when there is no problem with themain PCB while maintenance item U030 is run. If not, replace thehigh voltage transformer PCB.
(21)There is a regularerror between thecenters of theoriginal and copyimage when the DFis used.
Causes1. Misadjusted DF center line.
Check procedures/corrective measuresReadjust the DF center line (see page 1-6-69).
Causes1. Misadjusted DF center line.
2BC/D-1
1-5-40
(22)There is a regularerror between theleading edges ofthe original andcopy image whenthe DF is used.
Causes1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start
position.
Check procedures/corrective measuresReadjust the DF original scanning start position (see page 1-6-70).
Causes1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start
position.
(24)When the duplexunit is used, thecenter of theoriginal image andthat of the copyimage do not align.
Causes1. Side registration section installed incorrectly.
Check procedures/corrective measuresAdjust the installation position of the side registration section.
Causes1. Side registration section installed incorrectly.
(23)There is a regularerror between thetrailing edges of theoriginal and copyimage when the DFis used.
Causes1. Misadjusted DF original scanning end
position.
Check procedures/corrective measuresReadjust the DF original scanning end position (see page 1-6-71).
Causes1. Misadjusted DF original scanning end
position.
2BC/D-1
1-5-41
(25)Toner scatters atthe leading edge ofthe image.
Causes1. Registration cleaner brush or lower
registration cleaner soiled with paper powder.
Check procedures/corrective measuresVacuum clean the paper powder from the registration cleaner brushor lower registration cleaner .
Causes1. Registration cleaner brush or lower registra-
tion cleaner soiled with paper powder.
1-5-40-1
2BC/D-1
1-5-42
This page is intentionally left blank.
2BC/D
1-5-41
1-5-4 Electrical problems• Copier
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The machine doesnot operate whenthe main switch isturned on.
(2)The image forma-tion motor does notoperate (C2000).
(3)Paper feed motordoes not operate(C2500).
No electricity at the poweroutlet.
The power cord is notplugged in properly.
The front and/or rightcover are/is not closedcompletely.
Broken power cord.
Defective main switch.
Blown fuse in the powersource PCB.
Defective safety switch 1or 2.
Defective power sourcePCB.
Poor contact in the imageformation motor connectorterminals.
Broken image formationmotor gear.
Defective image formationmotor.
Defective engine PCB.
Poor contact in the paperfeed motor connector ter-minals.
Broken paper feed motorgear.
Defective paper feed mo-tor.
Defective engine PCB.
Measure the input voltage.
Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
Check the front and right covers.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace themain switch.
Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing andreplace the fuse.
Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none,replace the switch.
With AC present, check for 5 V DC at CN5-12 on the powersource PCB and 24 V DC at CN1-2. If none, replace the powersource PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check visually and replace the image formation motor if neces-sary.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the image formationmotor operates when CN15-A3 on the engine PCB goes low. Ifnot, replace the image formation motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN15-A3 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check visually and replace the paper feed motor if necessary.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper feed motoroperates when CN16-5 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, re-place the paper feed motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN16-5 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-42
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(4)The paper convey-ing motor does notoperate (C2550).
(5)The deck drive mo-tor does not operate(C2600).
(6)The scanner motordoes not operate.
(7)The paper convey-ing fan motor doesnot operate.
(8)The image forma-tion fan motor doesnot operate.
Poor contact in the paperconveying motor connec-tor terminals.
Broken paper conveyingmotor gear.
Defective paper conveyingmotor.
Defective engine PCB.
Poor contact in the deckdrive motor connector ter-minals.
Broken deck drive motorgear.
Defective deck drive mo-tor.
Defective engine PCB.
Poor contact in the scan-ner motor connector termi-nals.
Defective scanner motor.
Defective scanner drivePCB.
Broken paper conveyingfan motor coil.
Poor contact in the paperconveying fan motor con-nector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken image formationfan motor coil.
Poor contact in the imageformation fan motor con-nector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check visually and replace the paper conveying motor if neces-sary.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the paper conveyingmotor operates when CN15-B3 on the engine PCB goes low. Ifnot, replace the paper conveying motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN15-B3 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check visually and replace the deck drive motor if necessary.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the deck drive motoroperates when CN16-6 on the engine PCB goes low. If not, re-place the deck drive motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN16-6 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U073 and check if the scanner motor op-erates when the motor drive coil energization pulse signals areoutput at CN2-1, CN2-3, CN2-4 and CN2-6 on the scanner drivePCB. If not, replace the scanner motor.
Run maintenance item U073 and check if the scanner motor op-erates when CN1-10, CN1-11 and CN1-12 go low. If not, replacethe scanner drive PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paperconveying fan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U037 and check if CN3-B4 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the imageformation fan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U037 and check if CN14-12 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-43
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(9)The cooling fan mo-tor does not oper-ate.
(10)The fixing fan motordoes not operate.
(11)Eject fan motor 1does not operate.
(12)Eject fan motor 2does not operate.
(13)The HDD fan motordoes not operate.
(14)The power supplyfan motor does notoperate.
(15)The upper lift motordoes not operate(C1010).
(16)The lower lift motordoes not operate(C1020).
Broken cooling fan motorcoil.
Poor contact in the coolingfan motor connector termi-nals.
Broken fixing fan motorcoil.
Poor contact in the fixingfan motor connector termi-nals.
Broken eject fan motor 1coil.
Poor contact in eject fanmotor 1 connector termi-nals.
Broken eject fan motor 2coil.
Poor contact in eject fanmotor 2 connector termi-nals.
Broken HDD fan motorcoil.
Poor contact in the HDDfan motor connector termi-nals.
Broken power supply fanmotor coil.
Poor contact in the powersupply fan motor connec-tor terminals.
Broken upper lift motorcoil.
Poor contact in the upperlift motor connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken lower lift motorcoil.
Poor contact in the lowerlift motor connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the coolingfan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the fixingfan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace eject fanmotor 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace eject fanmotor 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the HDDfan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the powersupply fan motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the upperlift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN17-5 on the engine PCBright after drawer 1 is installed. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the lower liftmotor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN17-10 on the engine PCBright after drawer 2 is installed. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-44
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(17)The deck right liftmotor does not op-erate (C1100).
(18)The deck left lift mo-tor does not operate(C1110).
(19)The toner feed mo-tor does not oper-ate.
(20)The main chargercleaning motor doesnot operate.
(21)The toner agitationmotor does not op-erate.
(22)The transfer chargercleaning motor doesnot operate.
(23)The registrationclutch does not op-erate.
Broken deck right lift motorcoil.
Poor contact in the deckright lift motor connectorterminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken deck left lift motorcoil.
Poor contact in the deckleft lift motor connectorterminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken toner feed motorcoil.
Poor contact in the tonerfeed motor connector ter-minals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken main chargercleaning motor coil.
Poor contact in the maincharger cleaning motorconnector terminals.
Broken toner agitation mo-tor coil.
Poor contact in the toneragitation motor connectorterminals.
Broken transfer chargercleaning motor coil.
Poor contact in the trans-fer charger cleaning motorconnector terminals.
Broken registration clutchcoil.
Poor contact in the regis-tration clutch connectorterminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deckright lift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN8-18 on the engine PCBright after drawer 3 is installed. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deck leftlift motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if 24 V DC is output across CN8-16 on the engine PCBright after drawer 4 is installed. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the tonerfeed motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U135 and check if drive pulse signal isoutput across CN4-1 and CN4-2 on the engine PCB. If not, re-place the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the maincharger cleaning motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the toneragitation motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the transfercharger cleaning motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the registra-tion clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-A6 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-45
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(24)Feed low clutch 1does not operate.
(25)Feed high clutch 1does not operate.
(26)Feed low clutch 2does not operate.
(27)Feed high clutch 2does not operate.
(28)Feed clutch 3 doesnot operate.
(29)Feed clutch 4 doesnot operate.
(30)Feed clutch 5 doesnot operate.
Broken feed low clutch 1coil.
Poor contact in feed lowclutch 1 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed high clutch 1coil.
Poor contact in feed highclutch 1 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed low clutch 2coil.
Poor contact in feed lowclutch 2 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed high clutch 2coil.
Poor contact in feed highclutch 2 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed clutch 3 coil.
Poor contact in feed clutch3 connector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed clutch 4 coil.
Poor contact in feed clutch4 connector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feed clutch 5 coil.
Poor contact in feed clutch5 connector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed lowclutch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-A4 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed highclutch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-A1 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed lowclutch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-B1 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed highclutch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-A8 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed clutch3.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-B3 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed clutch4.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-B5 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace feed clutch5.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN18-B7 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-46
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(31)Paper feed clutch 1does not operate.
(32)Paper feed clutch 2does not operate.
(33)Paper feed clutch 3does not operate.
(34)Paper feed clutch 4does not operate.
(35)The bypass paperfeed clutch does notoperate.
(36)The duplex forward-ing clutch does notoperate.
Broken paper feed clutch 1coil.
Poor contact in paper feedclutch 1 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken paper feed clutch 2coil.
Poor contact in paper feedclutch 2 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken paper feed clutch 3coil.
Poor contact in paper feedclutch 3 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken paper feed clutch 4coil.
Poor contact in paper feedclutch 4 connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken bypass paper feedclutch coil.
Poor contact in the bypasspaper feed clutch connec-tor terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken duplex forwardingclutch coil.
Poor contact in the duplexforwarding clutch connec-tor terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN7-11 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN7-27 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 3.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN8-7 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feedclutch 4.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN26-12 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypasspaper feed clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN9-B5 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplexforwarding clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN6-11 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-47
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(37)The duplex revers-ing clutch does notoperate.
(38)The deck feedclutch does not op-erate.
(39)The bypass sole-noid does not oper-ate.
(40)The duplex ejectswitching solenoiddoes not operate.
(41)The duplex pressurerelease solenoiddoes not operate.
(42)The feedshift sole-noid does not oper-ate.
Broken duplex reversingclutch coil.
Poor contact in the duplexreversing clutch connectorterminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken deck feed clutchcoil.
Poor contact in the deckfeed clutch connector ter-minals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken bypass solenoidcoil.
Poor contact in the bypasssolenoid connector termi-nals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken duplex ejectswitching solenoid coil.
Poor contact in the duplexeject switching solenoidconnector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken duplex pressurerelease solenoid coil.
Poor contact in the duplexpressure release solenoidconnector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken feedshift solenoidcoil.
Poor contact in thefeedshift solenoid connec-tor terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplexreversing clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN6-12 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the deckfeed clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U032 and check if CN26-14 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypasssolenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN9-B3 on the en-gine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplexeject switching solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN6-7 and CN6-8 onthe engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplexpressure release solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN6-9 and CN6-10 onthe engine PCB go low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the feedshiftsolenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN3-A7 and CN3-A8on the engine PCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-48
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(43)The fixing web sole-noid does not oper-ate.
(44)The cleaning lampdoes not turn on.
(45)The exposure lampdoes not turn on.
(46)The exposure lampdoes not turn off.
(47)Fixing heater M or Sdoes not turn on(C6000).
(48)Fixing heater M or Sdoes not turn off.
(49)Main charging is notperformed (C5100).
Broken fixing web solenoidcoil.
Poor contact in the fixingweb solenoid connectorterminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Poor contact in the clean-ing lamp connector termi-nals.
Defective cleaning lamp.
Defective engine PCB.
Poor contact in the expo-sure lamp connector termi-nals.
Defective inverter PCB.
Defective scanner drivePCB.
Defective inverter PCB.
Defective scanner drivePCB.
Broken wire in fixingheater M or S.
Fixing unit thermostat trig-gered.
Dirty sensor part of thefixing unit thermistor.
Defective engine PCB.
Broken main charger wire.
Leaking main chargerhousing.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Defective high voltagetransformer PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the fixingweb solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN14-4 on the enginePCB goes low. If not, replace the engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.
If the cleaning lamp turns on when CN4-11 on the engine PCB isheld low, replace the engine PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
If the exposure lamp turn on when CN1-5 and CN1-6 on the in-verter PCB are held low, replace the inverter PCB.
If the exposure lamp turn on when CN3-1 and CN3-2 on thescanner motor PCB are held low, replace the scanner drivePCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn off with CN1-5 and CN1-6 onthe inverter PCB high, replace the inverter PCB.
If CN3-1 and CN3-2 on the scanner motor PCB are always low,replace the scanner drive PCB.
Check for continuity across each heater. If none, replace theheater (see page 1-6-55).
Check for continuity across thermostat. If none, remove thecause and replace the thermostat.
Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.
If fixing heater M/S stays on while CN2-5 and CN2-6 on the en-gine PCB go high, replace the engine PCB.
See page 1-5-33.
2BC/D
1-5-49
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(50)Transfer charging isnot performed(C5110).
(51)Separation chargingis not performed(C5110).
(52)No developing biasis output.
(53)The original size isnot detected.
(54)The original size isnot detectedcorrectly.
(55)The touch panelkeys do not work.
Broken transfer chargerwire.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.
Defective engine PCB.
Defective high voltagetransformer PCB.
Broken separation chargerwire.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.
Poor contact in the devel-oping bias wire.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCBconnector terminals.
Defective high voltagetransformer PCB.
Defective engine PCB.
Defective original detec-tion switch.
Original is not placed cor-rectly.
Poor contact in the originalsize detection sensorsconnector terminals.
Defective original size de-tection sensor or the scan-ner drive PCB.
Poor contact in the touchpanel connector terminals.
Defective touch panel oroperation unit PCB.
See page 1-5-33.
Replace the separation charger wire (see page 1-6-48).
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check the developing bias wire. If there is any problem, replaceit.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the developing bias is output when CN1-9 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U030is run. If not, replace the high voltage transformer PCB.
Check if CN12-9 on the engine PCB goes low during copying. Ifnot, replace the engine PCB.
If the level of CN5-2 on the scanner drive PCB does not changewhen the original detection switch is turned on and off, replacethe original detection switch.
Check the original and correct if necessary.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it or, if neces-sary, the scanner drive PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
If any keys do not work after the touch panel has been initial-ized, replace the touch panel or operation unit main PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-50
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(56)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in drawer 1.
(57)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in drawer 2.
(58)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in drawer 3.
(59)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent in drawer 4.
(60)The message re-questing paper to beloaded is shownwhen paper ispresent on the by-pass table.
(61)The size of paper indrawer 1 is not dis-played correctly.
Poor contact in paperswitch 1 connector termi-nals.
Defective paper switch 1.
Poor contact in paperswitch 2 connector termi-nals.
Defective paper switch 2.
Poor contact in deck paperswitch 1 connector termi-nals.
Defective deck paperswitch 1.
Poor contact in deck paperswitch 2 connector termi-nals.
Defective deck paperswitch 2.
Poor contact in the bypasspaper switch connectorterminals.
Defective bypass paperswitch.
Poor contact in the upperpaper length switch con-nector terminals.
Defective upper paperlength switch.
Poor contact in the upperpaper width switch con-nector terminals.
Defective upper paperwidth switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN7-9 on the engine PCB goes low when paper switch1 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN7-10 on the enginePCB. If not, replace paper switch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN7-25 on the engine PCB goes low when paperswitch 2 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN7-26 on the en-gine PCB. If not, replace paper switch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN8-5 on the engine PCB goes low when deck paperswitch 1 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN8-6 on the en-gine PCB. If not, replace deck paper switch 1.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN26-17 on the engine PCB goes low when deck pa-per switch 2 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN26-18 on theengine PCB. If not, replace deck paper switch 2.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN9-B8 on the engine PCB goes low when the bypasspaper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN9-B9 on theengine PCB. If not, replace the bypass paper switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN7-14 on the engine PCB goes low when the upperpaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the upper paperlength switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the levels of CN7-1, CN7-2 and CN7-3 on the enginePCB change alternately when the width guide in drawer 1 ismoved. If not, replace the upper paper width switch.
2BC/D
1-5-51
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(62)The size of paper indrawer 2 is not dis-played correctly.
(63)The size of paper onthe bypass table isnot displayed cor-rectly.
Poor contact in the lowerpaper length switch con-nector terminals.
Defective lower paperlength switch.
Poor contact in the lowerpaper width switch con-nector terminals.
Defective lower paperwidth switch.
Poor contact in the bypasspaper length switch con-nector terminals.
Defective bypass paperlength switch.
Poor contact in the bypasspaper width switch con-nector terminals.
Defective bypass paperwidth switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN7-16 on the engine PCB goes low when the lowerpaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the lower paperlength switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the levels of CN7-17, CN7-18 and CN7-19 on the en-gine PCB change alternately when the width guide in drawer 2is moved. If not, replace the lower paper width switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if CN9-A2 on the engine PCB goes low when the bypasspaper length switch is turned on. If not, replace the bypass pa-per length switch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the levels of CN9-A6, CN9-A7 and CN9-A8 on the en-gine PCB change alternately when the insert guide on the by-pass table is moved. If not, replace the bypass paper widthswitch.
2BC/D
1-5-52
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(64)A paper jam in thepaper feed, paperconveying or fixingsection is indicatedon the touch panelimmediately afterthe main switch isturned on.
(65)The message re-questing covers tobe closed is dis-played when thefront and right cov-ers are closed.
(66)Others.
A piece of paper torn fromcopy paper is caughtaround paper feed switch1/2/3/4/5/6, registrationswitch, feedshift switch oreject switch.
Defective paper feedswitch 1.
Defective paper feedswitch 2.
Defective paper feedswitch 3.
Defective paper feedswitch 4.
Defective paper feedswitch 5.
Defective paper feedswitch 6.
Defective registrationswitch.
Defective feedshift switch.
Defective eject switch.
Poor contact in the con-nector terminals of safetyswitch 1 or 2.
Defective safety switch 1or 2.
Wiring is broken, shortedor makes poor contact.
Noise.
Check and remove if any.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 1 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 2 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 3 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 4 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 5 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn paper feed switch 6 onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the registration switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch onand off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Run maintenance item U031 and turn the eject switch on and offmanually. Replace the switch if indication of the correspondingswitch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuitywhen the switch is on, replace it.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Locate the source of noise and remove.
2BC/D
1-5-53
• DF
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(1)The original feedmotor does notoperate.
(2)The original convey-ing motor does notoperate.
(3)The original feedsolenoid does notoperate.
(4)The switchbackfeedshift solenoiddoes not operate.
(5)The eject feedshiftsolenoid does notoperate.
(6)The switchbackpressure solenoiddoes not operate.
Defective original feed mo-tor coil.
The connector terminals ofthe original feed motormake poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Defective original convey-ing motor coil.
The connector terminals ofthe original conveying mo-tor make poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Defective original feed so-lenoid coil.
The connector terminals ofthe original feed solenoidmake poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Defective switchbackfeedshift solenoid coil.
The connector terminals ofthe switchback feedshiftsolenoid make poor con-tact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Defective eject feedshiftsolenoid coil.
The connector terminals ofthe eject feedshift solenoidmake poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Defective switchback pres-sure solenoid coil.
The connector terminals ofthe switchback pressuresolenoid make poor con-tact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the originalfeed motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the original feed motor coil and con-nector terminals. If good, replace the DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the originalconveying motor.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the original conveying motor coil andconnector terminals. If good, replace the DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the originalfeed solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the original feed solenoid operates when CN5-B13 orCN5-B12 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DFdriver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the switch-back feedshift solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the switchback feedshift solenoid operates when CN5-B8 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driverPCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the ejectfeedshift solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the eject feedshift solenoid operates when CN5-A7 onthe DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the switch-back pressure solenoid.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the switchback pressure solenoid operates when CN5-A2 or CN5-A3 on the DF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace theDF driver PCB.
2BC/D
1-5-54
Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
(7)The original feedclutch does notoperate.
(8)A message indicat-ing cover open isdisplayed when theDF is closed cor-rectly.
(9)An original jamswhen the mainswitch is turned on.
Defective original feedclutch coil.
The connector terminals ofthe original feed clutchmake poor contact.
Defective DF driver PCB.
The connector terminals ofDF safety switch 1 makepoor contact.
Defective DF safety switch1.
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the original feedswitch.
Defective original feedswitch.
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the original switch-back switch.
Defective original switch-back switch.
A piece of paper torn froman original is caughtaround the DF timingswitch.
Defective DF timingswitch.
The surface facing the DFtiming switch is soiled.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the originalfeed clutch.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check if the original feed clutch operates when CN5-A5 on theDF driver PCB is low. If it does, replace the DF driver PCB.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
Check for continuity across the contacts of the switch. If nonewhen the switch is on, replace DF safety switch 1.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch onand off manually. Replace the original feed switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original switchbackswitch on and off manually. Replace the original switchbackswitch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touchpanel is not displayed in reverse.
Remove any found.
Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DF timing switch onand off manually. Replace the DF timing switch if indication ofthe corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed inreverse.
Check if the projection at the center of the conveying cover thatis facing the DF timing switch is soiled with paper powder. If so,clean it.
2BC/D
1-5-55
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
1-5-5 Mechanical problems• Copier
(1)No primary paper feed.
(2)No secondary paperfeed.
(3)Skewed paper feed.
(4)The scanner does nottravel.
(5)Multiple sheets of paperare fed at one time.
(6)No refeed.
(7)Paper jams.
Check if the surfaces of the following rollersor pulleys are dirty with paper powder: for-warding pulleys, upper/lower paper feed pul-leys, upper/lower feed rollers, vertical paperconveying rollers A/B/C/D/E, feed pulleys,bypass forwarding roller and bypass upper/lower paper feed pulleys.
Check if the upper or lower paper feed pul-ley or forwarding pulley is deformed.
Electrical problem with the following electro-magnetic clutches: paper feed clutches 1/2/3/4, feed low clutches 1/2, feed highclutches 1/2, feed clutches 3/4/5, deck feedclutch and bypass paper feed clutch.
Check if the surfaces of the upper and lowerregistration rollers are dirty with paper pow-der.
Electrical problem with the registrationclutch.
Width guide in a cassette installed incor-rectly.
Deformed width guide in a cassette.
Check if a pressure spring along the paperconveying path is deformed or out of place.
Check if the scanner wire is loose.
The scanner motor malfunctions.
Check if the lower paper feed pulley is worn.
Check if the paper is curled.
Check if the surfaces of the following rollersare dirty with paper powder: duplex upper/lower registration rollers, duplex upper/lowerconveying rollers and duplex upper/lowereject rollers.
Check if the paper is excessively curled.
Deformed guides along the paper conveyingpath.
Check if the contact between the upper andlower registration rollers is correct.
Check if the contact between the upper andlower feed rollers is correct.
Check if the fixing unit upper or lower guideis deformed.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check visually and replace any deformedpulleys (see page 1-6-3).
See pages 1-5-45, 46, and 47.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
See page 1-5-44.
Check the width guide visually and corrector replace if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary .
Repair or replace.
Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-6-22).
See page 1-5-42.
Replace the lower paper feed pulley if it isworn (see page 1-6-3).
Change the paper.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Change the paper.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Repair or replace if necessary.
2BC/D
1-5-56
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(7)Paper jams.
(8)Toner drops on the pa-per conveying path.
(9)Abnormal noise isheard.
Check if the press roller is extremely dirty ordeformed.
Check if the contact between the heat rollerand its separation claws is correct.
Check if the contact between the eject rollerand pulley is correct.
The feedshift solenoid malfunctions.
Check if the contact between the feedshiftlower roller and feedshift pulley is correct.
Check if the developing unit is extremelydirty.
Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears oper-ate smoothly.
Check if the following electromagneticclutches are installed correctly: paper feedclutches 1/2/3/4, feed low clutches 1/2, feedhigh clutches 1/2, feed clutches 3/4/5, deckfeed clutch and bypass paper feed clutch.
Clean or replace the press roller.
Repair if any springs are off the separationclaws.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
See page 1-5-47.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Clean the developing unit.
Grease the bearings and gears.
Correct.
2BC/D
1-5-37
(12)The leading edge ofthe image is sporadi-cally misaligned withthe original.
Causes1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch
or paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4 installed oroperating incorrectly.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutchor paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4 installedor operating incorrectly.
Check the installation position and operation of the registrationclutch, bypass paper feed clutch and paper feed clutch 1/2/3/4. If anyof them operates incorrectly, replace it.
(14)Offset occurs.
(13)Paper creases. Causes1. Paper curled.2. Paper damp.3. Defective pressure springs.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
3. Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
Causes1. Defective cleaning blade.
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1. Defective cleaning blade. Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-52).
2BC/D
1-5-57
• DF
Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures
(1)No primary originalfeed.
(2)No secondary originalfeed.
(3)Originals jam.
The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulleys,DF original feed pulley or DF separation pul-ley are dirty with paper powder.
Check if the DF original feed pulley or theDF forwarding pulley is deformed.
Electrical problem with the following clutchor solenoid:• Original feed solenoid• Original feed clutch
The DF registration pulley and the DF regis-tration roller do not contact each other cor-rectly.
Originals outside the specifications are used.
The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulleys,DF original feed pulley or DF separation pul-ley are dirty with paper powder.
The DF original feed pulley and the DFseparation pulley do not contact each othercorrectly.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alco-hol if they are dirty.
If so, replace (see page 1-6-67).
See pages 1-5-53 and 54.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Use only originals conforming to the speci-fications.
Check and clean them with isopropyl alco-hol if they are dirty.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
2BC/D
1-6-1
1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly
(1) Precautions• Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.• When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.• Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.• Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be
seriously damaged.• Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200Sanwa MD-180CSanwa YX-360TRBeckman TECH300Beckman DM45Beckman 330*Beckman 3030*Beckman DM850*Fluke 8060A*Arlec DMM1050Arlec YF1030C* Capable of measuring RMS values.
• Prepare the following as test originals: NTC (new test chart)
2BC/D
1-6-2
(2) Running a maintenance item
Enter “10871087” using the numeric keys.
Enter “001” using the cursor up/down keys or numeric keys
and press the start key.
Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up/down keys
or numeric keys.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Press the start key.
Start
End
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is selected.
Maintenance mode is exited.
Repeat the same maintenance item?
Run another maintenance item?
No
No
Yes
Yes
2BC/D
1-6-3
1-6-2 Paper feed section
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, upper paper feed and lower paper feed pulleysFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys.
(1-1) Detaching and refitting the pulleys of drawers 1, 2, and 3
Procedure• Removing the primary paper feed unit
1. Remove the screw holding the developingduct cover and disconnect the connector, andthen remove the cover.
2. Remove the six screws holding the middleright cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-1
Figure 1-6-2
Figure 1-6-3
Connector
Developing duct cover
Middle right cover
Right cover
3. Lift the right cover and remove it from themain unit of the machine.
2BC/D
1-6-4
4. Remove the screw holding the interlock coverand then the cover (only when detaching andrefitting the primary paper feed unit of drawer1).
Figure 1-6-4
Figure 1-6-5
Figure 1-6-6
Interlock cover
Supportplate
Confluence guide
Primary paper feed unit
Connector
5. Remove the screw and then remove thesupport plate and the confluence guide (onlywhen detaching and refitting the primarypaper feed unit of drawer 1 or 2).
6. Pull out the relevant drawer.
7. Remove the three screws and the 8-pinconnector and then remove the primary paperfeed unit from the right side of the main unitof the machine.
2BC/D
1-6-5
• Removing the forwarding pulley8. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the
direction of the arrow, and then remove itfrom the primary paper feed unit.
Figure 1-6-7
Figure 1-6-8
Figure 1-6-9
9. Remove the stop ring and pull the forwardingpulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, andthen remove the forwarding pulley.
* When fitting the forwarding pulley, ensure thatthe gear section engages.
• Removing the upper paper feed pulley10. Remove the two screws and then remove the
paper feed clutch support plate and thebushing.
Forwarding pulley retainer
Bushing
Paper feed clutch support plate
Stop ringForwarding pulley shaft
Forwarding pulley
2BC/D
1-6-6
11. Remove the two stop rings and disconnectthe connecter of the paper feed clutch.
12. Pull the upper paper feed shaft in thedirection of the arrow, and then remove theupper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the upper paper feed pulley, putthe end face with a silver ring to the front sideof the machine.
* When fitting the upper paper feed shaft,ensure that the notch of the paper feed clutchis inserted into the detent.
Figure 1-6-10
Figure 1-6-11
• Removing the lower paper feed pulley13. Remove the stop ring on the rear of the
primary paper feed unit.14. Pull the lower paper feed shaft in the direction
of the arrow, and then remove the lowerpaper feed pulley.
15. Refit all the removed parts.
Stop rings Upper paper feed shaft
Upper paper feed pulley Connector
Lower paper feed pulley Stop ring
Lower paper feed shaft
2BC/D
1-6-7
(1-2) Detaching and refitting the pulley of drawer 4
Procedure• Removing the forwarding pulley
1. Pull out drawers 3 and 4 and then pull out thedeck conveying unit.
Figure 1-6-12
Figure 1-6-13
Figure 1-6-14
3. Remove the stop ring, pull the forwardingpulley shaft in the direction of the arrow, andthen remove the forwarding pulley.
* When fitting the forwarding pulley, ensure thatthe gear section engages.
Deck conveying unit
Stop ringForwarding pulley shaft
Forwarding pulley
2. Remove the pin, raise the forwarding pulleyretainer in the direction of the arrow, and thenremove it from the deck conveying unit.
Forwarding pulley retainer
Pin
2BC/D
1-6-8
• Removing the upper paper feed pulley4. Remove the four screws holding the deck
conveying unit and then the unit from themachine.
5. Remove the stop ring and then the gear.
6. Remove the two stop rings and disconnectthe connector, and then remove the wire ofthe paper feed clutch from the wire saddle.
7. Pull the upper paper feed shaft in thedirection of the arrow, and then remove theupper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the upper paper feed pulley, putthe end face with a silver ring to the front sideof the machine.
* When fitting the upper paper feed shaft,ensure that the notch of the paper feed clutchis inserted into the detent.
Figure 1-6-15
Figure 1-6-16
Figure 1-6-17
Deck conveying unit
Gear
Stop ring
Wire saddle
ConnectorUpper paper feed shaft
Stop rings
Upper paper feed pulley
2BC/D
1-6-9
• Removing the lower paper feed pulley8. Remove the two springs and tilt the lower
paper feed pulley unit down in the direction ofthe arrow.
* Remove the springs from the side of theguide plate.
Figure 1-6-18
Figure 1-6-19
9. Remove the stop ring and pull the lowerpaper feed pulley shaft in the direction of thearrow, and then remove the lower paper feedpulley.
10. Refit all the removed parts.
Springs
Lower paper feed pulley unit
Lower paper feed shaft
Stop ringLower paper feed pulley
2BC/D
1-6-10
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleysFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the bypass forwarding, upper and lower paper feed pulleys.
Procedure• Removing the bypass paper feed unit 1. Remove the developing duct cover and
middle right cover (see page 1-6-3).2. Raise the bypass tray in the direction of the
arrow and lift it.3. Disconnect the connectors of the bypass tray
and then remove the tray.
4. Remove the five screws holding the bypasspaper feed unit and disconnect the connecter,and then the unit.
• Removing the bypass forwarding pulley5. Remove the stop ring form the bypass
forwarding pulley retainer.6. Pull the bypass forwarding pulley shaft in the
direction of the arrow, and then remove thebypass forwarding pulley.
Figure 1-6-20
Figure 1-6-21
Figure 1-6-22
Bypass tray
Connector
Bypass paper feed unit
Connector
ScrewsScrews
Stop ring Bypass forwarding pulley shaft
Bypass forwarding pulley
2BC/D
1-6-11
Figure 1-6-23
Figure 1-6-24
Figure 1-6-25
• Removing the bypass upper paper feed pulley7. Remove the spring, stop ring and bushing
from the bypass forwarding pulley retainer.8. Disconnect the connector of the bypass
paper feed clutch and then remove the wirefrom the edging and the wire saddle.
9. While pressing the bypass solenoid lever,remove the bypass forwarding pulley retainer.
10. Remove the stop ring, gear, spring pin andbushing on the front of the bypass paper feedunit.
11. Pull the bypass paper feed shaft in thedirection of the arrow, and then remove thebushing and bypass upper paper feed pulley.
* When fitting the bypass upper paper feedpulley, put the blue end face to the front sideof the machine.
Spring pin
Gear
Bushing
Stop ring
Bypass upper paper feed pulley
Bushing
Bypass paper feed shaft
Spring
Bushing
Stop ring
Bypass solenoid lever Bypass forwarding pulley retainer
Connector
2BC/D
1-6-12
Figure 1-6-26
Figure 1-6-27
• Removing the bypass lower paper feed pulley12. Remove the two screws from the bypass
paper feed unit and then remove the bypasslower paper feed pulley unit.
13. Remove the two stop rings and pull the jointshaft in the direction of the arrow, and thenremove the bypass lower paper feed pulley.
14. Refit all the removed parts.
Joint shaft
Stop ringBypass lower paper feed pulley
Bypass lower paper feed pulley unit
Stop ring
Screws
Bypass paper feed unit
2BC/D
1-6-13
Figure 1-6-28
Figure 1-6-29
(3) Detaching and refitting the registration cleaner brushFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the registration cleaner brush.
Procedure1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
44).2. Remove the two screws and then remove the
registration cleaner brush.3. Replace the registration cleaner brush and
refit all the removed parts.
(4) Detaching and refitting the lower registration cleanerFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the lower registration cleaner.
Procedure1. Open the front cover, tilt the paper conveying
unit release lever down, and pull out thepaper conveying unit.
2. Remove the screw and pull the lowerregistration cleaner toward you to remove it.
3. Replace the lower registration cleaner andrefit all the removed parts.
Registration cleaner brush
Lower registration cleaner
2BC/D
1-6-14
(5) Detaching and refitting the ozone filterFollow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter.
Procedure1. Remove the screw holding the conveying duct
cover and then the cover.2. Remove the two screws holding the middle
rear C cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-30
Figure 1-6-31
3. Replace the ozone filter and refit all theremoved parts.
Middle rear C coverConveying duct cover
ozone filter
ozone filter
Middle rear C cover
2BC/D-1
1-6-15
(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacementPerform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-32
U034U066
(P. 1-6-36)U071
(P. 1-6-70)
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “034” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Is the leading edge registration correct?
Press the start key
The new setting is stored
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
Select the items to be adjusted.
For output example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For output example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
RCL ON: Leading edge registrationRCL ON (DUP) : Leading edge registration for duplex copying (second face)
Setting range (initial setting)RCL ON: –30.0 – +30.0 (5)RCL ON (DUP): –30.0 – +30.0 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
Press the start key to output a test pattern.
Correct image Output example 1
Output example 2
Leading edge registration (20 ± 1 mm)
2BC/D-1
1-6-16
(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leadingedge of the original during memory copying.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-33
U053(P. 1-4-20)
U066(P. 1-6-36)
U065(P. 1-6-34, 35)
U407U034
(P. 1-6-15)
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “407” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key and make a test copy.
Is the leading edge registration correct?
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Setting range: –2.0 – +2.0Initilal setting: 0Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.1 mm.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
For copy example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.
Original Copy example 1
Copyexample 2
2BC/D-1
1-6-17
(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printingMake the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original whenpaper is fed from the drawer.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenancemode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-34
U034U067
(P. 1-6-37)U072
(P. 1-6-69)
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “034” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key to output a test pattern.
Is the image correct?
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
For output example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For output example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.
Setting range (initial setting)LSU OUT: –5.0 – +5.0 (–2.8)LSU OUT (DUP): –2.0 – +2.0 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.1 mm.
LSU OUT: Center line adjustment dataLSU OUT (DUP): Center line adjustment data for
duplex copying (second face)Select the item to be adjusted.
Center line of printing
Correct image Output example 1
Output example 2
2BC/D-1
1-6-18
(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printingMake the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
CautionCheck the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments inmaintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-35
U402U403
(P. 1-6-38)U404
(P. 1-6-72)
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “402” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the start key to output a test pattern using A3/11" × 17" paper.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Setting range (initial setting)LEAD: 0 – +10.0 (3.5)A: –5.0 – +10.0 (2.5)C: –5.0 – +10.0 (2.5)TRAIL: –5.0 – +10.0 (6.4)TRAIL (DUP): –5.0 – +10.0 (6.4)Changing the value by 1 moves the margin by 0.1 mm for all.
Select the items to be adjusted.
Are the margins correct?
Change the setting. Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin winder. Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower.
Press the interrupt key.
LEAD: Printer leading edge marginA: Printer left marginC: Printer right marginTRAIL: Printer trailing edge margin TRAIL (DUP): Printer trailing edge margin for
duplex copying (second face)
Yes
No
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
Proceed to another mode?
Ejection direction(reference)
Printer trailing edge margin for duplex copying (6 ± 2.5 mm)
Printer leading edge margin(6 ± 2.5 mm)
Printer left margin
(6 ± 2.0 mm)
Printer right margin(6 ± 2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin(6 ± 2.5 mm)
Duplex copy mode (second face, A3/11" × 17")
Normal copy mode (A3/11" × 17")
2BC/D-1
1-6-19
(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the registration rollerMake the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-36
End
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “051” using the numeric keys.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key to make a test copy.
Decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Setting range (initial setting)DECK DATA : –30 – +40 (–10)DECK DATA2 : –30 – +40 (3)BYPASS DATA : –30 – +40 (25)DUPLEX DATA : –30 – +40 (18)
Changing the value by 1 moves the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.
The new setting is stored.
Select the item to be adjusted.
• Amount of slack in the paper at the registration rollerDECK DATA : Drawer 1DECK DATA2 : Drawer 2BYPASS DATA : Bypass trayDUPLEX DATA : Duplex copying (second face)
Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly (copy
example 1)?
Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
Increase the value using the cursor up key.
Press the start key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Original Copyexample 1
Copyexample 2
2BC/D-1
1-6-20
(6-6) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper at the vertical conveyingMake the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper isZ-folded.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-37
End
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
× ×
× ×
Enter “054” using the numeric keys.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Press the start key.
Select the item to be adjusted.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key to make a test copy.
Decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Setting range (initial setting)DUP LOOP ADJ : 0 – +200 (70)DUP LOOP ADJ2 : 0 – +200 (70)BYP LOOP ADJ : 0 – +200 (0)
Changing the value by 1 moves the amount of slack by 1.0 mm.The greater the value, the larger the amount of slack; the smaller the value, the smaller the amount of slack.
The new setting is stored.
Is the leading edge of the image missing or varying randomly (copy
example 1)?
Is the copy paper Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
Increase the value using the cursor up key.
Press the start key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
• Amount of slack in the paper of the vertical conveyingDUP LOOP ADJ : Duplex paper feeding (second face) of A3, A5, 11" 17", and 51/2" 81/2" sizesDUP LOOP ADJ2 : Duplex paper feeding (second face) ofB4, A4, B5, 81/2" 14", and 11" 81/2" sizesBYP LOOP ADJ : Paper feeding through the bypass
Original Copyexample 1
Copyexample 2
2BC/D
1-6-21
1-6-3 Optical section
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lampFollow the procedure below to replace the exposure lamp.
Procedure1. Open the DF.2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
right cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-38
Figure 1-6-39
3. While taking care not to touch the shadingplate or rear face of the contact glass, removethe contact glass.
4. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts at thecenter of the machine.
* When moving the mirror 1 frame, do nottouch the exposure lamp nor inverter PCB.
5. Disconnect the exposure lamp connectorfrom the inverter PCB.
6. Remove the two screws holding the exposurelamp and then the lamp.
7. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all theremoved parts.
Exposure lamp
Connector
Upper right cover
2BC/D
1-6-22
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wiresFollow the procedure below when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
CautionAfter replacing the scanner wire, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform theadjustments (see pages 1-6-31 to 38).
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
Procedure1. Remove the DF.2. Remove the contact glass.
Figure 1-6-40
Figure 1-6-41
3. Remove the four screws holding the upperrear cover and then the cover.
4. Remove the two screws holding the upper leftcover and then the cover.
DF
Upper rear cover
Upper left cover
2BC/D
1-6-23
Figure 1-6-42
Figure 1-6-43
Figure 1-6-44
5. Remove the two screws holding the slit glassand then the glass.
6. Open the front cover and pull out the imageformation unit.
7. Remove four screws holding the operationunit lower inner cover and then the cover.
8. Remove the five screws and disconnect thethree connectors, and then remove theoperation unit.
Operation unit lower inner cover
Slit glass
ConnectorConnectors
Operation unit
2BC/D
1-6-24
9. Remove the four screws holding the mirror 1upper frame and then the frame.
10. Remove the two screws holding each of thefront and rear wire retainers and then theretainers from the mirror 1 lower frame.
11. Remove the mirror 1 lower frame from thescanner unit.
12. Remove the round terminal of the scannerwire from the scanner wire spring on the leftside of the scanner unit.
13. Remove the scanner wire.
Figure 1-6-45
Figure 1-6-46
Front wire retainerRear wire retainer
Mirror 1 upper frame
Mirror 1 lower frame
Scanner wire springs
2BC/D
1-6-25
(2-2) Refitting the scanner wires
CautionWhen fitting the scanner wires, be sure to use those specified below.Machine front: 2AC12170Machine rear: 2AC12420 (black)
Refitting requires the following tool: Frame securing tool (P/N: 2AC68230)
Procedure• At the machine rear
1. Insert the two frame securing tools into thepositioning holes at the front and rear of thescanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame inposition.
2. Secure the two frame securing tools at themachine front and rear using the two screwsfor each.
3. Hook the round terminal on one end of thescanner wire onto the left catch on the insideof the scanner unit. ................................. 1
4. Loop the scanner wire around the rear groovein the scanner wire pulley on the mirror 2frame, winding from below to above. ....... 2
5. Loop the scanner wire around the groove inthe scanner wire pulley at the machine right,winding from above to below. .................. 3
6. Wind the scanner wire around the scannerwire drum four turns from the rear toward thehole in the drum.
7. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wireinto the hole in the scanner wire drum.
8. Wind the scanner wire a further five turnsfrom the locating ball toward the machinefront.
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove inthe scanner wire pulley at the machine left,winding from below to above. .................. 4
10. Loop the scanner wire around the frontgroove in the scanner wire pulley on themirror 2 frame, winding from below to above.................................................................. 5
11. Run the scanner wire around the wire guideat the machine left. .................................. 6
12. Hook the round terminal onto the scannerwire spring. .............................................. 7
13. Hook the other end of the scanner wire springonto the catch at the machine left.
14. Repeat steps 2 to 13 for the scanner wire atthe machine front.
15. Remove the two screws from each of theframe securing tools and then the tools.
16. Move the scanner from side to side tocorrectly locate the wire in position.
Figure 1-6-47
Figure 1-6-48
Scanner wire
Locating ball Rear
Front
4 turns5 turns
Rear groove
Scanner wire spring
Wire guideFront groove
Scanner wire drum
Catch
Scanner wire pulley
Round terminal
Round terminal
(Machine left) (Machine right)
2BC/D
1-6-26
17. Loosen the two screws securing the mirror 2frame.
18. Insert the mirror 1 lower frame into thescanner unit and seat it on the positioningholes.
19. Insert the two frame securing tools into thepositioning holes in the front and rear of thescanner unit and determine the positions ofthe mirror 1 lower frame and mirror 2 frame.
20. While holding the scanner wire on the mirror1 lower frame, secure the wire retainers at thefront and rear of the mirror 1 lower frameusing the two screws for each.
21. Retighten the two screws securing the mirror2 frame.
22. Remove the two screws holding each of thetwo frame securing tools and then the tools.
23. Refit all the removed parts.
Figure 1-6-49
Wire retainer
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame
Mirror 1 lower frame
Frame securing tool
Mirror 2 frame Wire retainer
Mirror 1 lower frame
2BC/D
1-6-27
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unitFollow the procedure below to replace the laser scanner unit.
CautionAfter replacing the laser scanner unit, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, proceed to“(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference)”.
Procedure1. Remove the DF, upper rear cover, middle rear
C cover, developing duct cover, upper rightcover, upper left cover and contact glass.
2. Remove the operation unit (see page 1-6-22).3. Remove the three screws and then remove
the right scanner reinforcement.
4. Disconnect the two connectors CN14 andCN15 on the main PCB.
5. Disconnect the two connectors CN1 and CN6on the scanner drive PCB.
Figure 1-6-50
Figure 1-6-51
Figure 1-6-52
Right scannerreinforcement
CN14 CN15
Main PCB
CN6 Scanner drive PCB
CN1
2BC/D
1-6-28
6. Remove the wire saddle located at the side ofthe scanner drive PCB from the scanner unit.
7. Remove the three screws holding the DFconnector mount and then the mount.
8. Remove the four screws with rubber mountsand then the scanner unit.
Figure 1-6-53
Figure 1-6-54
Figure 1-6-55
Wire saddle
DF connector mount
Scanner unit
2BC/D
1-6-29
Figure 1-6-56
9. Remove the two screws holding the LSUadjuster mount and then the mount.
10. Remove the three screws and disconnect thethree connectors, and then the laser scannerunit.
11. Replace the laser scanner unit and refit allthe removed parts.
Connectors
Connector
Laser scanner unit
LSU adjuster mount
2BC/D
1-6-30
(4) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU.
CautionAfter replacing the ISU, make a test copy and check the copy image. If the image is incorrect, perform the adjustments(see pages 1-6-31 to 38).
ISU installation requires the following tools:Two positioning pins (P/N 1856812)
Procedure• Detaching the ISU1. Remove the contact glass.2. Remove the nine screws holding the ISU
cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-57
Figure 1-6-58
Figure 1-6-59
3. Remove the four screws and disconnect thetwo connectors, and then remove the ISU.
4. Replace the ISU.
• Refitting the ISU5. Secure the ISU using the two positioning
pins.6. Refit the ISU using four screws.7. Remove the two positioning pins.8. Connect the two connectors.9. Refit all the removed parts.
ISU cover
Connectors
ISU
Connectors
ISUPositioning pin
Positioning pin
2BC/D
1-6-31
(5) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness is not obtained).
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot-LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the originalfor the adjustment.Perform adjustment of straightness when proper straightness cannot be obtained even if you perform “Adjusting theregistration/vertical conveying slack amount (P.1-6-19, 20)” first and then check the straightness of copy images.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-60
Figure 1-6-61
Mirror 2 frame
Screws
Yes
No
Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.
Start
Remove the contact glass. Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame.For copy example 1, move the frame in the direction of the white arrow ( ).For copy example 2, move the frame in the direction of the black arrow ( ).
End
Is the image correct?
Place the original on the contact glass.
Retighten the two screws and refit the contact glass.
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
2BC/D
1-6-32
Figure 1-6-62
Figure 1-6-63
(6) Adjusting scanner image lateral squareness (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral squareness not obtained).
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, open the front cover and pull out the image formation unit, and remove theoperation unit lower inner cover.Perform “(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit” first and check for lateral squareness of the copy image. Ifsquareness is not obtained, perform “(6-2) Adjusting the position of ISU”.
(6-1) Adjusting the position of the laser scanner unit
Procedure
Retighten the three screws and refit the contact glass.
Yes
No
Press the start key and make a copy at 100% magnification.
Start
End
Is the image correct?
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “089” using the numeric keys.
Press the interrupt key.
Select “1dot-LINE”.
Press the start key.
Remove the contact glass. Loosen the three screws and adjust the position of the laser scanner unit by rotating the LSU adjustment shaft from the machine front using a straight screwdriver.
For output example 1, rotate the LSU adjustment shaft in the direction of the white arrow ( ).For output example 2, rotate the LSU adjustment shaft in the direction of the black arrow ( ).Press the stop/clear key to
exit maintenance mode.
Correct image Copy example 1
Copy example 2
LSU adjustment shaft
LSU adjustment shaft
2BC/D
1-6-33
Figure 1-6-64
Figure 1-6-65
(6-2) Adjusting the position of the ISU
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, output a 1 dot-LINE PG pattern in maintenance item U089 to use as the originalfor the adjustment.
Procedure
Refit the contact glass.
Remove the contact glass and adjust the lateral squareness of the ISU by rotating the pin.
For copy example 1, rotate the pin in the direction of the black arrow ( ).For copy example 2, rotate the pin in the direction of the white arrow ( ).Yes
No
Press the start key and make a test copy at 100% magnification.
Start
End
Is the image correct?
Place the original on the contact glass.
Correct image Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Pin
2BC/D
1-6-34
Figure 1-6-66
(7) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.Also, perform “(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction” (page 1-6-35) and “(10)Adjusting the scanner center line” (page 1-6-37) after this adjustment.
Procedure
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “065” using the numeric keys.
Yes
No
Start
End
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: –6Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image wider, and decreasing it makes the image narrower.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Select “MAIN SCAN ADJ” (main scanning direction).
Press the start key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
U070(P. 1-6-68)
U053(P. 1-4-20)
U065 (main scanning
direction)
U065 (auxiliary scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-35)
Original Copyexample
Copyexample 2
2BC/D
1-6-35
Figure 1-6-67
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning directionPerform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
U053(P. 1-4-20)
U070(P. 1-6-68)
U065 (auxiliary scanning
direction)
U065 (main scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-34)
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “065” using the numeric keys.
Yes
No
Start
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: 0Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image longer, and decreasing it make the image shorter.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the start key.
Select “SUB SCAN ADJ” (auxiliary scanning direction).
End
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Original Copyexample 1
Copyexample 2
2BC/D
1-6-36
(9) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registrationPerform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-68
Is the scanner leading edge registration
correct?
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “066” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
For copy example 1, decrease the value using the cursor down key.For copy example 2, increase the value using the cursor up key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Setting range (initial setting)ADJUST DATA: –20 – +20 (–10)ADJUST DATA2: –20 – +20 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.17 mm.
Select the item to be adjusted.
End
ADJUST DATA: Scanner leading edge registrationADJUST DATA2: Scanner leading edge registration for rotate copying
U034(P. 1-6-15)
U066U071
(P. 1-6-70)
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Scanner leading edge registration
2BC/D
1-6-37
Figure 1-6-69
(10) Adjusting the scanner center linePerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
U034(P. 1-6-17)
U072(P. 1-6-69)
U067
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “067” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Select the item to be adjusted.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
Is the scanner center line correct?
Press the start key.
The new settingis stored.
Setting range (initial setting)ADJUST DATA: –39 – +39 ( –30)ADJUST DATA2: –7 – +7 (0)Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.17 mm.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
ADJUST DATA: Scanner center line adjustment dataADJUST DATA2: Scanner center line adjustment data for rotate copying
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Scanner center line
2BC/D-1
1-6-38
Figure 1-6-70
(11) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glassPerform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
U402(P. 1-6-18)
U404(P. 1-6-72)
U403
Change the setting.Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin wider.Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower.Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “403” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the start key to make a test copy.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Setting range (initial setting)Scanner left margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)Scanner leading edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)Scanner right margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (4.0)
Changing the value by one moves the margin by 0.1 mm for all.
Select the item to be adjusted.
Are the margins correct?
Press the interrupt key.
A MARGIN: Scanner left marginB MARGIN: Scanner leading edge marginC MARGIN: Scanner right marginD MARGIN: Scanner trailing edge margin
Yes
No
Proceed to another mode?
End
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Scanner leading edge margin (3 ± 1.5 mm)
Scannerleft margin
(2 ± 1.0 mm)
Scanner right margin(2 ± 1.0 mm)
Ejection direction(reference)
Scanner trailing edge margin(2 ± 1.0 mm)
2BC/D
1-6-39
Figure 1-6-71
Figure 1-6-72
1-6-4 Main charging section
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wire and main charger gridFollow the procedure below when the charger wire or main charger grid is broken or to be replaced.
Precautions• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire.• The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the charger housing.• The cut end of the charger wire must not protrude more than 2 mm from under the charger wire retainer pin.• Use a clean, undamaged tungsten charger wire.• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.• Clean the main charger shield when replacing the charger wire.
* Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the main charger shield.
Procedure1. Open the front cover and pull out the image
formation unit (see page 1-6-44).2. Disconnect the two 2-pin connectors for the
main charger cleaning motor and cleaninglamp.
3. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to loosen the pinand remove the main charger unit from theimage formation unit.
4. Remove the screw holding the main chargergrid and then the grid.
5. Remove the grid wire cleaning pad and maincharger wire cleaning pad (see page 1-6-41).
Main charger unit2-pin connector
Pin
2-pin connector
Main charger grid
2BC/D
1-6-40
Figure 1-6-73
6. Remove the charger retainer pin and the charger spring, then remove the charger wire.7. Wind the new tungsten wire at 4 and 6 turns around one end of the charger spring and trim the end of the wire.* The length of the twists and the cut wire must be less than 2 mm.
8. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the charger terminal of the main charger rear housing, then pass thewire through the notches of the main charger rear housing as shown in the figure.
9. Hook the charger wire on the pulley of the main charger front housing as shown in the figure.10. Pass the wire through the notch of the main charger rear housing.11. Pass the charger wire through the V cut part of the charger retainer pin.12. Pull the charger wire so that the length of the charger spring is 14 and 16 mm, then insert the charger retainer pin
into the projection of the main charger rear housing and fix the charger wire.13. Cut off the excess wire under the charger retainer pin so less than 2 mm protrudes.14. Refit all the removed parts.
Charger spring
V cut
Charger retainer pin
Charger wire
Main charger rear housing
Charger retainer pin
Charger terminal14 – 16 mm
Notches
Notches
Charger spring
Main chargerfront housing Pulley
2BC/D
1-6-41
Figure 1-6-74
(2) Detaching and refitting the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning padFollow the procedure below to replace the grid wire cleaning pad and main charger wire cleaning pad.
Procedure1. Remove the main charger grid (see page 1-6-
39).2. Open the hinge of the grid wire cleaning pad
in the direction of the arrow 1 to removefrom pin, then remove the grid wire cleaningpad.
3. Remove the two claws each (sectionsindicated by round marks in the figure), thenremove the main charger wire cleaning pads.
4. Refit all the removed parts.
Grid wire cleaning pad
Pin
Hinge
Hinge
Charger wire cleaning pads
2BC/D
1-6-42
1-6-5 Drum section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drumFollow the procedure below to replace the drum.
Cautions• Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum.• Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
Procedure1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
44).2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-6-
39).3. Loosen the blade securing pin, slide the
blade release lever in the direction indicatedby the arrow and tighten the blade securingpin.
4. Remove the one screw each from the drumfront and rear retainers and then the drumfrom the image formation unit.
Figure 1-6-75
Figure 1-6-76
Blade release lever
Blade securing pin
Drum front retainer Drum rear retainer
Drum
2BC/D
1-6-43
5. Remove the drum front and rear retainersfrom the drum. Replace the drum.
* When installing the drum, orient correctly withthe thinner end of the drum flange shaft at themachine front and the thicker end at themachine rear.
6. Refit all the removed parts.7. Enter the maintenance mode and run the
following modes.U110: Clearing the drum count valueU111: Clearing the drum drive timeU160: Applying toner to the cleaning blade
8. Pull out the image formation unit, return theblade release lever to its original position, andput the cleaning blade to the drum.
Figure 1-6-77
Drum rear retainer
Drum front retainer
Drum
2BC/D
1-6-44
1-6-6 Developing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unitFollow the procedure below to check, clean or replace the developing unit.
Procedure1. Open the front cover.2. Remove the screw holding the image
formation left cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-78
Figure 1-6-79
3. Remove the three screws and disconnect theconnector, tilt the paper conveying unitrelease lever down, and then pull out theimage formation unit.
4. Remove the two screws and open the imageformation rail in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 1-6-80
Paper conveying release lever
ConnectorImage formation unit
Image formation rail
Image formation left cover
2BC/D-1
1-6-45
5. Disconnect the two connectors.6. Raise the shutter a little and slide it toward
the front side of the machine.7. Turn the sub toner hopper to the right of the
machine.
Figure 1-6-81
Figure 1-6-82
8. Remove the developing unit from the imageformation unit.
9. Check, clean or replace the developing unitand refit all the removed parts.
* When refitting the image formation unit, besure to reconnect the connector.
Connector Sub toner hopper
Connector
Shutter
Developing unit
2BC/D-1
1-6-46
(2) Detaching and refitting the developing unit upper sealFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the developing unit upper seal.
Procedure1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
44).2. Remove the two screws holding the
developing unit upper seal and then the seal.3. Clean or replace the developing unit upper
seal and refit all the removed parts.* When attaching the developing unit upper
seal, fit both ends of the seal (round portions)into the grooves of the developer housing.
Figure 1-6-83
(3) Adjusting the position of the magnetic brush (developing roller) (reference)Perform the following adjustment if the image is abnormally dark or light.• Before starting this adjustment, the correct amount of developer is present.
Procedure1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
44). 2. Loosen the hexagonal socket head screw on
the front of developing sleeve using ahexagonal wrench.
3. Turn the developing roller shaft using astraight screwdriver and referring to a scaleuntil the distance between the top of themagnetic brush and the outside of thedeveloping unit housing is 15 mm (reference).
4. Tighten the hexagonal socket head screw tosecure the developing roller shaft.
5. Refit all the removed parts. 6. After adjustment, make a test copy to check
for performance.
Figure 1-6-84
Developing unit upper seal
Hexagonal sockethead screw
Developing roller shaft
A
A
A: 15 mm
Magnetic brush
2BC/D
1-6-47
(4) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference)Perform the following adjustment if carrier or background appears on the copy image.
Procedure1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-6-
44).2. Remove the two screws holding the
developing unit upper seal and then the seal(see page 1-6-46).
3. Measure the distance between thedeveloping roller and the doctor blade with athickness gauge as shown in Figure, andadjust the doctor blade until the correctdistances are obtained at the center and endsof the developing unit housing; the 0.50 mmgauge should go into the gap and the 0.55mm one should not.
* The smaller the distance, the lighter theimage; the larger the distance, the darker theimage.
4. Refit all the removed parts. 5. After adjustment, make a test copy to check
for performance.
Figure 1-6-85
(5) Detaching and refitting the developing duct filterFollow the procedure below to replace the developing duct filter.
Procedure1. Remove the screw and disconnect the
connector, and then remove the developingduct cover.
2. Replace the developing duct filter and refit allthe removed parts.
Figure 1-6-86
Adjustment screw Adjustment screw Adjustment screw
Developingduct filter
2BC/D-1
1-6-48
1-6-7 Transfer and separation section
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger wires and cleaning padsFollow the procedure below when the charger wires and cleaning pads is broken or to be replaced.
Precautions• Carry out replacement after running maintenance item U923 (Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning counter)
to clear the counter.• Use the specified tungsten wire for the charger wire.• The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude from the charger housing.• The cut end of the charger wire must not protrude from under the charger wire retainer pin.• Use a clean, undamaged tungsten charger wire.• Keep the charger wire taut by stretching the charger spring.• Clean the transfer charger shield when replacing the charger wire.
* Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol and thinner to clean the transfer charger shield.
Procedure1. Open the front cover, tilt the paper conveying
unit release lever down, and pull out thepaper conveying unit.
2. Remove the connector, widen theengagement portions a little, and remove thetransfer unit from the paper conveying unit.
Figure 1-6-87
Transfer charger unit Engagement portions
Engagement portions
Connector
2BC/D-1
1-6-49
3. Remove the transfer charger front and rear lids. 4. Remove the separation guide. 5. Replace the transfer charger cleaning pad and separation charger cleaning pad. 6. Remove the charger wire retainer pins, charger springs and then the charger wires.
Figure 1-6-88
Figure 1-6-89
7. Wind one end of the new wire at lease five turns around the end of the charger spring.8. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the catch on the transfer charger terminal on the rear of the transfer
charger housing.9. Pass the charger wire through the notches in the front and rear of the transfer charger housing, and stretch it.
10. Insert the charger wire under the charger wire retainer pin into the hole at the front of the transfer charger housing.* The charger wire must be adjusted so that the charger spring stretches to 12.5 ± 1.5 mm.* Cut off the excess wire under the charger wire retainer pin.
11. Refit all removed parts.
Transfer charger front housing
Not more than 2 mm
12.5 ± 1.5 mm
Not more than 2 mmNot more than 1 mm
Charger spring
Charger wire
Charger wire retainer pin
Transfer charger rear housing
Transfer charger terminal
Transfer charger terminal
Separation guide
Transfercharger rear lid
Transfer charger front lid
Transfer charger cleaning pad
Separation charger cleaning pad
Charger pins
Charger wires
Chargersprings
2BC/D
1-6-50
Figure 1-6-90
Figure 1-6-91
Figure 1-6-92
1-6-8 Cleaning section
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw and cleaning lower sealFollow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claw and cleaning lower seal.
Procedure1. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-42).2. Remove the four screws and disconnect the
connector of the cleaning earth wire, and thenremove the cleaning unit.
3. Remove the two screws holding each of thedrum separation claw units and then theunits.
4. Remove the pulley, spring and drumseparation claw from the drum separationclaw unit.
Drum separation claw units
pulley
Spring
Drum separation claw
Cleaning unit
Cleaning earth wire
2BC/D
1-6-51
Figure 1-6-93
5. Remove the two screws holding the cleaninglower seal and then the seal.
* When removing the cleaning lower seal, takecare not to lose the M3 retainer located onthe housing side.
6. Replace the drum separation claws andcleaning lower seal and refit all the removedparts.
Cleaning lower seal
M3 retainer
2BC/D
1-6-52
Figure 1-6-95
Figure 1-6-96
(2) Detaching and refitting the cleaning bladeFollow the procedure below to replace the cleaning blade.
Procedure1. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-50).2. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning
cover and then the cover.
3. Remove the retainer pin holding the cleaningblade and then the blade.
4. Replace the cleaning blade and refit all theremoved parts.
* Do not apply the cleaning blade to the drumand keep it released.
5. Enter the maintenance mode and run U160“Applying toner to the cleaning blade.”
6. Pull out the image formation unit, return theblade release lever to its original position, andput the cleaning blade to the drum.
(3) Detaching and refitting the thrust gearFollow the procedure below to replace the thrust gear.
Procedure1. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-50).2. Remove the E ring and then the thrust gear.3. Replace the thrust gear and refit all the
removed parts.
Figure 1-6-94
Cleaning cover
Cleaning blade
Retainer pin
Thrust gear
E ring
2BC/D
1-6-53
(4) Detaching and refitting the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brushFollow the procedure below to replace the cleaning brush, front and rear cleaning seal and bushing brush.
Procedure1. Remove the cleaning unit (see page 1-6-50).2. Remove the cleaning lower seal and cleaning
blade (see pages 1-6-50 and 52).3. Remove the front and the rear cleaning seals
from the cleaning housing.4. Remove the bushing sponge from the front of
the cleaning housing.
5. Remove an E ring, a gear, and a bushingfrom the front and the rear of the cleaningbrush respectively.
6. Remove the cleaning brush from the cleaninghousing.
Figure 1-6-98
Figure 1-6-99
Figure 1-6-97
Front cleaning seal
Rear cleaning seal
Bushing sponge
Gear
Gear
Bushing
Bushing
E ring
E ring
Cleaning brush
2BC/D
1-6-54
7. Replace the cleaning brush, front and rearcleaning seal and bushing sponge. Refit allthe removed parts.
* Attach the front and rear cleaning seals withinthe standard value range shown in theillustration.
Figure 1-6-100
Front cleaning seal
Rear cleaning seal
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm 0 mm
0 mm
0.5 mm0 mm
2BC/D
1-6-55
1-6-9 Fixing section
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unitFollow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.
Procedure1. Open the front cover, tilt the paper conveying
unit release lever down, and pull out thepaper conveying unit.
2. Open the eject cover.3. Remove the two screws holding the fixing unit
and then the unit from the conveying unit.4. Check or replace the fixing unit and refit all
the removed parts.
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing heaters M and SFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing heaters M and S.
Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit.2. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
front cover and then the cover.
Figure 1-6-101
Figure 1-6-102
Fixing unit
Eject cover
Fixing front cover
2BC/D
1-6-56
3. Remove the screw on the front of fixing unit.
4. Disconnect the two connectors on the rear offixing unit and remove the screw holding theheater retainer and then the retainer.
5. Pull out the fixing heater M and S from therear of fixing unit.
6. Replace the fixing heater M and S and all theremoved parts.
* When replacing the fixing heater M and Salone, remove the screw from the junctionportion.
* When fitting the fixing heater M and S,connect the connectors to those with thecorresponding colors respectively.
Figure 1-6-103
Figure 1-6-104
Figure 1-6-105
Screw
Fixing heater M and S
Connectors
Heater retainerScrew
2BC/D
1-6-57
(3) Detaching and refitting the heat rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.
Procedure1. Remove the one screw holding each on the
front and rear of fixing unit, and then open thefixing unit.
2. Loosen the one screw holding each of theheat roller retainers on the front and rear offixing unit.
3. Remove the heat roller from the fixing unit.
Figure 1-6-107
Figure 1-6-106
Fixing unit
Screw
Screw
Heat roller
Heat roller retainer
Heat roller retainer
2BC/D
1-6-58
4. Remove the circlip, bearing and bushing fromthe front of the heat roller and then removethe circlip, gear, bearing and bushing from therear.
5. Replace the heat roller and all the removedparts.
Figure 1-6-108
Bearing
Circlip
Heat roller
Bushing
Bushing
Gear
Bearing
Circlip
2BC/D
1-6-59
Figure 1-6-110
Figure 1-6-111
Figure 1-6-109
(4) Detaching and refitting the press rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the press roller.
Procedure1. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-57).2. Remove the screw holding the guide plate
and then the plate.
3. Remove the press roller from the fixing unit.
4. Remove the E ring on either the front or rearend of the press roller and pull out the pressroller shaft.
5. Replace the press roller and all the removedparts.
Guide plate
press roller
E ring
Press roller shaft
Press roller
E ring
2BC/D
1-6-60
(5) Detaching and refitting the lower cleaning rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the lower cleaning roller.
Procedure1. Remove the press roller (see page 1-6-59).2. Remove the lower cleaning roller from the
fixing unit.3. Remove the bushings on the front and rear
end of the lower cleaning roller.4. Replace the lower cleaning roller and all the
removed parts.
Figure 1-6-112
Lower cleaning roller
Bushing
Bushing
2BC/D
1-6-61
Figure 1-6-114
Figure 1-6-113
(6) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistorFollow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit thermistor.
Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-55).2. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
upper cover and then the cover.
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing unitthermistor and disconnect the connector, andthen remove the thermistor.
4. Check or replace the fixing unit thermistorand all the removed parts.
Fixing upper cover
Connector
Fixing thermistor
2BC/D
1-6-62
(7) Detaching and refitting the fixing web rollerFollow the procedure below to replace the fixing web roller.
Procedure1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-55).2. Remove the two screws holding the fixing
upper cover and then the cover (see page 1-6-61).
3. Remove the two screws holding the fixingweb roller unit and then the unit.
Figure 1-6-115
4. Press the fixing web roller in the direction ofthe arrow to remove it.
5. Replace the fixing web roller and all theremoved parts.
Figure 1-6-116
Fixing web roller unit
Fixing web roller
2BC/D
1-6-63
Figure 1-6-118
Figure 1-6-117
(8) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation clawFollow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claw.
Procedure1. Open the front cover, tilt the paper conveying
unit release lever down, and pull out thepaper conveying unit.
2. Open the eject cover.3. Remove the screw holding the thrust pin and
then the pin.4. Remove the two screws holding the holder
and then the holder. Remove the heat rollerseparation claw unit.
5. Remove the spring from heat rollerseparation claw.
6. Loosen the screw holding the retainer andpull out the separation claw shaft.
7. Replace the heat roller separation claw andall the removed parts.
Heat rollerseparation claw unit
Thrust pin
Holder
Separation claw shaft
Heat roller separation claws
Retainer
2BC/D
1-6-64
1-6-10 Duplex section
(1) Cleaning the duplex switchback rollersFollow the procedure below to clean the duplex switchback rollers.
Procedure1. Open the front cover and pull out the duplex
unit.2. Remove the four screws holding the duplex
unit and then the unit from the machine.
Figure 1-6-119
3. Remove the four screws holding the duplexcover and then the cover.
4. Remove the stop ring and then the duplexjoint gear.
5. Remove the two screws holding the duplexupper entry guide and then the guide.
Figure 1-6-120
6. Clean the duplex switchback rollers.7. Refit all the removed parts.
Figure 1-6-121
Duplex upper entry guide
Duplex joint gear
Stop ring
Duplex switchback rollers
Duplex unit
2BC/D
1-6-65
Figure 1-6-122
(2) Adjusting the position of the duplex eject switching solenoidFollow the procedure below after replacing the duplex eject switching solenoid or if paper jams frequently in the duplexsection.
Procedure1. Open the front cover and pull out the duplex
unit.2. Remove the four screws holding the duplex
cover and then the cover.3. Loosen the screw securing the duplex eject
switching solenoid.4. Adjust the position of the duplex eject
switching solenoid so that the gap betweenthe switchback feedshift guide and the duplexrefeed guide is between 2.5 and 3.0 mmwhen the plunger of the duplex ejectswitching solenoid is pushed (solenoid: on).
5. Tighten the screw of the duplex ejectswitching solenoid.
6. Refit all the removed parts.
Duplex eject switching solenoid
Plunger
Switchback feedshift guide
Duplexrefeed guide
Screw
2.5 – 3.0mm
2BC/D
1-6-66
(3) Setting the switchback driveFollow the procedure below if paper jams or the leading edge of paper is folded in the duplex section frequently duringduplex copying.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-123
Is the on/off timing of the clutches correct?
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “050” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Press the start key to make a test copy.
Change the setting using the up/down keys.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Setting range (initial setting)FWD CL OFF: 0 – 254 (160)FWD CL OFF2: 0 – 254 (110)DUP CL OFF: 0 – 254 (50)REV CL OFF: 0 – 254 (132)Increasing the value makes the on/off timing of the clutch later, and decreasing it make the timing earlier
Select the item to be adjusted.
End
1FWD CL OFF: Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing2FWD CL OFF2: Duplex forwarding clutch-off timing (for 11" × 17" copy paper only)3DUP CL OFF: Duplex reversing clutch-on timing4REV CL OFF: Duplex reversing clutch-off timing
Duplex forwarding clutchOFF
ON
OFF
ONDuplex reverseing clutch
2BC/D-1
1-6-67
1-6-11 DF section
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF feed pulleyFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley or DF feed pulley.
Procedure1. Open the DF original reversing cover.2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
original feed cover and then the cover.
• Detaching the DF forwarding pulley3. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.4. Pull out the forwarding shaft toward the rear
side of the machine and slide the bushing.5. Remove the DF forwarding pulley from the
forwarding shaft.
• Detaching the DF feed pulley6. Remove the stop ring at the machine front
and then remove the bushing.7. Remove the stop ring at the machine rear.8. Pull out the front original feed shaft toward
the rear side of the machine and slide thebushing.
9. Remove the DF feed pulley from the frontoriginal feed shaft.
10. Clean or replace the DF forwarding pulleyand the DF feed pulley.
11. Refit all the removed parts.* When refitting the DF forwarding pulley and
DF feed pulley, ensure that the notches in thepulleys are aligned with the projections on theone-way clutches.
Figure 1-6-124
Front originalfeed shaft
Bushing
Bushing
DF feed pulley
forwardingshaft
DF forwarding belt
DF forwarding pulley
bushing
bushing
Stop ring
Stop ring
One-way clutch
One-way clutch
Stop ring
Machinefront
Machinerear
2BC/D-1
1-6-68
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulleyFollow the procedure below to clean or replace the DF separation pulley.
Procedure1. Open the DF original reversing cover.2. Remove the DF front and rear covers.3. Remove the two screws holding the upper
original feed cover and then the cover.
4. Remove the four connectors and thenremove the wires from the two wire clamps.
Upper originalfeed cover
Screws
Figure 1-6-124-1
Wire clamps
Connectors
Connectors
Figure 1-6-124-2
1-6-67-1
2BC/D-1
1-6-69
5. Remove the two screws holding the solenoidbracket and then the bracket.
6. Remove the screw and then remove the feedguide pin.
7. Remove the E-ring and then the original feedclutch.
8. Remove the E-ring and then remove thebushing.
Screws
Screw Feed guide pin
Solenoid bracket
Figure 1-6-124-3
E-ringE-ring
Original feed clutch
Bushing
Figure 1-6-124-4
1-6-67-2
2BC/D-1
1-6-70
9. Open the registration guide and remove theguide.
10. Remove the two screws holding the upperfeed guide plate and then the plate.
11. Remove the two screws holding the originalfeed lift and then the lift.
12. Remove the screw holding the separationguide and then the guide.
Screw
ScrewRegistration guide
Upper original feedguide plate
Figure 1-6-124-5
Screw
Separation guideScrew
Screw
Original feed lift
Figure 1-6-124-6
1-6-67-3
2BC/D-1
1-6-71
13. Remove the separation shaft from theseparation pulley arms.
14. Remove the stopper and torque limitter fromthe separation shaft and then remove the DFseparation pulley.
15. Clean or replace the DF separation pulley.16. Refit all the removed parts.
DF separationpulley
Separation pulleyarms
StopperSeparation shaft
Torque limitter
Figure 1-6-124-7
1-6-67-4
2BC/D-1
1-6-72
(3) Adjusting the DF magnificationAdjust magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction if magnification is incorrect when the DF is used.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-125
U053(P. 1-4-20) U070
U065 (auxiliary scanning direction) (P.1-6-35)
U065 (main scanning
direction) (P.1-6-34)
Is the image correct?
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “070” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original on the DF and make a test copy.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
Setting range: –25 – +25Initial setting: –1Changing the value by 1 changes the magnification by 0.1%.Increasing the value makes the image longer, and decreasing it make the image shorter.
End
Auxiliary scanning direction
Original
Main scanning direction
Copy example 1
Copy example 2
1-6-68
2BC/D-1
1-6-73
(4) Adjusting the DF original center linePerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image whenthe DF is used.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-126
U034(P. 1-6-17)
U067(P. 1-6-36) U072
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “072” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Select the item to be adjusted.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original on the DF and make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Press the start key.
The new settingis stored.
Setting range (initial setting)DATA (1 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–8)DATA (front in 2 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–8)DATA (rear in 2 sided mode): –39 – +39 (–7)Changing the value by 1 moves the center line by 0.17 mm.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
DATA (1 sided mode): Center line in the 1 sided modeDATA (front in 2 sided mode): Center line on the front side in the 2 sided modeDATA (rear in 2 sided mode): Center line on the rear side in the 2 sided mode
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Reference
1-6-69
2BC/D-1
1-6-74
(5) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is usedPerform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and thecopy image.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
(5-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration
Procedure
Figure 1-6-127
U034(P. 1-6-15)
U066(P. 1-6-37)
U071
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “071” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Select “LEAD EDGE ADJ”.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original on the DF and make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Press the start key.
The new settingis stored.
Setting range: –32 – +32initial setting: 10Changing the value by 1 moves the leading edge by 0.19 mm.Increasing backward and decreasing it moves the image forward.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
1-6-70
2BC/D-1
1-6-75
(5-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration
Procedure
Figure 1-6-128
Original Copy example 1
Copy example 2
Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “071” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Select “TRAIL EDGE ADJ”.
Press the interrupt key.
Place an original on the DF and make a test copy.
Is the image correct?
Press the start key.
The new settingis stored.
Setting range: –32 – +32initial setting: –15Changing the value by 1 moves the trailing edge by 0.19 mm.Increasing backward and decreasing it moves the image forward.
For copy example 1, increase the value using the cursor up key.For copy example 2, decrease the value using the cursor down key.
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
End
1-6-71
2BC/D-1
1-6-76
(6) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DFPerform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.
CautionBefore making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Figure 1-6-129
U402(P. 1-6-18)
U404U403
(P. 1-6-38)
Change the setting.Increasing the value using the cursor up key makes the margin wider.Decreasing the value using the cursor down key makes the margin narrower.Yes
No
Start
Enter maintenance mode.
Enter “404” using the numeric keys.
Press the start key.
Place an original on the DFand make a test copy.
Press the start key.
The new setting is stored.
Setting range (initial setting)DF left margin: 0 – +10.0 (1.5)DF leading edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (3.0)DF right margin: 0 – +10.0 (2.0)DF trailing edge margin: 0 – +10.0 (4.0)
Changing the value by one moves the margin by 0.1 mm for all.
Select the item to be adjusted.
Are the margins correct?
Press the interrupt key.
A MARGIN: DF left marginB MARGIN: DF leading edge marginC MARGIN: DF right marginD MARGIN: DF trailing edge margin
Yes
No
Proceed to another mode?
End
Press the stop/clear key to exit maintenance mode.
DF leading edge margin (3 ± 2.5 mm)
DF left margin(2.5+1.5 mm)
DF right margin(2.5+1.5 mm)
Ejection direction(reference)
DF trailing edge margin(3 ± 2.5 mm)
–2.0–2.0
1-6-72
2BC/D
1-7-1
Figure 1-7-1
1-7-1 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:Compact Flash (Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended.)
NOTEWhen writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer, be sure to format it in advance.(For formatting, insert a Compact Flash and select a drive.)For a desktop computer, connect a Compact Flash card reader/writer to it. For a notebook computer, use a PC card adapteror a connection portion only for Compact Flash.
Procedure1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the
power plug.2. Remove the middle rear C cover.3. Insert Compact Flash in a notch hole of the
copier.* Insert it straight all the way into the machine
with the front side facing the rear of themachine. If the main switch is turned ofwhen the CompactFlash is not properlyinserted, the PCB may be damaged.
4. Insert the power plug and turn the mainswitch on.* The Energy saver key and the Start key will
blink alternately and firmware upgradeoperation will start. (for approximately threeminutes)
Upgrading firmware starts for 3 minutes.Caution:Never turn the main switch off duringupgrading.
5. “Completed” is displayed on the touch panelwhen upgrading is complete.
6. Turn the main switch off and disconnect thepower plug.
7. Remove Compact Flash from the copier andrefit the middle rear C cover.
8. Insert the power plug and turn the mainswitch on.
Compact Flash
Notch hole
2BC/D
1-7-2
1-7-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)
The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.• High voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301, VR302, VR401, VR402, VR403• Inverter PCB: VR1
2BC/D
2-1-1
2-1-1 Paper feed section
The paper feed system of this copier includes drawers 1 and 2 that hold 500 sheets of paper each, drawer 3 that holds1,000 sheets, drawer 4 that holds 1,500 sheets, and the bypass table.The paper feed section consists of the primary paper feed and secondary paper feed subsections. Primary paper feedconveys paper from one of the four drawers or the bypass table to the upper and lower registration rollers, at which pointsecondary paper feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer/conveying sections in sync with the image printingtiming.
(1) Drawers 1 and 2 paper feedDrawers 1 and 2 consist of the lift mechanism with the drawer operating plate for making paper come into contact withthe forwarding pulley and the paper feed mechanism with the forwarding pulley for pulling out paper from the drawer, theupper paper feed pulley and so on.
Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section (1)
1 Upper paper feed pulley2 Lower paper feed pulley3 Forwarding pulley4 Upper paper feed housing5 Lower paper feed housing6 Paper switch 1 (PSW1)7 Paper switch 2 (PSW2)8 Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1)9 Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2)0 Right feed pulley! Vertical paper conveying roller B@ Vertical paper conveying roller C
# Left feed guide plate$ Confluence guide% Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3)^ Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4)& Lift operating plate* Drawer operating plate( Drawer 1) Drawer 2⁄ Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U)¤ Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L)‹ Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U)› Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L)
2BC/D
2-1-2
(1-1) Detecting the paper levelThe mechanism of paper level detection is same for drawers 1 and 2, so only drawer 1 is explained here.The drawer operating plate for making paper in the drawer come into contact with the forwarding pulley is activated byraising the lift operating plate. The lift operating plate is attached on the lift shaft to which the upper lift motor (LM-U) isconnected. When the drawer is set to the copier or the lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) is turned off as the paper on the lift isused for copying, the upper lift motor (LM-U) will operate until the leading edge of the paper on the drawer operatingplate turns lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) on. The tilting up angle of the lift operating plate (lift motor drive shaft angle) istherefore small when the paper level is low, and large when the paper level is high. The upper lift motor (LM-U) includesa circuit that converts the tilting up angle into 2-bit digital data by dividing the angle into four levels and outputs the dataas paper level detection signals (UPLESW1, UPLESW2). The engine PCB (EPCB) judges the amount of paperremaining with four levels of full, 3/4, 1/2, and 1/4 based of the UPLESW1 and UPLESW2 signals and judges alsoexhaustion of paper when paper switch 1 (PSW1) is not turned on even if the lift limit switch (LILSW1) is turned on. ThePCB, therefore, detects five levels of the amount of paper remaining in total.
57.17 to 80.0°
41.35 to 57.17°
28.54 to 41.35°
0 to 28.54°
H
L
L
H
L
L
H
H
1/4
1/2
3/4
Full
Lift motor upper drive shaft angle
UPLESW2UPLESW1
Amount of paper
remaining
Paper level detection output signal level
Drawer operating plate
Drawer 1
Paper switch 1Lift limit switch 1
Lift operating plate
Lift shaft (lift motor upper drive shaft)
Figure 2-1-2 Paper level detection
EPCB
CN17-8
CN17-6
CN17-10
CN17-5
CN7-9
CN7-6
CN7-25
CN7-22
CN17-1
CN17-3UPLESW1
UPLESW2
LM-U REM
UPLESW1
UPLESW2
LM-L REM
LM-U
PSW1
PSW2
LILSW1
PSW1
PSW2
LILSW1
LILSW2
LM-L
LILSW2
Figure 2-1-3 Paper level detection section block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-3
Figure 2-1-4 Paper feed section (2)
1 Lower registration roller2 Upper registration roller3 Front registration guide4 Upper registration guide5 Registration switch (RSW)6 Lower feed roller7 Upper feed roller8 Upper right feed guide9 Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1)0 Upper left feed guide! Lower right feed guide@ Vertical paper conveying roller A# Right feed pulley$ Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2)
2BC/D
2-1-4
RCL
RSW
FCL1-H
FCL2-HFCL2-L
FCL1-L
PFCL1
PSW1
PWSW-UPLSW-U
FCL3
PFSW3
LILSW1
PFSW1
PFSW2
FCL4
EPCB
CN3-B2
CN20-4
CN20-7
CN20-10
CN7-11
CN7-9
CN7-6
CN7-14
CN7-1,2,3
CN18-A1
CN18-A4
CN18-B1
CN18-A8
CN18-B3
CN20-13
CN7-27
CN7-25
CN7-22
CN7-16
CN7-17, 18, 19
CN18-B5
CN18-A6
Drawer 1
Drawer 2PFCL2
PSW2
PWSW-LPLSW-L
PFSW4
LILSW2
Figure 2-1-5 Paper feed section block diagram (paper feed section of drawers 1 and 2)
2BC/D
2-1-5
Drawer 2, paper size: A4
Image r
eady
Seco
ndary
paper
feed s
tart
163 ms
56 ms
58 ms
58 ms
58 ms
50 ms
128 ms
128 ms
PFCL2
FCL1-L
FCL1-H
FCL2-H
FCL3
FCL4
ESW
PFSW1
PFSW2
PFSW3
PFSW4P
FS
W4:
ON
PF
SW
3: O
N
PF
SW
2: O
N
PF
SW
1: O
N
RS
W: O
N
RS
W: O
FF
ES
W: O
FF
RSW
RCL
PFM
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
70 ms
10 ms
166 ms 86 ms
380 ms
50 ms
Timing chart 2-1-1 Drawer 2 paper feed
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on and thereby machine drive starts.b 50 ms after the start key is pressed, paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turns on and the forwarding pulley and upper and
lower paper feed pulleys of drawer 2 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns on andpaper is fed to the vertical paper conveying section.
c 128 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 ms after paper feedswitch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) turns on,feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.163 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) off, paper feed clutch 2 (PFSW2) turns off. 58 ms afterpaper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns off, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.
d The paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feed high clutch 2(FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
e 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10ms later, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
f 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete thesecondary paper feed.
g When the paper is ejected, the eject switch (ESW) turns off. 380 ms later, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns off tocomplete the paper feed.
2BC/D
2-1-6
(2) Drawers 3 and 4 paper feedDrawer 3 located in the right of the deck holds 1,000 sheets of paper and drawer 4 located in the left of the deck holds1,500 sheets of paper.
Figure 2-1-6 Drawers 3 and 4 (deck)
1 Right feed pulley2 Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6)3 Left feed guide4 Vertical paper conveying roller E5 Deck upper confluence guide6 Lower paper feed pulley7 Confluence guide8 Lower paper feed housing9 Forwarding pulley0 Upper paper feed pulley! Deck lower paper conveying guide@ Deck right paper conveying roller# Deck upper paper conveying pulley$ Deck upper paper conveying pulley% Deck upper paper conveying guide^ Deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1)& Deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1)
* Deck left paper conveying roller( Deck lower paper feed guide) Deck upper paper feed guide⁄ Deck left paper conveying stay¤ Deck lift plate‹ Deck base A› Deck base Bfi Deck right paper level switch 1 (DPLSW1-R)fl Deck right paper level switch 2 (DPLSW2-R)‡ Deck right paper level switch 3 (DPLSW3-R)° Deck left paper level switch 1 (DPLSW1-L)· Deck left paper level switch 2 (DPLSW2-L)‚ Deck left paper level switch 3 (DPLSW3-L)Œ Deck right switch (DSW-R)„ Deck lift limit switch 2 (DLILSW2)´ Deck left switch (DSW-L)‰ Deck paper switch 2 (DPSW2)
2BC/D
2-1-7
(2-1) Drawer 3 paper feedDrawer 3 consists of the paper lifting mechanism with a lift for lifting paper in the drawer and the paper feed mechanismwith a forwarding pulley for pulling out paper from the drawer, an upper paper feed pulley, and so on.
RCL
RSW
FCL1-H
FCL2-HFCL2-L
FCL1-L
FCL3
PFSW3
PFSW5
PFSW6
FCL5
PFSW1
PFSW2
PFCL3
DPSW1
DLILSW1
FCL4
PFSW4
EPCB
CN3-B2
CN20-4
CN20-7
CN20-10
CN8-7
CN8-5
CN8-2
CN18-B7
CN20-19
CN18-A1
CN18-A4
CN18-B1
CN18-A8
CN18-B3
CN20-13
CN20-16
CN18-B5
CN18-A6
Drawer 3
Figure 2-1-7 Drawer 3 block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-8
Drawer 3, paper size: A4
128 ms
128 ms
128 ms
58 ms50 ms
50 ms 163 ms
70 ms
58 ms
10 ms
58 ms
58 ms
FCL1-L
FCL1-H
FCL2-H
FCL3
FCL4
FCL5
PFCL3
ESW
PFSW1
PFSW2
PFSW3
PFSW4
PFSW5
PFSW6
RSW
RCL
PFM
DDM
166 ms 86 ms
380 ms
56 ms
Image r
eady
Seco
ndary
paper
feed s
tart
PF
SW
4: O
N
PF
SW
6: O
N
PF
SW
5: O
N
PF
SW
3: O
N
PF
SW
2: O
N
PF
SW
1: O
N
RS
W: O
N
RS
W: O
FF
ES
W: O
FF
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
100 ms
Timing chart 2-1-2 Drawer 3 paper feed
a When the start key is pressed, the deck drive motor (DDM) turns on and 100 ms later the paper feed motor (PFM)turns on, thereby starting machine drive.
b 50 ms after the start key is pressed, paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3) turns on and the forwarding pulley and upper andlower paper feed pulleys of drawer 3 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns on andpaper is fed to the vertical paper conveying section.
c 128 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) on and then turns paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) on, feedclutch 4 (FCL4) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 msafter paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2(PFSW2) turns on, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.58 ms after the paper turns paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) off and then turns paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) off, feedclutch 5 (FCL5) turns off. 58 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns off, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns off. 58 msafter paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns off, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns off.
d The paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feed high clutch 2(FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
e 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10ms later, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
f 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete thesecondary paper feed.
g 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the deck drive motor (DDM) and the paper feed motor (PFM)turn off to complete the paper feed.
2BC/D
2-1-9
(2-2) Drawer 4 paper feedDrawer 4 consists of the paper lifting mechanism with a deck lift and the paper feed mechanism with a forwarding pulleyfor pulling out paper from the drawer, an upper paper feed pulley, and so on. Also a paper conveying section forconveying paper horizontally is provided.
PFCL4DPSW2
DPCSW2
DFCLDPCSW1
DLILSW-L
Drawer 4
RCL
RSW
FCL1-H
FCL2-HFCL2-L
FCL1-L
FCL3
PFSW3
PFSW5
PFSW1
PFSW2
FCL4
PFSW4
EPCB
CN3-B2
CN20-4
CN20-7
CN20-10
CN18-A1
CN18-A4
CN18-B1
CN18-A8
CN18-B3
CN20-13
CN20-16
CN18-B5
CN18-A6
CN26-12
CN26-17
CN26-5
CN26-14
CN26-2
CN26-8
Figure 2-1-8 Drawer 4 block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-10
190 ms
50 ms
50 ms
163 ms
128 ms
128 ms
128 ms
58 ms
125 ms
58 ms
58 ms
70 ms
10 ms
100 ms
58 ms
56 ms
FCL1-L
FCL1-H
FCL2-H
FCL3
FCL4
FCL5
DFCL
PFCL4
ESW
PFSW1
PFSW2
PFSW3
PFSW4
PFSW5
DPCSW1
DPCSW2
RSW
RCL
PFM
DDM
166 ms86 ms
380 ms
Image r
eady
Seco
ndary
paper
feed s
tart
PF
SW
4: O
N
DP
CS
W2:
ON
DP
CS
W1:
ON
PF
SW
5: O
N
PF
SW
3: O
N
PF
SW
2: O
N
PF
SW
1: O
N
PF
SW
1: O
FF
RS
W: O
N
RS
W: O
FF
ES
W: O
FF
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
Drawer 4, paper size: A4
Timing chart 2-1-3 Drawer 4 paper feed
a When the start key is pressed, the deck drive motor (DDM) turns on and 100 ms later the paper feed motor (PFM)turns on, thereby starting paper feed.
b 50 ms after the start key is pressed, paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4) turns on and the forwarding pulley and upper andlower paper feed pulleys of drawer 4 rotate to start primary paper feed. 50 ms later, the deck feed clutch (DFCL) turnson and paper is fed through the horizontal paper conveying section.
c 163 ms after the paper turns deck paper conveying switch 2 (DPCSW2) on and then turns deck paper conveyingswitch 1 (DPCSW1) on, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turns on, feedclutch 4 (FCL4) turns on. 128 ms after paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) turns on, feed clutch 3 (FCL3) turns on. 128 msafter paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) turns on, feed high clutch 2 (FCL2-H) turns on. 56 ms after paper feed switch 2(PFSW2) turns on, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on and the paper is conveyed to the position where paper feedswitch 1 (PFSW1) turns on.125 ms after the paper turns deck paper conveying switch 1 (DPCSW1) off, the deck feed clutch (DFCL) turns off. 58ms after paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) turns off, feed clutch 5 (FCL5) turns off. 58 ms after paper feed switch 4(PFSW4) turns off, feed clutch 4 (FCL4) turns off.
d The paper advances and turns the registration switch (RSW) on to complete the primary paper feed. 70 ms later, feedhigh clutch 2 (FCL2-H) and feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turn off.
e 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10ms later, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
f 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete thesecondary paper feed.
g 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the deck drive motor (DDM) and the paper feed motor (PFM)turn off to complete the paper feed.
2BC/D
2-1-11
(2-3) Raising and lowering the liftThe mechanism of paper lifting with the deck lift is same for drawers 3 and 4, so only drawer 3 is explained here.The deck lift is suspended with wire at four points, and the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) drives the lift by winding up thewire. The stop control of the deck lift at the upper limit is performed with deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1).When paper is loaded on the deck lift and the drawer is set in the copier, the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) turns on tostart winding up the wire. The deck lift rises until the leading edge of the paper turns deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) onand then stops. When deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) is turned off as the paper on the lift is used for copying, the decklift is raised until the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) turns on again and the leading edge of the paper turns deck lift limitswitch 1 (DLILSW1) on.When the drawer is pulled out from the copier for loading paper or other purposes, the lift drive shaft is released from thecoupler of the deck right lift motor (DLM-R), allowing the lift to descend under its own weight. The damper mounted via agear to the lift drive shaft buffers the impact of the descending lift.
Damper
Deck lift
Wire
Wire Wire
Wire
Deck paper switch 1
Coupler
Lift drive shaft
Deck lift limit switch 1
Deck right lift motor
Figure 2-1-9 Raising and lowering the lift
EPCB
DLM-L
DLILSW2DPSW2
DPSW1DLILSW1
CN8-16CN26-8
CN26-17
CN8-18
CN8-2
CN8-5
DLM-R
Figure 2-1-10 Lift block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-12
(2-4) Detecting the paper level* The mechanism of paper level detection is same for drawers 3 and 4, so only drawer 3 is explained here.When the drawer is pulled out from the copier and then pushed in again or when paper on the lift is used for copying, thedeck right lift motor (DLM-R) drives until the leading edge of the paper on the lift turns deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1)on. The rising level of the lift, therefore, depends on the amount of paper remaining. When the amount of paperremaining is large, the level is low, and when small, the level is high. At the rear portion of the deck, deck right paperlevel switches 1, 2, and 3 (DLPSW1-R, DLPSW2-R, DLPSW3-R) are mounted at three levels and turn on or off based onthe shielding plate mounted to the lift. The engine PCB (EPCB) detects the level below which the actuator turns theswitches on (or no switch on) when the deck right lift motor (DLM-R) rises and judges the rising level of the lift (paperlevel) with four levels. The PCB judges also exhaustion of paper when deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1) is not turned oneven if deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) is turned on. The PCB, therefore, detects five levels of paper remaining in total.
Lift
ActuatorDeck right paper level switch 3
Deck right paper level switch 1
Deck right paper level switch 2
Deck right lift motor
Deck paper switch 1
Deck lift limit switch 1
Figure 2-1-11 Detecting the paper level
EPCB
DPLSW1-L
DPLSW1-R
DPLSW2-RDPLSW3-R
DPLSW2-L
DPLSW3-L
DLM-L
DLILSW2
CN20-22CN8-16
CN20-25CN20-28CN26-6
CN20-31CN8-18
CN20-34CN20-37
CN8-2
DLILSW1
DLM-R
Figure 2-1-12 Paper level detection system block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-13
(3) Paper feed from the bypass tableThe bypass table holds up to 100 sheets of paper at one time.the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, unlocking the bypass stopper and lowering the bypass forwarding pulley until itcomes into contact with the paper. This conveys paper placed on the bypass table to the bypass upper and lower paperfeed pulleys, is primary paper fed by the rotation of the bypass forwarding pulley and is conveyed to the bypass upperand lower paper feed pulleys.Also during paper feed, the bypass lower paper feed pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by thetorque limiter.
Figure 2-1-13 Bypass paper feed section
1 Upper bypass guide2 Bypass upper paper feed pulley3 Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW)4 Bypass forwarding pulley5 Bypass table6 Bypass paper size length switch (BYPPLSW)7 Bypass paper size width switch (BYPPWSW)
RCL
RSWFCL1-H
FCL1-L
PFSW1
BYPSOL
BYPPSW
BYPPFCL
BYPPLSW
BYPPWSW
BYPTSW
EPCB
CN9-B3
CN9-B8CN9-B5
CN18-A6
CN3-B2
CN18-A1
CN18-A4
CN20-4
CN9-A5
CN9-A2
CN9-A6, A7, A8
Figure 2-1-14 Bypass paper feed section block diagram
8 Bypass lift guide9 Lower bypass housing0 Bypass lower paper feed pulley! Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL)@ Bypass tray switch (BYPTSW)# Bypass stopper
2BC/D
2-1-14
Bypass, paper size: A4
300 ms
10 ms
100 ms
100 ms
58 ms
380 ms
86 ms166 ms
BYPPFCL
BYPSOL
FCL1-L
ESW
PFSW1
RSW
RCL
PFM
90 ms
Image r
eady
Seco
ndary
paper
feed s
tart
RS
W: O
N
PF
SW
1: O
FF
RS
W: O
FF
ES
W: O
FF
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
Timing chart 2-1-4 Paper feed from the bypass
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on, thereby starting paper feed.b 100 ms after the start key is pressed, the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on. The bypass stopper is unlocked and
the bypass forwarding pulley lowers to forward the paper.c 300 ms after the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on and the
bypass forwarding pulley and bypass upper and lower paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper feed. 90 mslater, feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) turns on.
d 90 ms after the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns on, the bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) turns off to lower the bypass liftguide to return to the paper feed standby position.
e 100 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) and feed lowclutch 1 (FCL1-L) turn off to complete the primary paper feed.
f 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed. 10ms later, feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) turns on.
g 86 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns off to complete thesecondary paper feed.
e 380 ms after the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns off to complete the paperfeed.
2BC/D
2-1-15
2-1-2 Main charging section
The main charging section consists of the main charger unit, drum, drum surface potential sensor (DSPS), and so on.The drum is electrically charged to form an image.The drum surface potential sensor (DSPS) reads the drum surface potential and outputs data for surface potentialcorrection to the engine PCB (EPCB).The main charger unit has the main charger cleaning motor (MCCM), main charger cleaning pad, and so on forautomatic cleaning of the charger wire.
Figure 2-1-15 Main charging section
Figure 2-1-16 Main charger unit
1 Main charger base2 Main charger shield3 Main charger grid4 Main charger wire
(Tungsten wire)5 Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)6 Drum7 Drum surface potential sensor (DSPS)
1 Main charger rear housing2 Main charger wire (Tungsten wire)3 Main charger front housing4 Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)5 Main charger base6 Main charger grid7 Grid cleaning pad8 Main charger cleaning pads
2BC/D
2-1-16
EPCB
CN12-12CN12-11CN12-10
CN4-6
CN14-9
CN4-5
CN1-10CN1-11CN1-12
G CONTMC ALMMC REM
Drum
HVTPCB
Main chargerwire
Grid
MCCM
DSPS
MCCM REV REMMCCM FWD REMDSPS
Figure 2-1-17 Main charging section block diagram
ES
W:
OF
F(O
utpu
t off
trig
ger)
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
500 ms
100 ms
100 ms
250 ms
Potential stage dropping
ESW
MC REM
IFM
Timing chart 2-1-5 Main charging
a 250 ms after the start key is pressed, the image formation motor (IFM) turns on to start machine drive.b 100 ms after the image formation motor (IFM) turns on, the MC REM signal turns on, high voltage is applied to the
main charger from the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) and main charging starts.c The potential stage dropping control of main charging is triggered when the eject switch (ESW) turns off.d 500 ms after the end of potential stage dropping control of main charging, the image formation motor (IFM) turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-17
2-1-3 Optical section
The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unitfor printing.
Figure 2-1-18 Optical section
1 Mirror 1 frame2 Mirror 2 frame3 Mirror 14 Mirror 25 Mirror 36 Exposure lamp (EL)7 Image scanning unit8 Lens9 Laser scanner unit (LSU)0 CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
! Scanner motor (SM)@ Scanner home position switch
(SHPSW)# Original detection switch (ODSW)$ Original size detection sensor 1
(OSDS1)% Original size detection sensor 2
(OSDS2)*^ ISU cover
*: For inch models only.
2BC/D
2-1-18
(1) Original scanningThe original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the imagescanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.The mirror 1 and 2 frame travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side.The speed of the mirror 2 frame is half the speed of the mirror 1 frame. When the DF is used, the mirror 1 and 2 framestop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.
OSDS2
CN
4-2
CN
7-3
CN
10-1
5C
N1-
2
CN
7-6
CN
5-2
CN
2-1,
3, 4
, 6
CN2-1CN2-4 CN1-6
CN
14CN7CN8CN9
CN
15
CN1-5CN3-1CN3-2
SMPCB
SH
PS
W
INPCB
MPCB
CCDPCB
EPCBCN1 CN1
SMSHPSWOSDS1
EL ODSW
Original
Drum
LSU
CN
10-1
4C
N1-
3E
L O
N R
EM
CN
10-1
3C
N1-
4S
M E
NA
BLE
CN
10-1
2C
N1-
5S
M R
ET
CN
10-1
1C
N1-
6S
M C
WB
CN
10-1
0C
N10
-3C
N1-
7C
N1-
14
SM
CLK
OD
SW
OS
DS
2O
SD
S1
CN
10-2
CN
1-15
CN
10-1
CN
1-16
Figure 2-1-19 Optical section block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-19
410 P
414 P
9921 P 110 P
Manual copy density control, copy paper: A3/11" × 17", magnification ratio 100%
Start key
SMFwd. rotation
Rev. rotation
SHPSW
FVSYNC signal
Timing chart 2-1-6 Scanner operation
aWhen the start key is pressed, the scanner motor (SM) reverses for 410 pulses and then rotates forward.b414 pulses after the scanner motor rotates forward, the FVSYNC signal turns on for 9921 pulses for scanning.cThe scanner motor (SM) reverses to return the scanner to the home position.d110 pulses after the scanner home position switch (SHPSW) turns on, the scanner motor (SM) turns off, and the
scanner stops at its home position.
(2) Image printingThe image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as imageprinting data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms alatent image on the drum surface.
• Laser scanner unit
Oject mirror
Glass dust filter
Cylindrical correcting lens
BD sensor
Motor drive PCB
Polygon motor (PM)Polygon mirror
Lens 2
Lens 3
Lens 1
Beam spritterCollimator lenses
Laser diodes (LD)
LD control PCB
BD sensor mirror
Figure 2-1-20 Laser scanner unit (1)
2BC/D
2-1-20
Drum
Figure 2-1-21 Laser scanner unit (2)
1 Laser diodes: Generate the laser beams that form the latent image on the drum.2 Collimator lenses: Collimate the diffused laser beams emitted from the laser diodes into cylindrical beams.3 Beam splitter: Refracts the laser beam emitted from one of the laser diodes so that it becomes parallel to the other
laser beam, and sends those two beams to lens 1.4 Polygon mirror: 6-faced mirror that rotates at approximately 34251.969 rpm. Each face reflects the laser beams
toward the drum in the horizontal (main) scan direction. The motion of the beams across the drum forms one scanline.
5 Lenses 1, 2, 3 and 4: Maintain scanning speed across the drum and beam diameters constant. These lenses alsocorrect the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror so that the focal plane of the laser beams are always on the drum.
6 Object mirror: Reflects the laser beams onto the drum surface.7 BD sensor mirror: Directs a laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the horizontal sync signal.8 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror.9 BD sensor: Detects the laser beam reflected by BD sensor mirror, and sends the detection signal to the main PCB
(MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) uses this signal to determine the horizontal scanning signal timing.0 Glass dust filter: Prevents dust from entering the unit.
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-22.Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction isprovided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.The static latent image of the letter “A”, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-23. Electricalcharge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.
65 mµ
70 mµ
Figure 2-1-22
Mainscanningdirection
Auxilaryscanningdirection
: laser beam is on
Figure 2-1-23
2BC/D
2-1-21
2-1-4 Developing section
The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner hopper unit.The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and thedeveloping spirals that agitate the developer.The toner hopper unit consists of the toner conveying spiral, toner draw spiral, and hopper agitation spring, turns on/offthe toner feed motor according to the toner sensor output voltage, and supplies toner in the toner hopper to thedeveloping unit. (The toner hopper unit is attached to the developing unit side (machine front.
Developing unit
Developing unit
Toner hopper unit
Figure 2-1-24 Developing section
1 Doctor blade2 Developing magnet3 Left developing spiral4 Middle developing spiral5 Right developing spiral6 Toner sensor (TNS)7 Developing housing8 Developing unit upper seal
9 Toner feed motor (TFM)0 Toner agitation motor (TAM)! Toner level detection sensor (TLDS)@ Toner draw spiral# Toner conveying spiral$ Toner feed spiral% Toner feed case
2BC/D
2-1-22
(1) Formation of magnetic brushThe developing magnet consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller aroundthe magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller that is usedfor developing. The height of the magnet brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by theposition of the poles on the magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade. A developing bias voltage generated bythe high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing magnet to provide image contrast.
Developing magnet
Doctor blade
A
S2
N3
S1
N1
N243.5
59
85.5 74.5 Poles on the developing magnet
N1: 830 × 10-4
N2: 630 × 10-4
N3: 450 × 10-4
S1: 860 × 10-4
S2: 700 × 10-4
A: 0.53 ± 0.05mm (between the doctor blade and the developing magnet)
Figure 2-1-25 Forming a magnetic brush
2BC/D
2-1-23
HVTPCBDB CONT
DB REM
OUTTONER CONTROL
CN1-8CN1-9
CN12-8CN12-9
EPCB
CN4-8
CN4-1, 2
CN4-3, 4
CN4-18
CN4-10
Toner hopper unit
Developing bias
TNS
Drum
TAMTDLS
TFM
Figure 2-1-26 Developing section block diagram
150 ms600 ms
DB REM
IFM
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
Timing chart 2-1-7 Operation of developing bias
a 150 ms after the start key is pressed, the DB REM signal turns on to apply the developing bias to the developingroller.
b 600 ms after the image forming motor (IFM) turns off, the DB REM signal turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-24
(2) Toner density controlTo maintain the toner density of the developer constant, the toner sensor (TNS) and the toner level sensor (TLDS) detectthe toner density and toner level in the toner hopper respectively. Based on the detection result, toner is fed by turningthe toner feed motor (TFM) and toner agitation motor (TAM) on and off.
(2-1) Toner empty detection by the toner sensorToner density control is performed using as the reference the toner control level (FIRST TARGET) set automaticallywhen maintenance item U130 is run after loading developer.
Toner request message(toner replenishment for toner hopper)Toner being fed message
5 min
Toner sensoroutput voltage (V)
Toner empty detection level
Toner empty reset level
Toner control level (FIRST TARGET in U130)
Copying
Figure 2-1-27 Toner density control
aWhen the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to feedtoner.
bWhen the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level, the toner being fed message appearsand forced toner feed is conducted for up to 5 minutes.
cWhen the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner empty reset level, the toner being fed message disappears.dWhen the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns off and toner
feed ends.e If the toner sensor output voltage does not fall to the toner empty detection level after 5-minute's forced toner feed, the
toner request message appears and copies are made based on the conditions set in maintenance item U258.When toner is replenished into the toner hopper and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns on, the toner feed motor(TFM) turns on to feed toner. The toner being fed message appears.
fWhen the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner empty reset level, the toner being fed message disappears.gWhen the toner sensor output voltage drops to the toner control level, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns off, and the
toner feed ends.
2BC/D
2-1-25
(2-2) Controlling the toner feed motor and toner agitation motorThe toner feed motor (TFM) and toner agitation motor (TAM) are turned on and off based on the toner sensor outputvoltage as follows:
• Under normal conditionsWhen the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control levelToner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 0.5 s and turned off for 1.5 sToner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 1 s and turned off for 1 s
When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level plus 20Toner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 0.5 s and turned off for 0.5 sToner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 0.5 s and turned off for 0.5 s
When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level plus 25Toner feed motor (TFM): Continuously turned onToner agitation motor (TAM): Continuously turned on
• During toner feedWhen the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner empty detection level (toner feed performed when the levelof toner in the toner hopper drops abruptly)Toner feed motor (TFM): Continuously turned onToner agitation motor (TAM): Continuously turned on
When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level plus 20Toner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 1.5 s and turned off for 0.5 sToner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 1.5 s and turned off for 0.5 s
When the toner sensor output voltage is larger than the toner control level plus 14Toner feed motor (TFM): Turned on for 1 s and turned off for 1 sToner agitation motor (TAM): Turned on for 1.5 s and turned off for 0.5 s
(2-3) Toner empty detection by the toner level sensorWhen the setting of maintenance item U136 is "ON," the toner level sensor (TLDS) detects toner empty in the tonerhopper.
1 .When the toner in the toner hopper is exhausted and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns off, toner empty is detectedand the toner request message appears.
2 .When the number of copies made after the toner level sensor (TLDS) has turned off reaches the limit set inmaintenance item U258, the toner request message and a message indicating that copying is disabled appear.
3 .When toner is replenished into the toner hopper and the toner level sensor (TLDS) turns on, the toner emptydetection is reset and toner feed motor (TFM) starts toner feed.
2BC/D
2-1-26
(2-4) Toner control level absolute humidity correctionThe results of toner density detection vary with the temperature and humidity due to their influence on the toner sensoroutput characteristic. Therefore, the toner control level is corrected based on the absolute humidity level detected by thehumidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB).
3.5
3
00 1.4 3.1 11.4 22.7 35.8
Toner control level (V)
Absolute humidity (g/m3)
The above correction is for when “TARGET” of U154 is 154.
Figure 2-1-28 Toner control level absolute humidity correction
2BC/D
2-1-27
2-1-5 Transfer/separation and conveying sections
The transfer/separation section consists of the transfer charger unit and the drum separation claw. The transfer chargerunit consists of the transfer charger for transferring the toner image on the drum onto paper and the separation chargerfor separating the paper from the drum. The transfer charger performs transfer charging by applying a high voltagegenerated by the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) to both ends of the tungsten wire. The separation charger,when an alternating voltage is applied from the high voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB), discharges it and neutralizesthe residual charge on the paper for which transfer is complete. The paper is therefore separated from the drum by itsown weight. The drum separation claw is used as auxiliary measures for separating securely the paper that has beenseparated from the drum.The paper conveying section consists of the paper conveying belt assembly, the paper conveying motor (PCM), and soon. The paper that passes through the transfer/separation section is conveyed to the fixing section with the paperconveying belt. Holes are provided on the paper conveying belt and the paper conveying fan motor (PCFM) attracts thepaper from under the paper conveying section.
Figure 2-1-29 Transfer/separation and conveying sections
1 Lower front transfer guide2 Transfer charger wire3 Separation charger wire4 Separation guide5 Drum separation claw6 Transfer charger cleaning motor (TCCM)
EPCB
CN1-3TC REM
TCSCPCFM
TCCMTC CONT
SC CONT
SC/TC ALM
TCCM FWD REMTCCM REV REM
SC REMCN1-4
CN1-5
CN1-6
CN1-7
CN3-B6
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
CN3-B7
3-B4PCFM REM
HVTPCB
Drum
Figure 2-1-30 Transfer/separation and conveying sections block diagram
7 Paper conveying belt8 Paper conveying roller9 Paper conveying roller0 Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM)! Transfer charger shield
2BC/D
2-1-28
86 ms
155 ms 344 ms
220 ms
ESW
RSW
RCL
PFM
TC REM
SC REM
RS
W:
OF
F
Sta
rt k
ey:
On
166 ms
Ima
ge
re
ad
y
Se
con
da
ry p
ap
er
fe
ed
sta
rtTiming chart 2-1-8 Transfer/separation operation
a When the start key is pressed, the paper feed motor (PFM) turns on, which starts paper feed.b 166 ms after the image ready signal turns on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed.c 155 ms and 220 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, the TC REM signal and the SC REM signal turn on
respectively and the transfer charging and the separation charging start respectively.d 344 ms after the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the TC REM and SC REM signals turn off to complete
transfer charging and separation charging.
2BC/D
2-1-29
2-1-6 Cleaning section
The copier employs a blade cleaning method with a cleaning brush. The cleaning section consists of the cleaning bladeand the cleaning brush which remove residual toner from the drum surface after transfer, the cleaning brush scraper thatremoves toner from the cleaning brush, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner to the waste toner box.After the transfer process is completed, residual toner on the drum surface is removed first by the rotation of the cleaningbrush and then by the cleaning blade.The pre-cleaning lamps 1 and 2 (PCL1, PCL2) are provided on the front and rear ends of the drum respectively. TheLED light irradiates the drum ends to improve the cleaning performance on the drum ends.
Figure 2-1-31 Cleaning section
1 Cleaning blade2 Cleaning cover3 Cleaning housing4 Cleaning brush scraper
EPCB
CN4-15CN4-13
PCL1 REMPCL2 REM PCL2
PCL1
Drum
Figure 2-1-32 Cleaning section
5 Cleaning spiral6 Cleaning brush7 Pre-cleaning lamps 1 and 2 (PCL1, PCL2)8 Cleaning blade pressure plate
2BC/D
2-1-30
2-1-7 Charge erasing section
The main component of the charge erasing section is the cleaning lamp (CL).The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of 45 LEDs (red) and removes residual charge from the drum surface.
Cleaning lamp
Figure 2-1-33 Charge erasing section
EPCB
CN4-11CL REM
CL
Drum
Figure 2-1-34 Charge erasing section block diagram
150 ms600 ms
IFM
CL
Sta
rt k
ey:
ON
Timing chart 2-1-9 Charge erasing operation
a 150 ms after the start key is pressed, the cleaning lamp (CL) lights to remove the residual charge from the drumsurface.
b 600 ms after the image formation motor (IFM) turns off, the cleaning lamp (CL) turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-31
2-1-8 Fixing section
The fixing section consists of the parts shown in the figure.When the paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer process, it passes through the gap between the press rollerand the heat roller, which is heated by fixing heaters M and S (FH-M and FH-S), where pressure is applied by thepressure springs so that toner on the paper is melted and fused onto the paper.When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller and the press roller by their separationclaws and is ejected out of the fixing section by the rotation of the fixing eject pulley and roller.The fixing web roller in contact with the heat roller cleans the surface of the heat roller.
Figure 2-1-35 Fixing section
1 Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)2 Fixing unit thermostat (FTS)3 Fixing stay4 Lower front fixing guide5 Fixing housing6 Lower cleaning roller7 Press roller8 Press roller separation claw
9 Lower fixing eject guide0 Upper fixing eject guide! Heat roller separation claw@ Heat roller# Fixing web roller$ Cleaning pressure roller% Fixing heater S (FH-S)^ Fixing heater M (FH-M)
2BC/D
2-1-32
AC power sourceNoisefilter
Phasecontrolcircuit
PSPCB
CN2-8
CN2-9CN2-7CN17-7
CN1 CN1
CN2-5
CN2-6
CN12-1
CN12-2
CN9-2
CN9-1
TB1TB2
FTS
COMLIVE
PRYTB3
FH-1
FH-2
EPCBMPCB
FH-M REM
FH-S REMZ CROSS SIG
Figure 2-1-36 Fixing section block diagram
FH-M REM
FH-S REM
MSW
DB REM
PRY
CL REM
MS
W: O
N
Prim
ary
stab
iliza
tion
fixin
g te
mpe
ratu
re 1
65°C
/329
°F
Sec
onda
ry s
tabi
lizat
ion
fixin
g te
mpe
ratu
re 1
85°C
/365
°F
Agi
ng e
nd
Cop
ying
ena
bled
3 s
2 s
600 ms
PCM
PCM REM
250 ms
150 ms
Timing chart 2-1-10 Fixing temperature control
a 2 s after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the power relay (PRY) turns on.b 1 s after the power relay (PRY) turns on, fixing heater M (FH-M) turns on to heat the heat roller.c When the fixing temperature reaches the primary stabilization temperature (165°C/329°F), the paper conveying motor
(PCM) turns on. 150 ms later, the DB REM signal and the cleaning lamp (CL) turn on, and 250 ms later, the paperconveying motor (PCM) turns on to start aging.
e When the fixing temperature reaches the secondary stabilization temperature (185°C/365°F), fixing heater M (FH-M)turns on and off to maintain the fixing control temperature at 185°C/365°F.
d 3 s after copying is enabled, the paper conveying motor (PCM) turns off. 600 ms later, the DB REM signal and thecleaning lamp turn off and the aging ends.
2BC/D
2-1-33
2-1-9 Feedshift and eject sections
The feedshift and eject sections switch the paper path based on the copy mode and eject paper or convey the paper tothe duplex section.For duplex copy mode, the paper for which copying on the rear side has been completed is conveyed to the duplexsection by the feedshift section operation. After the conveyed paper is inverted, it is fed again for front side copying.
Figure 2-1-37 Feedshift and eject sections
EPCB
CN3-A2
ESW
FSSW
FSSOL
FDESWCN19-B6CN3-A7
CN3-A8
CN3-A5
Figure 2-1-38 Feedshift and eject sections block diagram
1 Upper feedshift guide2 Upper eject guide3 Upper eject pulley4 Eject roller5 Feedshift guide6 Lower left feedshift eject guide7 Feedshift switch (FSSW)8 Lower right feedshift roller9 Lower right feedshift guide0 Upper left feedshift roller! Lower feedshift guide@ Eject switch (ESW)# Left middle feedshift guide$ Right switchback guide% Left switchback guide^ Right switchback roller& Left switchback roller* Upper right switchback guide( Face down eject switch
(FDESW)) Eject pulley⁄ Lower fixing eject roller¤ Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
2BC/D
2-1-34
2-1-10 Duplex section
As paper is conveyed from the feedshift section into the duplex section, the switchback feedshift guide shifts the paperpath to switch-back the paper for refeeding or reverse side ejection. The paper is then conveyed to the feedshift andeject section.
Figure 2-1-39 Duplex section
1 Duplex upper registration roller2 Duplex upper conveying roller3 Duplex upper eject roller4 Duplex upper confluence guide5 Duplex lower confluence guide6 Duplex lower eject roller7 Duplex eject switch (DUPESW)8 Duplex lower conveying roller9 Duplex paper conveying switch 2
(DUPPCSW2)0 Refeed roller! Duplex lower registration roller@ Duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1)
# Switchback feedshift guide$ Duplex refeed guide% Duplex feedshift switch
(DUPFSSW)^ Refeed pulley& Duplex upper entry guide* Duplex switchback pulley( Duplex switchback roller) Duplex jam detection switch
(DUPJSW)⁄ Duplex pressure release solenoid
(DUPPRSOL)¤ Duplex eject switching solenoid
(DUPESSOL)
2BC/D
2-1-35
CN
6-7
CN
6-8
DU
PE
SS
OL
P
DU
PE
SS
OL
A
CN
6-3
CN
6-4
CN
6-12
CN
6-11
CN
6-5
CN
6-2
CN
6-9
CN
6-10
DU
PP
RS
OL
P
DU
PP
RS
OL
A
CN
6-6
DUPESSOL
DUPFSSW
DUPPCSW1
DUPPCSW2
DUPREVCLDUPFWDCL
DUPESW
DUPPRSOL
DUPJSW
EPCB
Figure 2-1-40 Duplex section block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-36
ESW
DUPJSW
DUPFSSWRCL
FSSOL
DUPPRSOL
DUPESSOL
DUPFWDCL
DUPREVCL
500 ms 90 ms
30 ms
730 ms
100 ms 120 ms
50 ms
ES
W: O
n
ES
W: O
ff
DU
PF
SS
W: O
n
DU
PF
SS
W: O
ff
DU
PJS
W: O
n
ES
W: O
ff
Sec
onda
ry p
aper
feed
sta
rt
Timing chart 2-1-11 Duplex copying operation
a When copying onto the reverse side, 500 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on, the feedshift solenoid(FSSOL) turns on, operating the conveying shift guide to switch the paper path to the duplex unit.
b When the eject switch (ESW) turns on, the duplex eject switching solenoid (DUPESSOL) turns on to operate theswitchback feedshift guide.
c When the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turns on, the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns on, rotatingthe duplex switchback roller in the forward direction to convey paper to the duplex section.
d 90 ms after the eject switch (ESW) turns off, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns off.e 100 ms after the duplex feedshift switch (DUPFSSW) turns off, the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns off.f 50 ms after the duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) turns off, the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL) turns on
to rotate the duplex switchback roller in the reverse direction.g 30 ms after the paper enters the duplex section and the duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) turns on, the duplex
pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) turns on and the duplex switchback pulley lowers. The paper is thenswitched back by the duplex switchback pulley and duplex switchback roller and re-fed by the refeed roller.
h 120 ms after the duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) turns on, the duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL)turns off and the duplex switchback roller stops.
i 730 ms after the duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) turns on, the duplex pressure release solenoid(DUPPRSOL) turns off.
j When copying onto the front face is complete and the eject switch (ESW) turns off, the duplex eject switchingsolenoid (DUPESSOL) turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-37
2-1-11 DF
(1) Original feed sectionThe original feed section consists of the parts shown in Figure. An original placed on the original table is conveyed to theoriginal switchback section or the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-41 Original feed section
OFSW
OFSOL
OFCL
OFM
DFDPCB
CN
6-B
5
CN
5-B
12 -
C
N5-
B13
CN
5-A
5
CN
6-B
2
CN
5-B
1 -
CN
5-B
6
OSSW
Figure 2-1-42 Original feed section block diagram
1 Original table2 DF forwarding pulleys3 DF original feed pulley4 DF separation pulley5 DF original feed upper guide6 DF original feed lower guide7 Original stopper8 DF registration pulley
9 DF registration roller0 DF registration guide! Original set switch (OSSW)@ Original feed switch (OFSW)# Original feed clutch (OFCL)$ Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)% Original feed lift
2BC/D
2-1-38
(1-1) Original feed timing
OFSOL A
OFSOL R
OFCL
OFSW
OSBSW
OCM
DFTSW
OffOFM
10 ms 150 ms
200 ms150 ms
298 P* 20 ms
Fwd. rotation
Rev. rotation
*Burst of OFM pulses
Timing chart 2-1-12 Original feed (in simple-sided original mode)
a The OFSOL A signal goes high for 10 ms and then turns off for 200 ms. It goes high again for 150 ms and the originalfeed solenoid (OFSOL) turns on, raising the original feed lift to convey the original forward.
b 298 OFM pulses after the leading edge of the original turns the original feed switch (OFSW) on, the original feedclutch (OFCL) and original feed motor (OFM) turn off. 20 ms later, the rotation of the motor switches to the reversedirection and secondary original feed is performed by rotation of the DF registration roller.
c Simultaneously as the trailing edge of the original turns the original feed switch (OFSW) off, the original feed motor(OFM) turns off.
d After ejection of the original, as the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off, the OFSOL R signal turns on for 150ms and the original feed solenoid (OFSOL) turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-39
(2) Original switchback sectionThe original switchback section consists of the parts shown in Figure. The original from the original feed section ororiginal conveying section is reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
Figure 2-1-43 Original switchback section
1 Switchback pulley2 Switchback roller3 Switchback feedshift guide4 Left switchback guide5 Switchback guide6 Original switchback switch (OSBSW)7 Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL)8 Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL)
DFDPCB
CN
6-A
5
CN
5-B
8
CN
5-A
2 -
CN
5-A
3
OSBSW
SBPSOL SBFSSOL
Figure 2-1-44 Original switchback section block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-40
(2-1) Operation of original switchbackIn the double-sided original mode, the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns on, changing the position of theswitchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section to where the originalis fed.The switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) then turns off, allowing the switchback feedshift guide to return to theoriginal position by which the path of the original is switched back to the original conveying section. The now reversedoriginal is carried to the original conveying section and the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, releasingthe switchback pulley to prevent an original jam in the original switchback section.
Switchbackpulley
Switchback feedshift guide
Figure 2-1-45
2BC/D
2-1-41
(3) Original conveying sectionThe original conveying section consists of the parts shown in Figure. Synchronized with the copier scanning operation,the original is conveyed across the slit glass and ejected when scanning is complete.In the double-sided original mode, the eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) turns on, moving the eject feedshift guide toswitch the path of the original. When the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original is complete, the original isconveyed to the original switchback section again.
Figure 2-1-46 Original conveying section
1 Upper original conveying pulley2 Upper original conveying roller3 Lower original conveying roller4 Front scanning pulley5 Middle original conveying roller6 Middle original conveying pulley7 Eject pulley8 Eject roller
9 Original conveying guide0 Eject feedshift guide! Upper eject guide@ Lower eject guide# Slit glass (copier)$ DF timing switch (DFTSW)% Eject feedshift solenoid
(EFSSOL)
DFTSW
DFDPCBCN
6-B
14
CN
5-A
7
CN
5-A
8 -
CN
5-A
13
EFSSOL
OCM
Figure 2-1-47 Original conveying section block diagram
2BC/D
2-1-42
(3-1) Original switchback/conveying timing
298 P*1
100 ms
30 ms
78 P*2
135 P*1
20 ms
Fwd. rotationOffOFM
Rev. rotation
OFSW
SBFSSOL
SBPSOL R
SBPSOL A
OSBSW
OCM
EFSSOL
DFTSW
Scanning speed
Scanning speed
*1 Burst of OFM pulses*2 Burst of OCM pulses
Timing chart 2-1-13 Reversing the first face of the original
a During primary original feed, when the original feed switch (OFSW) turns on, the switchback feedshift solenoid(SBFSSOL) also turns on, changing the position of the switchback feedshift guide. This switches the path of theoriginal to the original switchback section.
b 298 OFM pulses plus 20 ms after the original feed switch (OFSW) turns on, the rotation of the original feed motor(OFM) switches to the reverse direction and the original is conveyed to the switchback section by the rotation of theswitchback roller.
c Simultaneously as the original feed switch (OFSW) turns off, the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns on tooperate the switchback pulley.
d When the trailing edge of the original turns the original switchback switch (OSBSW) off, the switchback feedshiftsolenoid (SBFSSOL) turns off, the switchback feedshift guide returns to the original position.
e 135 OFM pulses after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off. 100ms later, the original feed motor (OFM) rotates forward, switching the rotational direction of the switchback roller. Theoriginal in the original switchback section is then reversed and conveyed to the original conveying section.
f Simultaneously as the original feed motor (OFM) starts rotating forward, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns onto convey the original onto the slit glass. The eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) simultaneously turns on, changingthe position of the eject feedshift guide. This switches the path of the original to the original switchback section.
g When the original is conveyed onto the slit glass, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns on. 78 OCM pulses later, theswitchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL).
h 30 ms after the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.
2BC/D
2-1-43
362 P*1
2252 P*2 + 30 ms
100 ms
30 ms
135 P*1
78 P*2
327 P*1 100 ms
30 ms
Scanning request signal: On
Scanning speed
Scanning speed
*1 Burst of OFM pulses*2 Burst of OCM pulses
Fwd. rotation
OFMRev. rotation
OFSW
SBFSSOL
SBPSOL
SBPSOL
OSBSW
OCM
EFSSOL
DFTSW
Timing chart 2-1-14 Reversing of the second face of the original and ejection
a 362 OFM pulses after the scanning of the first face (reverse face) of the original completes and the DF timing switch(DFTSW) turns off, the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns on, operationg the switchback pulley.
b When the trailing edge of the original turns the original switchback switch (OSBSW) off, the eject feedshift solenoid(EFSSOL) turns off and the eject feedshift guide returns to the original position, switching the path of the original tothe eject section. Simultaneously,the switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) turns off and the switchback feedshift guide returns to the originalposition.
c 30 ms after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off.d 135 OFM pulses after the original switchback switch (OSBSW) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.e 100 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the motor starts rotating forward, switching the rotational
direction of the switchback roller. The original in the original switchback section is then reversed and conveyed to theoriginal conveying section.
f 327 OFM pulses plus 100 ms after the original feed motor (OFM) turns off, the motor starts rotating forward again andthe original conveying motor (OCM) turns on simultaneously, conveying the original onto the slit glass.
g 78 OFM pulses after the original is conveyed onto the slit glass and the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns on, theswitchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off.
h 30 ms after the switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) turns off, the original feed motor (OFM) turns off.i When the scanning request signal turns on, scanning of the second face (front face) of the original starts.j 2252 OCM pulses plus 30 ms after scanning of the second face (front face) of the original completes and the DF
timing switch (DFTSW) turns off, the original conveying motor (OCM) turns off, completing the ejection of the original.
2BC/D
2-2-1
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout
(1) PCBs
Figure 2-2-1 PCBs
1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs and electrical components. 2. Engine PCB (EPCB)..................................... Controls electrical components and optional devices. 3. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ........................ Generates 24 V DC, +12 V DC, 3.4 V DC and 5 V DC; controls fixing
heaters M and S. 4. High voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) .... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer. 5. CCD PCB (CCDPCB)................................... Reads the image off originals. 6. Humidity sensor PCB (HUMPCB) ................ Detects absolute humidity. 7. Operation unit left PCB (OPCB-L) ................ Controls touch panel and LCD indication. 8. Operation unit right PCB (OPCB-R) ............. Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs. 9. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.10. Scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) ....................... Controls the scanning section.
6
3
2
4
1
5
9 7 8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
10
2BC/D
2-2-2
(2) Switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors
1. Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.2. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.3. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the right cover is opened.
4. Bypass paper switch (BYPPSW) ................. Detects the presence of paper on the bypass tray. 5. Bypass paper size length switch
(BYPPLSW) ................................................. Detects the length of paper on the bypass tray. 6. Bypass paper size width switch
(BYPPWSW) ................................................ Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray. 7. Bypass tray switch (BYPTSW) ..................... Detects a multi-bypass extension is pulled. 8. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing. 9. Paper feed switch 1 (PFSW1) ...................... Detects a paper misfeed in the converging section.10. Paper feed switch 2 (PFSW2) ...................... Controls feed high/low clutch 1 and detects a paper misfeed.11. Paper feed switch 3 (PFSW3) ...................... Controls feed high/low clutch 2 and detects a paper misfeed.12. Paper feed switch 4 (PFSW4) ...................... Controls feed clutch 3 and detects a paper misfeed.13. Paper feed switch 5 (PFSW5) ...................... Controls feed clutch 4 and detects a paper misfeed.14. Paper feed switch 6 (PFSW6) ...................... Controls feed clutch 5 and detects a paper misfeed.15. Eject switch (ESW) ....................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.16. Feed shift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the feed shift section.
50 4249
551
47
6
13
1
2
15
14
17
32
28
4345
46
47
48
1822
19
23
31
20243936
29
26
37
383334
44
35
40
30
2521
27
9
12
11
10
52
53
3
16 8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
41
2BC/D
2-2-3
17. Face down eject switch (FDESW) ............... Detects a paper misfeed in the face down eject section.18. Lift limit switch 1 (LILSW1) ........................... Detects the drawer 1 lift reaching the upper limit.19. Lift limit switch 2 (LILSW2) ........................... Detects the drawer 2 lift reaching the upper limit.20. Deck lift limit switch 1 (DLILSW1) ................ Detects the drawer 3 lift reaching the upper limit.21. Deck lift limit switch 2 (DLILSW2) ................ Detects the drawer 4 lift reaching the upper limit.22. Paper switch 1 (PSW1) ................................ Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 1.23. Paper switch 2 (PSW2) ................................ Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 2.24. Deck paper switch 1 (DPSW1) ..................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 3.25. Deck paper switch 2 (DPSW2) ..................... Detects the presence of paper in the drawer 4.26. Duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) .............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex paper conveying section.27. Duplex paper conveying switch 2
(DUPPCSW2) .............................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex paper conveying section.28. Duplex eject switch (DUPESW).................... Detects a paper misfeed in the switch back eject section.29. Duplex jam detection switch (DUPJSW) ...... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex tray section.30. Duplex feed shift switch (DUPFSSW) .......... Detects a paper misfeed in the duplex feed shift section.31. Deck right switch (DSW-R) ........................... Detects the presence of drawer 3.32. Deck left switch (DSW-L) .............................. Detects the presence of drawer 4.33. Deck right paper level switch 1
(DPLSW1-R) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 3.34. Deck right paper level switch 2
(DPLSW2-R) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 3.35. Deck right paper level switch 3
(DPLSW3-R) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 3.36. Deck left paper level switch 1
(DPLSW1-L) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 4.37. Deck left paper level switch 2
(DPLSW2-L) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 4.38. Deck left paper level switch 3
(DPLSW3-L) ................................................ Detects the paper level in the drawer 4.39. Deck paper conveying switch 1
(DPCSW1) ................................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the deck paper conveying section.40. Deck paper conveying switch 2
(DPCSW2) ................................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the deck paper conveying section.41. Scanner home position switch (SHPSW) ..... Detects the optical system in the home position.42. Original detection switch (ODSW) ................ Operates the original size detection sensor.43. Waste toner detection sensor (WTDS) ......... Detects the waste toner over flow in the waste toner box.44. Waste toner box switch (WTBSW) ............... Detects the weight of the waste toner box.45. Upper paper width switch (PWSW-U) .......... Detects the width of paper in the drawer 1.46. Lower paper width switch (PWSW-L) ........... Detects the width of paper in the drawer 2.47. Upper paper length switch (PLSW-U) .......... Detects the length of paper in the drawer 1.48. Lower paper length switch (PLSW-L) .......... Detects the length of paper in the drawer 2.49. Original size detection sensor 1
(OSDS1) ...................................................... Detects the size of the original.50. Original size detection sensor 2
(OSDS2)*1 ................................................... Detects the size of the original.51. Toner level detection sensor (TLDS) ............ Detects the toner level in the toner hopper.52. Toner sensor (TNS) ...................................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit.53. Drum surface potential sensor (DSPS) ........ Detects the drum surface potential.
*1: For inch models only.
2BC/D
2-2-4
(3) Motors
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1. Image formation motor (IFM) ....................... Drives image formation section. 2. Paper conveying motor (PCM) ..................... Drives paper conveying section and fixing section. 3. Paper feed motor (PFM) ............................... Drives paper feed section. 4. Deck drive motor (DDM) ............................... Drives deck paper feed section. 5. Scanner motor (SM) ..................................... Drives the optical system. 6. Image formation fan motor (IFFM) ............... Cools the image formation section. 7. Toner feed motor (TFM) ................................ Replenishes toner. 8. Toner agitation motor (TAM) ......................... Agitates toner. 9. Upper lift motor (LM-U) ................................ Drives drawer 1 lift.10. Lower lift motor (LM-L) ................................. Drives drawer 2 lift.11. Deck right lift motor (DLM-R) ........................ Drives drawer 3 lift.12. Deck left lift motor (DLM-L) .......................... Drives drawer 4 lift.13. Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM) ......... Cleans main charger wire and grid.14. Transfer charger cleaning motor (TCCM) ..... Cleans transfer charger wire.15. Paper conveying fan motor (PCFM) ............. Attracts paper towards the conveying belt.16. Cooling fan motor (CFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior.17. Eject fan motor 1 (EFM1) ............................ Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).18. Eject fan motor 2 (EFM2) ............................ Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).19. Fixing fan motor (FFM) ................................. Cools the machine interior (around the fixing unit).20. HDD fan motor (HDDFM) ............................. Cools the machine interior (Hard disk drive).21. Power supply fan motor (PSFM) .................. Cools the machine interior (around the power supply unit).
17
5
13
1514
1
6
7
8
16
3
219
20
9
10
1112
21
4
18
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
2BC/D
2-2-5
(4) Clutches and solenoids
Figure 2-2-4 Clutches and Solenoids
1. Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray. 2. Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed. 3. Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) ........................ Controls the drive of upper feed roller. 4. Feed low clutch 1 (FCL1-L) .......................... Controls the drive of upper feed roller. 5. Feed high clutch 1 (FCL1-H) ........................ Controls the drive of lower feed roller. 6. Feed low clutch 2 (FCL2-L) .......................... Controls the drive of lower feed roller. 7. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller A. 8. Feed clutch 4 (FCL4) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller B. 9. Feed clutch 5 (FCL5) .................................... Controls the drive of vertical conveying roller C and D.10. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ........................ Primary paper feed from the drawer 1.11. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ........................ Primary paper feed from the drawer 2.12. Paper feed clutch 3 (PFCL3) ........................ Primary paper feed from the drawer 3.13. Paper feed clutch 4 (PFCL4) ........................ Primary paper feed from the drawer 4.14. Deck feed clutch (DFCL) .............................. Controls the drive of deck feed roller.15. Duplex forwarding clutch (DUPFWDCL) ...... Conveys paper forward.16. Duplex reversing clutch (DUPREVCL) ......... Conveys paper in the reverse direction.17. Bypass solenoid (BYPSOL) ......................... Operates the bypass forwarding pulley.18. Feed shift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feed shift guide.19. Fixing web solenoid (FWEBSOL) ................ Drives the fixing web roller.20. Duplex pressure release solenoid
(DUPPRSOL) ............................................... Operates the duplex switch back pulley.21. Duplex eject switching solenoid
(DUPESSOL) ............................................... Operates the switch back feedshift guide.
21
18
19
20
17
16 15
14
13
10
9
12
811
12
45
3
7
6
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
2BC/D
2-2-6
(5) Other electrical components
7
11
12
13
2
9
16
14
15
3,4
1
10
6
5
8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-5 Other electrical components
1. Exposure lamp (EL) ...................................... Exposes originals. 2. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface. 3. Pre-cleaning lamp 1 (PCL1) ......................... 4. Pre-cleaning lamp 2 (PCL2) ......................... 5. Laser scanner unit (LSU)
• Polygon motor (PM) ................................... Drives the polygon mirror.• Laser diode (LD) ........................................ Generates the laser beam.
6. Fixing heater M (FH-M) ................................ Heats the heat roller. 7. Fixing heater S (FH-S) ................................. Heats the heat roller. 8. Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ......................... Prevents overheating in the fixing section. 9. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.10. Hard disk drive (HDD) .................................. Enables printing, special purpose copying and Box management
function.11. Power relay (PRY) ........................................ Turns the AC power and 24 V DC power supplies to the fixing section on
and off.12. Total counter (TC) ......................................... Displays the total number of copies produced.13. Scanner dehumidify heater (SH)* ................ Dehumidifies the scanner unit.14. Dehumidify heater (DH1) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 1 and 2 section.15. Dehumidify heater (DH2) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 3 section.16. Dehumidify heater (DH3) ............................. Dehumidifies the drawer 4 section.
*: Option
2BC/D
2-2-7
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
1
2
(6) DF PCBs
Figure 2-2-6 DF PCBs
1. DF driver PCB (DFDPCB) ........................... Controls electrical components of the DF. 2. Original set LED PCB (OSLEDPCB) ........... Indicates presence of originals on the DF or an original jam.
2BC/D
2-2-8
y 8
73
5
2
4
16
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
(7) DF switches and sensors
Figure 2-2-7 DF switches and sensors
1. DF safety switch 1 (DFSSW1) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF is opened; resets original misfeeddetection.
2. DF safety switch 2 (DFSSW2) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF original switchback cover isopened; resets original misfeed detection.
3. Original set switch (OSSW) ......................... Detects the presence of an original.4. Original feed switch (OFSW) ....................... Detects primary original feed end timing.5. Original switchback switch (OSBSW) .......... Detects an original misfeed in the original switchback section.6. DF timing switch (DFTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.7. Original size length switch (OSLSW) ........... Detects the length of the original.8. Original size width switch (OSWSW) ........... Detects the width of the original.
2BC/D
2-2-9
2
1
Machine front Machine inside
Machine rear
(8) DF motors
Figure 2-2-8 DF motors
1. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the original feed and switchback sections.2. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying section.
2BC/D
2-2-10
5
1
42 3
Machine front Machine inside Machine rear
(9) DF clutches and solenoids
Figure 2-2-9 DF clutches and solenoids
1. Original feed solenoid (OFSOL) ................... Operates the paper feed lift.2. Switchback feedshift solenoid
(SBFSSOL) .................................................. Operates the switchback feedshift guide.3. Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL) .............. Operates the eject feedshift guide.4. Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL).... Operates the switchback pulley.5. Original feed clutch (OFCL) ......................... Controls the drive of the DF original feed pulley.
2BC/D
2-3-1
2-3-1 Power source PCB
AC input
Power source PCB
Transformer
F1
D1
C22
R35
R34
FH-M
DH1DH2DH3
Q3 Q4
D13
L6
L4
Q5
GND
Z CROSS SIG
SLEEP SIG
GND
GND
GND
PSFM
24 V DC
5.2 V DC
3.3 V DC
12 V DC
D14
D12
A
A
B
B
FH-S
Over-voltage/
over-current
detection circuit
PC3
PC1
PC2
12 V DCoutput
circuit IC5
3.3 V DC output
circuit IC4
24 V DC output circuit
IC2
5.2 V DC
output circuit
IC3
TR2
TR1
PT2
PT1
MSW
Noise filter
circuit L1
Noise filter
circuit L2
TR3 PT3
FH-M REMDH
FH-S REM
Zero-cross circuit
Rectifiercircuit
PWM control circuit IC1
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram
2BC/D
2-3-2
The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator which converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC, 5.2 V DC, 3.3 VDC and 12 V DC. It includes the components shown in Figure 2-3-1; noise filter circuits, a rectifier circuit, a PWM controlcircuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5.2 V DC output circuit, a 3.3 V DC output circuit, a 12 V DC output circuit, a fixing heatercontrol circuit, an overvoltage/overcurrent detection circuit.The noise filter circuit, consisting mainly of noise filter circuits L1 and L2 in the power source section and capacitors,attenuates external noise from the AC input and prevents switching noise generated by the power source circuit fromleaving the machine via the AC line. Choke coil L4 prevents the noise generated in the heater circuit when the heater turnson from leaving the machine via the AC line.The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input which has passed through the noise filter circuits L1 and L2 using thediode bridge D1.In the PWM control circuit, PWM controller IC1 turns FETs Q1 and Q2 on and off to convert DC voltage full-wave rectified viadiode bridge D1 and smoothed by electrolytic capacitor C22 to a high-frequency voltage, which is applied to the primary coilof the transformer.The 24 V DC output circuit smooths the current induced on the secondary coil of the transformer via diodes D12, D13 andD14 and smoothing choke coil L6, providing a more stable 24 V DC through 24 V DC control circuit including IC2. It alsomonitors the 24 V DC output status, which is fed back to PWM controller IC1 in the PWM control circuit via photocouplerPC2. PWM controller IC1 controls the switching duty width of switching FETs Q3 and Q4 based on the output voltage status,producing a stable 24 V DC output.The 5.2 V DC output circuit receives 24 V DC from the 24 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 5.2 V DC via DC/DCconverter controller IC3.The 3.3 V DC output circuit receives 5.2 V DC from the 5.2 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 3.3 V DC via regulatorIC IC4.The 12 V DC output circuit receives 24 V DC from the 24 V DC control circuit and outputs a stable 12 V DC via DC/DCconverter controller IC5.Abnormal rise of voltage for all DC outputs and overcurrent in 5.2 V DC and 12 V DC outputs are monitored by theovervoltage/overcurrent detection circuit, and if any abnormal rise is detected, alarm signals are fed back to the PWMcontrol circuit IC1 via photocoupler PC1 instantly, by which means power supply is limited to the stand-by level. Overload ofthe 24 V DC output is monitored by resistors R34 and R35 as the total sum of all DC output power. If any abnormal conditionis detected, the power supply is latched off. To recover the power supply, remove the cause of abnormality and turn the ACinput off and back on.The fixing heater control circuit sends a zero-crossing signal from the zero-crossing circuit via the photocoupler PC3 to themain PCB (MPCB). These signals are in turn converted into signals to control the on/off timing and phases, which are theninput to the power source PCB (PSPCB) as FH-M REM and FH-S REM signals. The phototriacs PT1 and PT2 are turned onby these signals, and current flows through triacs TR1 and TR2 to turn the fixing heaters FH-M and FH-S on.
2BC/D
2-3-3
CN
12
CN
2
CN
7
CN
8
CN
5
CN
6
CN
4
CN
3C
N13
CN
1C
N9
1 8
71
1
101
9
11
19
1
1
1
5
12
10
CN
11
CN
10 1
1
1 5
3
2
Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram
2BC/D
2-3-4
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionTB
Connectedto the ACpower plugand powerrelay.
CN1
Connectedto thepower relay, enginePCB, mainPCB, andscannerdrive PCB.
CN2
Connectedto the mainPCB,scannerdrive PCB.
CN3
Connectedto thefinisher*,side deck*,DF driverPCB, andoperationunit rightPCB.
CN4
Connectedto thefinisher*,side deck*,and DFdriver PCB.
CN5
Connectedto the mainPCB, DFdriver PCB,tandemprinterPCB*,scannerdrive PCB,engine PCBand sidedeck*.
TB1 LIVE I Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V ACTB2 COM I Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V ACTB3 LIVE OUT O Local voltage 120 V AC or 220-240 V AC via MSW
2 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY3 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY4 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for EPCB5 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for MPCB6 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for SDPCB7 24V O 24 V DC DC power supply for SDPCB8 G(24V) - - Ground for EPCB9 G(R24V) - - Ground for EPCB10 G(R24V) - - Ground for EPCB
2 P.G - - Ground for MPCB3 P.G - - Ground for SDPCB4 P.G - - Ground for SDPCB5 DH I 0 V/5.2 V DC DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off6 SLEEP SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Sleep mode signal: On/Off7 Z CROSS SIG O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse)8 FH-M REM I 0 V/5.2 V DC FH-M: On/Off9 FH-S REM I 0 V/5.2 V DC SH-M: On/Off
1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*2 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*4 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for finisher*5 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for side deck*6 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F201) for side deck*7 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F202) for DFDPCB8 24V O 24 V DC Power supply (via fuse F202) for DFDPCB9 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for OPCB-R
1 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*2 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*3 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*4 P.G - Ground Ground for finisher*7 P.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB8 P.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB9 P.G - Ground Ground for side deck*10 P.G - Ground Ground for side deck*
1 3.4V O 3.3 V DC Power supply for MPCB2 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for DFDPCB3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for DFDPCB4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply (via fuse F301) for side deck*5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for TAMPCB*6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for SDPCB7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB8 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for EPCB9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for EPCB10 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB12 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for MPCB
*: Optional
2BC/D
2-3-5
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
CN6
Connectedto the mainPCB, DFdriver PCB,TandemprinterPCB*,enginePCB, andside deck*.
CN7
Connectedto the harddisk drive.
CN8
Connectedto the mainswitch.
CN9
Connectedto thepower relay.
CN10
Connectedto the fixing
heater Mand fixingheater S.
CN11
Connectedto thepowersource fanmotor.
CN12
Connectedto thedehumiditifyheaters.
1 S.G(3.4V) - Ground Ground for MPCB2 S.G - Ground Ground for DFDPCB3 S.G - Ground Ground for side deck*4 S.G - Ground Ground for SDPCB5 G(5V) - Ground Ground for MPCB6 S.G - Ground Ground for TAMPCB*7 G(5V) - Ground Ground for EPCB8 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB9 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB
10 S.G - Ground Ground for MPCB11 G(5V) - Ground Ground for MPCB
1 12V O 12 V DC Power supply for HDD2 S.G(12V) - Ground Ground for HDD3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for HDD4 S.G - Ground Ground for HDD
1 LIVE OUT O 120 V AC or AC power source to MSW220-240 V AC
3 - I 120 V AC or AC power source via MSW220-240 V AC
5 LIVE IN I 120 V AC or AC power source via MSW220-240 V AC
1 NEUTRAL OUT O 120 V AC or AC power source to PRY220-240 V AC
2 - I 120 V AC or AC power source via PRY220-240 V AC
1 - O 120 V/0 V AC or FH-M: On/Off220-240 V/0 V AC
2 - O 120 V/0 V AC or FH-S: On/Off220-240 V/0 V AC
1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PSFM2 P.G - Ground Ground for PSFM
1 - O 120 V/0 V AC or DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off220-240 V/0 V AC
4 - O 120 V AC AC power source for DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*220-240 V AC
*: Optional
2BC/D
2-3-6
2-3-2 Main PCB
CPU
CL
AN0
INT4INT3INT0TA4TA3TA1
xD0xD1
8M byte × 2
INT3INT4
SDRAM
LCD controller
A/D
8 Mbit × 2
(DBB8:DBB15) (DBB0:DBB15)
(D0:D31)
(A2:A23)
(D0:D15)
CPU
8.29 MHz
INT5INT4INT3INT2INT0
INT
1
xD0
XIO 5
INT CODEC2INT CODEC1INT MCPINT HDDMACK_MMI
(D0:D15)
PCI BUS (32 bit) NSPCB*(CN4)
Buffer
INT C24V OFFMACK MAIN
Compactflashslot
(CN6)
(DBB0:DBB15)
(DBB8:DBB15)
(MD0:MD31)
Flashjig
(CN20)
DIMM*(CN24)
(CD0:CD15)
(CD16:CD31)(D
BB
0:D
BB
31)
CODEC1
CODEC2
HDD(CN2)
(DD0:DD15) MIP 2BC27.5 MHz
MC
PD
(7:0
)
CK
, MR
E,
TV
S, T
HS
VS
, HS
MC
I(7:
0)
CK
, VS
MR
E
LVDS OUTPUT (2CH)
LVDS INPUT (BD)MIP 2BC
26 MHz33.892 MHz
S/HA/D
8 bit × 4CH
LSU(CN8, 9)
CCDPCB(CN14, 15)
Image data(OS1, 2, 3, 4)
256 kbit
2 Mbit
INT1
XIO 1 XIO 4Decorder
INTXIO 1
INT
XIO
4
TMOT CLKAC CONTTC CONTTONER CONTDB CONT (Ladder)GRID CONT (Ladder)
PS
OU
T
D/A
EPCB (CN1)
INTXIO 324 V OFF
To XIO 5
IFM
MO
T C
LKP
CM
MO
T C
LK
XIO 3 XIO 2INT0-3
UART
UART
HPSWDF TIMMIG SW
DF REV SWDF FD SW
DF CMOT Vref (Ladder)S MOT Vref (Ladder)
Terminal I/F
(CN30)
Side deck*(CN13)
Analog switch
DF SIZESP SENSEFIX TH SENSEET TH2HUM SENSETONER SENSE
SCAN MOT CLK
DF CMOT CLK
UART
DF(CN12)
From PSPCB
Finisher*(CN1)
PRIPPCB*(CN3)
ZERO CROSS
SI/FCK, VS, MRE
CK, VS, MRE
PRID (7:0)
TID (7:0)
TAMPCB*(CN5)
TOD(7:0)CK, VS, MRE
CK, VS, MRECK, VS, MRE
UART
FaxPCB*
OPCB-L(CN10,11)
Buffer
8 Mbit
256 kbit × 2
From MIP 2BC
Dual portRAM
12 MHz
*: Optional
LVDS LVDS
Flashmemory
Backup SRAM
Flash memory SRAM
Flash memory
Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram
2BC/D
2-3-7
CN10CN14CN15
12
B1B2A1A2
CN
19
1
192
20
B49B50A49A50
CN4
CN11
B2B1A17
1
7
A16
B17B16A1A2
2
111
1
1
1213
CN
3A
1A
2A
19A
20B
19B
20B
1B
2
CN
20B
1B
2B
29B
30A
29A
30A
1A
2
CN17
8
1 CN2
CN
24
504910099
CN
5
B2
B1
A2
A1
B20
B19
A20
A19
215251
21
391 1
2 32
31 B50
B49
B40
B39
CN
33
CN30
A1
CN
7
CN23 B25B26A25A26
B1B2A1A2 1
4
21
43
B2
A50
A49
CN
34
12
10
A1
A39
A40
A2
B1
B2
1211
CN13 CN12
CN16
40
CN
91
13C
N8
16
CN
6
CN
18
Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram
2BC/D
2-3-8
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN7
Connectedto thepolygonmotorcontrol PCB(LSU).
CN8
Connectedto the BDsensor PCB(LSU).
CN9
Connectedto the LDcontrol PCB(LSU).
CN10
Connectedto theoperationunit leftPCB andoperationunit rightPCB.
1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) PM rotation control clock2 G(5V) - Ground Ground for PM control PCB (LSU)3 START O 0 V/5.2 V DC PM: On/Off4 READY I 0 V/5.2 V DC PM rotation status: Stabilized/Not stabilized
1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for BD sensor PCB (LSU)2 BD- I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronized signal (-)3 BD+ I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronized signal (+)4 G(5V) - Ground Ground for BD sensor PCB (LSU)5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BD sensor PCB (LSU)6 BDREF I 0 V/5.2 V DC BD sensor PCB (LSU) control signal
1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)2 /VD2- O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal3 /VD2+ O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal4 /VD1- O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal6 /VD1+ O 0 V/5.2 V DC Video data signal7 /EN O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD output enable signal: Enable/Not enable8 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)9 /ADJUST2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD power adjust signal (2)
10 G(5V) - Ground Ground for RSW11 /ADJUST1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC LD power adjust signal (1)12 G(5V) - Ground Ground for LD control PCB (LSU)13 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LD control PCB (LSU)
A1 BUZZER O 0 V/5.2 V DC Buzzer: On/OffA2 X1 I 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltageA3 Y1 I 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltageA4 X2 O 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltageA5 Y2 O 0 V to 5 V DC Touch panel detection voltageA6 LCD FRAME O - LCD control signalA7 LCD LOAD O - LCD control signalA8 LCD CP O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD drive clockA9 LCD VSS(S.G) - ground Ground for LCD (OPCB-L)
A10 LCD VDD(5V) O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LCD (OPCB-L)A11 LCD VSS(S.G) - - Ground for LCD (OPCB-L)A12 LCD DISP OFF O 0 V/5.2 V DC LCD: On/OffA13 LCD D0 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD display data (0)A14 LCD D1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD display data (1)A15 LCD D2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD display data (2)A16 LCD D3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LCD display data (3)A17 VEE OFF O 0 V/C V DC LCD power supply control signalB1 NC - - Not usedB2 NC - - Not usedB3 LAMP OFF O 0 V/5.2 V DC LCD back light: On/OffB4 S.GND - Ground Ground for OPCB-RB5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OPCB-RB6 DIG LED 8 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 8B7 DIG LED 7 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 7B8 SCAN 8 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 8B9 SCAN 7 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 7
B10 SCAN 6 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 6B11 DIG KEY 9 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 9B12 DIG KEY 8 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 8B13 DIG KEY 7 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 7B14 DIG KEY 6 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 6B15 DIG KEY 5 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 5B16 DIG KEY 4 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 4
2BC/D
2-3-9
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
1 DIG LED 6 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 62 DIG LED 5 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 53 DIG LED 4 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 44 DIG LED 3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 35 DIG LED 2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 26 DIG LED 1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED drive signal 17 SCAN 4 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 48 SCAN 3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 39 SCAN 2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 2
10 SCAN 1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) LED scan signal 111 DIG KEY 3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 312 DIG KEY 2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 213 DIG KEY 1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) KEY return signal 1
1 OSLED (RED) O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLED (red): On/Off2 OSLED (GN) O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLED (green): On/Off3 SBPSOL (RET) O 0 V/24 V DC SBPSOL (release): On/Off4 SBPSOL (ACT) O 0 V/24 V DC SBPSOL (latch-on): On/Off5 OFCL O 0 V/24 V DC OFCL: On/Off6 EFSSOL O 0 V/24 V DC EFSSOL: On/Off7 OFSOL (RET) O 0 V/24 V DC OFSOL (release): On/Off8 SBFSSOL O 0 V/24 V DC SBFSSOL: On/Off9 OFM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM (enable): On/Off
10 OFSOL (ACT) O 0 V/24 V DC OFSOL (latch-on): On/Off11 OFM CLK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) OFM drive clock pulse12 OFM RET O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM control signal: On/Off13 OCM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM (enable): On/Off14 OFM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC OFM rotational direction switching signal15 OCM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM rotational direction switching signal16 OCM CLK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) OCM drive clock pulse17 OCM M3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal (M3)18 CMOT Vref O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal19 OCM M1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal (M1)20 OCM M2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OCM drive control signal (M2)21 OSBSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSBSW: On/Off22 OFSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OFSW: On/Off23 SET SW I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSLSW: On/Off24 DF SHORT I 0 V/5.2 V DC DF set status: Installed/Not installed25 SZ DET I 0 V/5.2 V DC Original size detection signal26 DFSSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFSSW2: On/Off27 DFSSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFSSW1: On/Off28 SZ SW A I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSWSW: On/Off29 DFTSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DFTSW: On/Off30 S.GND - - Ground for DFDPCB31 NC - - Not used32 NC - - Not used
1 RESET O 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck*: Reset/Normal2 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* set status: Installed/Not installed3 TxD O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmit signal4 S.GND - - Ground for serial communication5 RxD I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication receive signal6 S.GND - - Ground for serial communication7 READY I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* ready signal8 FEED O 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* control signal9 FEED SW I 0 V/5.2 V DC Side deck* control signal
10 FEED REQUEST O 0 V/3.3 V DC Side deck* control signal
CN11
Connectedto theoperationunit leftPCB.
CN12
Connectedto the DFdriver PCB.
CN13
Connectedto the sidedeck*.
*: Optional
2BC/D
2-3-10
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
CN14
Connectedto the CCDPCB.
CN15
Connectedto the CCDPCB.
CN17
Connectedto thepowersourcePCB.
CN18
Connectedto thepowersourcePCB.
1 CLP- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal2 CLP+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal3 RS+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal4 RS- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal5 CLK- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal6 CLK+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal7 SHIFT+ O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal8 SHIFT- O 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB
10 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB
1 OS2+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal2 OS2- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal3 OS1+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal4 OS1- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal5 OS3+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal6 OS3- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal7 OS4+ I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal8 OS4- I 0 V to 12 V DC CCDPCB control signal9 N.C - - Not used
10 +12V O +12 V DC Power supply for CCDPCB11 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground for CCDPCB12 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground for CCDPCB
1 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB2 SLEEP SIG O 0 V/5.2 V DC PSPCB sleep mode: On/Off3 S.G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB4 S.G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB5 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB6 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB7 Z CROSS SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Zero cross signal8 DH REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC DH1*, DH2*, and DH3*: On/Off
1 24V I 24 V DC Power supply from PSPCB2 P.G - Ground Ground from PSPCB3 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB4 S.G - Ground Ground from PSPCB5 3.4V I 3.3 V DC Power supply from PSPCB6 S.G(3.4V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB
2BC/D
2-3-11
2-3-3 Engine PCB
Engine PCB
Clutches andsolenoids
Switches andsensors
Motors
Buffer IC
Main PCB
Figure 2-3-5 Engine PCB block diagram
The engine PCB (EPCB) transmits the status of each switch or sensor to the main PCB (MPCB). It also transmits drivecontrol signals from the main PCB (MPCB) through buffer ICs to motors and clutches.
2BC/D
2-3-12
CN
26
U24
CN8
12 13 11 1022 21 1 2
213132
16151718
1 2
A2A1
B2B1
A2A1
161
B1
A1
14
A9
B921
12
1314
2019
B2B1
A40A39
B40B39
11 12
1
181
91
14
CN
6C
N28
CN
27
CN10
CN3 CN4
CN24
CN
19
CN
18
CN
20
CN
13
CN
22
CN12CN25
13 1
A8
B1A
7B
2
A2
B7
A1
B8
B2
B1
2221
1920
1
16
6
A8A9A1
A2
B1B2B9
B8
1
1
CN11CN2CN5CN9
CN14
CN
7
7
5
48
22 21 19 20B
8B
9
A8
A9
40 39 1 2
A2
A1
A1
B1
A10
B10
Figure 2-3-6 Engine PCB silk-screen diagram
2BC/D
2-3-13
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description CN2
Connectedto thepowersourcePCB.
CN3
Connectedto the paperconveyingunit.
CN4
Connectedto theimageformationunit.
CN5
Connectedto theduplex unit.
1 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB2 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB3 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB4 G(5V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB5 FH-M REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC FH-M: On/Off6 FH-S REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC SH-M: On/Off7 5V I 5.2 V DC Power supply from PSPCB
A1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for ESWA2 ESW SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC ESW: On/OffA3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for ESWA4 G(5V) - Ground Ground for FSSWA5 FSSW SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC FSSW: On/OffA6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FSSWA7 FSSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC FSSOL (A): On/OffA8 FSSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC FSSOL (P): On/OffA9 24V - 24 V DC Power supply for FSSOLB1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for RSWB2 RSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC RSW: On/OffB3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for RSWB4 PCFM O 0 V/24 V DC PCFM: On/OffB5 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCFMB6 TCCM REV O 0 V/12 V DC TCCM reverse rotation: On/OffB7 TCCM FWD O 0 V/12 V DC TCCM forward rotation: On/OffB8 FFM O 0 V/24 V DC FFM: On/OffB9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FFM
1 TFM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off(pseudo)
2 TFM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off(pseudo)
3 TAM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off(pseudo)
4 TAM O 24 V/0 V AC TFM: On/Off(pseudo)
5 MCCM FWD O 0 V/12 V DC MCCM forward rotation: On/Off6 MCCM REV O 0 V/12 V DC MCCM reverse rotation: On/Off7 G(5V) - - Ground for TNS8 OUT O 0V to 5 V DC TNS control voltage9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for TNS
10 TNS I 0V to 5 V DC TNS sensing voltage11 CL O 0 V/24 V DC CL: On/Off12 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for CL13 PCL1 O 0 V/24 V DC PCL1: On/Off14 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCL115 PCL2 O 0 V/24 V DC PCL2: On/Off16 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCL217 G(5V) - Ground Ground for TLDS18 TLDS I 0V to 5 V DC TLDS sensing voltage19 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for TLDS20 NC - - Not used
1 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPESSOL2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPPRSOL3 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPFWDCL4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DUPREVCL5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DUPJSW, DUPFSSW,
DUPPCSW1, DUPPCSW2, and DUPESW6 S.G - Ground Ground for DUPJSW, DUPFSSW,
DUPPCSW1, DUPPCSW2, and DUPESW
2BC/D
2-3-14
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN6
Connectedto theduplex unit.
CN7
Connectedto the upperpaper widthswitch,lower paperwidthswitch, liftlimit switch1, lift limitswitch 2,paperswitch 1,paperswitch 2,paper feedclutch 1,paper feedclutch 2,and mainswitch.
CN8
Connectedto the decklift limitswitch 1,deck paperswitch,paper feedclutch 3,deck leftswitch,deck rightswitch,deck left liftmotor, anddeck rightlift motor.
1 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Duplex unit set status: Installed/Not installed2 DUPJSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPJSW: On/Off3 DUFSSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUFSSW: On/Off4 DUPPCSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPPCSW1: On/Off5 DUPPCSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPPCSW2: On/Off6 DUPESW I 0 V/5.2 V DC DUPESW: On/Off7 DUPESSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC DUPESSOL (P): On/Off8 DUPESSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC DUPESSOL (A): On/Off9 DUPPRSOL P O 0 V/24 V DC DUPPRSOL (P): On/Off10 DUPPRSOL A O 0 V/24 V DC DUPPRSOL (A): On/Off11 DUPFWDCL O 0 V/24 V DC DUPFWDCL: On/Off12 DUPREVCL O 0 V/24 V DC DUPREVCL: On/Off
1 PWSW-U DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (0): On/Off2 PWSW-U DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (1): On/Off3 PWSW-U DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-U (2): On/Off4 S.GND - Ground Ground for PWSW-U5 S.GND - Ground Ground for LILSW16 LILSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC LILSW1: On/Off7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LILSW18 S.GND - Ground Ground for PSW19 PSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PSW1: On/Off10 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PSW111 PFCL1 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off12 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL113 S.GND - Ground Ground for PLSW-U14 PLSW-U I 0 V/5.2 V DC PLSW-U: On/Off15 S.GND - Ground Ground for PLSW-L16 PLSW-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC PLSW-L: On/Off17 PWSW-L DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (0): On/Off18 PWSW-L DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (1): On/Off19 PWSW-L DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PWSW-L (2): On/Off20 S.GND - Ground Ground for PWSW-L21 S.GND - Ground Ground for LILSW222 LILSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC LILSW2: On/Off23 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for LILSW224 S.GND - Ground Ground for PSW225 PSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PSW2: On/Off26 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PSW227 PFCL2 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off28 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL230 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for MSW31 MSW OFF REM O 0 V/24 V DC MSW: Off/Normal
1 S.GND - Ground Ground for DLILSW12 DLILSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DLILSW1: On/Off3 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DLILSW14 S.GND - Ground Ground for DPSW15 DPSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPSW1: On/Off6 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPSW17 PFCL3 O 0 V/24 V DC PFCL3: On/Off8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFCL39 S.GND - Ground Ground for DSW-L10 DSW-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DSW-L: On/Off11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DSW-L12 S.GND - Ground Ground for DSW-R13 DSW-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DSW-R: On/Off14 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DSW-R15 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DLM-L16 DLM-L O 0 V/24 V DC DLM-L: On/Off17 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DLM-R18 DLM-R O 0 V/24 V DC DLM-R: On/Off
2BC/D
2-3-15
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN9
Connectedto thebypasspaperswitch,bypass trayswitch,bypasssolenoid,bypasspaper feedclutch, andbypasspaperswitch.
CN10
Connectedto thescannerdrive PCB.
CN11
Connectedto thepower relayand powersourcePCB.
CN12
Connectedto the highvoltagetransformerPCB.
A1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BYPPLSWA2 BYPPLSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPLSW: On/OffA3 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPPLSWA4 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPTSWA5 BYPTSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPTSW: On/OffA6 BYPPWSW DIG0 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (0): On/OffA7 BYPPWSW DIG1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (1): On/OffA8 BYPPWSW DIG2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPWSW (2): On/OffA9 S.GND - Ground Ground for BYPPWSWB1 NC - - Not usedB2 NC - - Not usedB3 BYPSOL O 0 V/24 V DC BYPSOL: On/OffB4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for BYPSOLB5 BYPPFCL O 0 V/24 V DC BYPPFCL: On/OffB6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for BYPPFCLB7 G(5V) - - Ground for BYPPSWB8 BYPPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC BYPPSW: On/OffB9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for BYPPSW
1 OSDS1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off2 OSDS2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2*: On/Off3 ODSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off4 SM Vref O 0 V to 5 V DC SM current control voltage5 SM M1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M1)6 SM M2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M2)7 SM M3 O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M3)8 NC - - -9 NC - - -
10 SM CLK I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) SM drive control clock11 SM CWB O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM rotation direction switching signal12 SM RET O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive control signal13 SM ENABLE O 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive : Enable/Not enable14 EL ON REM O 5.2 V DC EL: On/Off15 SHPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off16 G(5V) - Ground Ground for SDPCB
1 R24V I 24 V DC DC power source via PRY2 R24V I 24 V DC DC power source via PRY3 G(R24V) - - Ground from PSPCB4 G(R24V) - - Ground from PSPCB5 G(24V) - - Ground from PSPCB6 24V I 24 V DC DC power source from PSPCB
1 PTC ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC PTC output status: Normal/Abnormal2 PTC REM O 0 V/24 V DC PTC: On/Off3 TC REM O 0 V/24 V DC TC: On/Off4 TC CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC TC output control voltage5 SC REM O 0 V/24 V DC SC: On/Off6 SC CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC SC output control voltage7 SC/TC ALM I 24 V/0 V DC SC and TC output status: Normal/Abnormal8 DB CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC DB output control voltage9 DB REM O 0 V/24 V DC DB: On/Off
10 G CONT O 0 V to 5 V DC Main charger grid control voltage11 MC ALM I 24 V/0 V DC MC output status: Normal/Abnormal12 MC REM O 0 V/24 V DC MC: On/Off13 GND(24V) - Ground Ground for HVTPCB14 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for HVTPCB
*: Inch model only.
2BC/D
2-3-16
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN13
Connectedto thesafetyswitch 1,safetyswitch 2,and powersourcePCB.
CN14
Connectedto the HDDfan motor,fixing websolenoid,drumsurfacepotentialsensor,imageformationfan motor,andpolygonmotor(LSU).
CN15
Connectedto theimageformationmotor andpaperconveyingmotor.
CN16
Connectedto the paperfeed motor,deck drivemotor, andwaste tonerdetectionsensor.
2 SSW2 I 24 V/0 V DC SSW2: On/Off3 SSW1 I 24 V/0 V DC SSW1: On/Off6 24V O 24 V DC DC power source to PRY5 PRY REM O 0 V/24 V DC PRY: On/Off7 24V SOURCE O 24 V DC DC power source to SSW28 24V SOURCE O 24 V DC DC power source to SSW1
1 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for HDDFM2 HDDFM O 0 V/24 V DC HDDFM: On/Off3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FWEBSOL4 FWEBSOL O 0 V/24 V DC FWEBSOL: On/Off5 NC - - Not used6 NC - - Not used7 P.G - Ground Ground for DSPS8 S.G - Ground Ground for DSPS9 DSPS I 0 V to 24 V DC DSPS sensing voltage
10 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DSPS11 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFFM12 IFFM O 0 V/24 V DC IFFM: On/Off13 G(24V) - Ground Ground for PM (LSU)14 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PM (LSU)
A1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) IFM drive control clockA2 LOCK ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC IFM rotation status: Normal/LockA3 IFM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC IFM : On/OffA4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power source for IFMA5 S.G - Ground Ground for IFMA6 P.G - Ground Ground for IFMA7 P.G - Ground Ground for IFMA8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFMA9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for IFMB1 CLOCK O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) PCM drive control clockB2 LOCK ALM I 5.2 V/0 V DC PCM rotation status: Normal/LockB3 PCM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC PCM : On/OffB4 5V O 5.2 V DC Power source for PCMB5 S.G - Ground Ground for PCMB6 P.G - Ground Ground for PCMB7 P.G - Ground Ground for PCMB8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCMB9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PCM
1 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for PFM2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for DDM3 P.G - Ground Ground for PFM4 P.G - Ground Ground for DDM5 PFM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC PFM: On/Off6 DDM REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC DDM: On/Off7 LOCK DRIVE I 5.2 V/0 V DC PFM rotation status: Normal/Lock8 LOCK DRIVE I 5.2 V/0 V DC DDM rotation status: Normal/Lock9 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for WTDS
10 WTDS I 0 V/5.2 V DC WTDS: On/Off11 S.GND - Ground Ground for WTDS12 NC - - Not used
2BC/D
2-3-17
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage DescriptionCN17
Connectedto the upperlift motorand lowerlift motor.
YC18
Connect tothe feedhigh clutch1, feed lowclutch 1,registrationclutch, feedhigh clutch2, feed lowclutch 2,feed clutch3, feedclutch 4,and feedclutch 5.
CN19
Connectedto the totalcounter,cooling fanmotor, ejectfan motor 1,eject fanmotor 2,humiditysensorPCB, andface downejectswitch.
1 UPLESW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (2): Low/High2 COM(G) - Ground Ground for LM-U3 UPLESW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (1): Low/High4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for LM-U5 LM-U O 0 V/24 V DC LM-U: On/Off6 UPLESW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Lower drawer paper level signal (2): Low/High7 COM(G) - Ground Ground for LM-L8 UPLESW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC Upper drawer paper level signal (1): Low/High9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for LM-L
10 LM-L O 0 V/24 V DC LM-L: On/Off
A1 FCL1-H O 0 V/24 V DC FCL1-H: On/OffA2 NC - - Not usedA3 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL1-HA4 FCL1-L O 0 V/24 V DC FCL1-L: On/OffA5 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL1-LA6 RCL O 0 V/24 V DC RCL: On/OffA7 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for RCLA8 FCL2-H O 0 V/24 V DC FCL2-H: On/OffA9 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL2-HB1 FCL2-L O 0 V/24 V DC FCL2-L: On/OffB2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL2-LB3 FCL3 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL3: On/OffB4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL3B5 FCL4 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL4: On/OffB6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL4B7 FCL5 O 0 V/24 V DC FCL5: On/OffB8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for FCL5B9 NC - - Not used
A1 TC O 0 V/24 V DC TC count: On/OffA2 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for TCA3 CFM O 0 V/24 V DC CFM: On/OffA4 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for CFMA5 EFM1 O 0 V/24 V DC EFM1: On/OffA6 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for EFM1A7 EFM2 O 0 V/24 V DC EFM2: On/OffA8 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for EFM2B1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for HUMPCBB2 HUMS SIG I 0 V to 5 V DC HUMPCB sensing humidity voltageB3 S.G(TH) - Ground Ground for HUMPCBB4 TH I 0 V to 5 V DC HUMPCB sensing temperature voltageB5 GND(5V) - Ground Ground for FDESWB6 FDESW I 0 V/5.2 V DC FDESW: On/OffB7 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FDESWB8 NC - - Not used
2BC/D
2-3-18
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
YC20
Connectedto the paperfeed switch1, paperfeed switch2, paperfeed switch3, paperfeed switch4, paperfeed switch5, paperfeed switch6, deck leftpaper levelswitch 1,deck leftpaper levelswitch 2,deck leftpaper levelswitch 3,deck rightpaper levelswitch 1,deck rightpaper levelswitch 2,deck rightpaper levelswitch 3,and wastetoner boxswitch.
CN24
Connectedto thefinisher*,keycounter*,and keycard*.
CN25
Connectedto the fixingthermistor.
1 NC - - Not used2 NC - - Not used3 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW14 PFSW1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW1: On/Off5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW16 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW27 PFSW2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW2: On/Off8 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW29 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW3
10 PFSW3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW3: On/Off11 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW312 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW413 PFSW4 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW4: On/Off14 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW415 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW516 PFSW5 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW5: On/Off17 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW518 G(5V) - - Ground for PFSW619 PFSW6 I 0 V/5.2 V DC PFSW6: On/Off20 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for PFSW621 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW1-L22 DPLSW1-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW1-L: On/Off23 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW1-L24 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW2-L25 DPLSW2-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW2-L: On/Off26 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW2-L27 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW3-L28 DPLSW3-L I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW3-L: On/Off29 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW3-L30 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW1-R31 DPLSW1-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW1-R: On/Off32 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW1-R33 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW2-R34 DPLSW2-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW2-R: On/Off35 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW2-R36 G(5V) - - Ground for DPLSW3-R37 DPLSW3-R I 0 V/5.2 V DC DPLSW3-R: On/Off38 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for DPLSW3-R39 G(5V) - - Ground for WTBSW40 WTBSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC WTBSW: On/Off
1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for finisher*2 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Finisher* setting status: Installed/Not installed3 RESET O 0 V/5.2 V DC Finisher* reset signal: Reset/Normal4 G(5V) - - Ground for finisher*5 TxD O 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmit signal6 G(5V) - Ground Ground for serial communication signal7 RxD I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) Serial communication receive signal8 G(5V) - Ground Ground for serial communication signal9 E5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for finisher*
10 R24V O 24 V DC Power supply for key card* or key counter*11 COUNT REM O 0 V/5.2 V DC Key card* or key counter* count: On/Off12 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Key card* or key counter* setting status:
Installed/Not installed13 SET G - Ground Ground for key card* or key counter*
1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for FTH2 FTH SIG I 0 V to 5 V DC FTH sensing voltage3 SET SIG I 0 V/5.2 V DC Fixing unit setting status: Installed/Not installed4 S.GND - Ground Ground for fixing unit
*: Optional
2BC/D
2-3-19
2-3-4 Scanner drive PCB
Scanner drive PCB
Main PCB
Switches and
sensors
Stepping motor
driver IC
SM Vref
SM M1SM A
SM _A
SM B
SM _B
SM M2
Driver
INPCB EL
SMSM M3
SM M4
SM CLK
SM CWB
SM ENABLE
Figure 2-3-7 Scanner drive PCB block diagram
The scanner drive PCB (SDPCB) drives the scanner motor (SM), turns the exposure lamp (EL) on and off, and relayssignals from the scanner home position switch (SHPSW), the original size detection sensor 1 (OSDS1), the original sizedetection sensor 2 (OSDS2*) and the original detection switch (ODSW).The scanner motor (SM) is driven by turning the output for motor phase switch over on and off (SM A, SM _A, SM B, SM _B).It is activated by the stepping motor driver IC processing the currently set reference signal (SM Vref), drive mode signals(SM M1 to M3, SM CWB), phase switch over clock (SM CLK), and drive/stop signals (SM ENABLE) from the main PCB(MPCB).
*: Inch model only.
2BC/D
2-3-20
CN1 CN7
CN
5
31
16
CN
2
16
CN
6
31
CN
41
1 616
Figure 2-3-8 Scanner drive PCB silk-screen diagram
2BC/D
2-3-21
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
1 G(5V) - Ground Ground for SDPCB2 SHPSW O 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off3 EL ON REM I 5.2 V DC EL: On/Off4 SM ENABLE I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive enable signal: Enable/Not enable5 SM RET I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive control signal6 SM CWB I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM rotation direction switching signal7 SM CLK I 0 V/5.2 V DC (pulse) SM drive control clock8 NC - - -9 NC - - -
10 SM M3 I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M3)11 SM M2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M2)12 SM M1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC SM drive mode signal (M1)13 SM Vref I 0V to 5 V DC SM current control voltage14 ODSW O 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off15 OSDS2 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2*: On/Off16 OSDS1 O 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off
1 SM _B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase _B2 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for SM3 SM B O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase B4 SM A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase A5 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for SM6 SM _A O 0 V/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive pulse phase _A
1 EL ON O 0 V/24 V DC EL: On/Off2 EL ON O 0 V/24 V DC EL: On/Off3 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for INPCB4 24V O 24 V DC Power supply for INPCB5 G(24V) - Ground Ground for INPCB6 G(24V) - Ground Ground for INPCB
1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for SHPSW2 SHPSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC SHPSW: On/Off3 GND - - Ground for SHPSW
1 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for ODSW2 ODSW I 0 V/5.2 V DC ODSW: On/Off3 GND - - Ground for ODSW
1 G(24V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB2 24V I 24 V DC Power source from PSPCB3 G(24V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB4 24V I 24 V DC Power source from PSPCB5 G(5.1V) - Ground Ground from PSPCB6 5.1V I 5.2 V DC Power source from PSPCB
1 S.G - Ground Ground for OSDS12 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OSDS13 OSDS1 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS1: On/Off4 S.G - Ground Ground for OSDS2*5 5V O 5.2 V DC Power supply for OSDS2*6 OSDS2 I 0 V/5.2 V DC OSDS2C: On/Off
CN1
Connectedto theenginePCB.
CN2
Connectedto thescannermotor.
CN3
Connectedto theINPCB.
CN4
Connectedto thescannerhomepositionswitch.
CN5
Connectedto theoriginaldetectionswitch.
CN6
Connectedto thepowersourcePCB.
CN7
Connectedto theoriginal sizedetectionsensors 1and 2*.
*: Inch model only.
2BC/D
2-3-22
2-3-5 CCD PCB
Emitter follower circuit
Emitter follower circuit
Emitter follower circuit
Emitter follower circuit
Clockdriver IC2
IC1
IC4
IC5
IC6
IC7
CCD IC3
Main PCB
CCD PCB
Clockgeneration
Imageprocessing
circuit
Figure 2-3-9 CCD PCB block diagram
The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) receives clock signals SHIFT+, SHIFT-, CLK+, CLK-, RS+, RS-, CLP+, and CLP- from the mainPCB (MPCB), and based on these signals, generates the CCD drive signal to drive CCD IC3.When clock signals are input, the CCD IC3 outputs analog signals according to the set density of the image, which aretransmitted to the main PCB (MPCB) via the emitter follower circuits and differential amplifiers IC4, IC5, IC6 and IC7.
2BC/D
Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description
2-3-23
CN1
Connectedto the mainPCB.
CN2
Connectedto the mainPCB.
1 CLP- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal2 CLP+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal3 RS+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal4 RS- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal5 CLK- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal6 CLK+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal7 SHIFT+ I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal8 SHIFT- I 0 V/3.3 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB drive clock signal9 5V I 5.2 V DC Power source from MPCB
10 5V I 5.2 V DC Power source from MPCB11 5V I 5.2 V DC Power source from MPCB
1 OS2+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal2 OS2- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal3 OS1+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal4 OS1- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal5 OS3+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal6 OS3- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal7 OS4+ O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal8 OS4- O 0 V/12 V DC (pulse) CCDPCB control signal9 N.C - - Not used
10 +12V I +12 V DC Power source from MPCB11 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground from MPCB12 G(analog) - Ground Analog ground from MPCB
CN1
CN21 11 1 12
Figure 2-3-10 CCD PCB silk-screen diagram
2BC/D
2-4-1
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 1F
rom
th
e m
ain
sw
itch
tu
rned
on
to
mac
hin
e st
abili
zati
on
2 s
Prim
ary
stab
iliza
tion
fixin
g te
mpe
ratu
re 1
65°C
/329
°FS
econ
dary
sta
biliz
atio
n fix
ing
tem
pera
ture
185
°C/3
65°F
Agi
ng e
ndC
opyi
ng e
nabl
ed
MS
W
DB
RE
M
PC
L1 R
EM
PC
L2 R
EM
PR
Y
CL
RE
M
MC
RE
M
CF
M R
EM
MS
W: O
n
3 s
1 s
2 s
20 s
20 s
100
ms
300
ms
600
ms
CN
13-5
FH
-M R
EM
C
N2-
5
FH
-S R
EM
CN
2-6
MC
CM
FW
D R
EM
CN
4-5
MC
CM
RE
V R
EM
CN
4-6
IFM
CN
15-A
3
CN
15-B
3P
CM
RE
M
CN
12-9
CN
4-11
CN
4-13
CN
4-15
CN
19-A
3
250
ms
CN
12-1
2
150
ms
2BC/D
2-4-2
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 2S
can
ner
op
erat
ion
43 P
SM
Off
Fw
d. r
otat
ion
Sca
nner
initi
aliz
atio
n (S
HP
SW
: On)
Rev
. rot
atio
n
CN
2-1,
2,
3
, 4, 5
, 6
SH
PS
WC
N4-
2
SM
Off
Fw
d. r
otat
ion
Sca
nner
initi
aliz
atio
n (S
HP
SW
: Off)
Orig
inal
sca
nnin
g op
erat
ion
(A3/
11"
× 17
" or
igin
al, m
agni
ficat
ion
ratio
100
%, m
anua
l cop
y de
nsity
con
trol
)
Rev
. rot
atio
n
CN
2-1,
2,
3
, 4, 5
, 6
SH
PS
WC
N4-
2
SM
Off
Fw
d. r
otat
ion
Rev
. rot
atio
n
CN
2-1,
2,
3
, 4, 5
, 6
SH
PS
WC
N4-
2
FV
SY
NC
sig
nal
154
P
43 P
76 P
410
P41
4 P
110
P99
21 P
154
P
2BC/D
2-4-3
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 3O
rig
inal
fee
d o
per
atio
n 1
: Fee
din
g a
n A
4/11
" ×××× ×
81/ 2
" o
rig
inal
in s
ing
le-s
ided
ori
gin
al m
od
e
Cop
ier
sign
al w
ait c
ondi
tion
298
P
5099
P
Sec
onda
ry o
rigin
al fe
ed s
tart
Prim
ary
orig
inal
feed
end
DF
sta
rt
OF
MC
N12
-9,1
1,12
,14
OC
MC
N12
-13,
15,1
6,18
OF
SW
C
N12
-22
OS
BS
WC
N12
-21
OF
SO
L A
DF
TS
W
CN
12-1
0
OF
SO
L R
CN
12-7
OF
CL
CN
12-5
CN
12-2
9
2BC/D
2-4-4
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 4O
rig
inal
fee
d o
per
atio
n 2
: Fee
din
g t
wo
A4/
11"
×××× × 81
/ 2"
ori
gin
als
succ
essi
vely
in s
ing
le-s
ided
ori
gin
al m
od
e
Sec
onda
ry o
rigin
al
feed
sta
rt
Sta
rt o
f prim
ary
feed
fo
r ne
xt o
rigin
alP
rimar
y or
igin
al
feed
end
DF
sta
rt
OF
M
OF
SO
L A
CN
12-1
0
OF
SO
L R
CN
12-7
OF
CL
CN
12-5
DF
TS
W
Cop
ier
sign
al w
ait c
ondi
tion
298
P
298
P
5099
P
OS
BS
W
CN
12-9
,11,
12,1
4
OC
MC
N12
-13,
15,1
6,18
OF
SW
CN
12-2
2
CN
12-2
1
CN
12-2
9
2BC/D
2-4-5
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 5O
rig
inal
fee
d o
per
atio
n 3
: Fee
din
g t
wo
A4R
/81 /
2" ×××× ×
11"
ori
gin
als
succ
essi
vely
in d
ou
ble
-sid
ed o
rig
inal
mo
de
Sec
onda
ry o
rigin
al
feed
sta
rt (
reve
rse
face
)S
econ
dary
orig
inal
fe
ed s
tart
(re
vers
e fa
ce)
Sec
onda
ry o
rigin
al
feed
sta
rt (
fron
t fac
e)
Sec
onda
ry o
rigin
al fe
ed s
tart
(f
ront
face
)S
witc
hbac
k op
erat
ion
star
t
Sw
itchb
ack
oper
atio
n st
art
Sw
itchb
ack
oper
atio
n en
dS
witc
hbac
k op
erat
ion
end
Sw
itchb
ack
oper
atio
n en
dS
witc
hbac
k op
erat
ion
end
Sta
rt o
f prim
ary
feed
fo
r ne
xt o
rigin
al
Prim
ary
orig
inal
fe
ed e
nd
Prim
ary
orig
inal
fe
ed e
nd
DF
sta
rt
Cop
ier
sign
al
wai
t con
ditio
n
OF
M
100
ms
135
P13
5 P
135
P13
5 P
OF
SO
L A
CN
12-1
0
OF
SO
L R
CN
12-7
OF
CL
CN
12-5
CN
12-9
,11,
12,1
4
OC
M
CN
12-1
3,15
,16,
18
OF
SW
C
N12
-22
OS
BS
WC
N12
-21
DF
TS
WC
N12
-29
SB
FS
SO
LC
N12
-8
EF
SS
OL
CN
12-6
SB
PS
OL
AC
N12
-4
SB
PS
OL
RC
N12
-3
2BC/D
2-4-6
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 6C
on
tin
uo
us
copy
ing
on
to t
wo
sh
eets
of
A4/
11"
×××× × 81
/ 2"
cop
y p
aper
fro
m t
he
byp
ass
tab
le
100
ms
9-B
5
9-B
3
18-A
4
3-A
2
20-4
3-B
2
18-A
6
16-5
300
ms
10 m
s
166
ms
86 m
s86
ms
380
ms
10 m
s
58 m
s
100
ms
58 m
s
Imag
e re
ady
Sec
onda
ry p
aper
feed
sta
rtS
econ
dary
pap
er fe
ed s
tart
Imag
e re
ady
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
500
ms
12-1
2
12-9
15-A
3
15-B
310
0 m
s10
0 m
s
250
ms
150
ms
250
ms
600
ms
4-13
4-15
4-11
BY
PP
FC
L
BY
PS
OL
FC
L1-L
ES
W
PF
SW
1
RS
W
RC
L
PF
M
MC
RE
M
DB
RE
M
IFM
PC
M
PC
L1P
CL2
CL
Pot
entia
l st
age
drop
ping
Out
put o
ff tr
igge
r
90 m
s90
ms
100
ms
300
ms
TC
RE
M
SC
RE
M
155
ms
155
ms
344
ms
344
ms
220
ms
220
ms
12-3
12-5
2BC/D
2-4-7
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 7C
on
tin
uo
us
cop
yin
g o
nto
tw
o s
hee
ts o
f A
4/11
" ×××× ×
81/ 2
" co
py p
aper
fro
m t
he
dra
wer
1
163
ms
163
ms
58 m
s
56 m
s
58 m
s58
ms
50 m
s
128
ms
128
ms
70 m
s
10 m
s
56 m
s
10 m
s
500
ms
100
ms
100
ms
250
ms
150
ms
250
ms
600
ms
18-A
4
3-A
2
20-4
3-B
2
18-A
6
16-5
12-1
2
12-9
15-A
3
15-B
3
4-13
4-15
4-11
PF
CL1
7-11
FC
L1-L
FC
L1-H
18-A
1
FC
L2-H
18-A
8
FC
L318
-B3
ES
W
PF
SW
1
PF
SW
220
-7
PF
SW
320
-10
RS
W
RC
L
PF
M
MC
RE
M
DB
RE
M
IFM
PC
M
PC
L1P
CL2
CL
58 m
s50
ms
50 m
s
166
ms
86 m
s86
ms
380
ms
12-3
TC
RE
M
12-5
SC
RE
M
155
ms
155
ms
344
ms
344
ms
220
ms
220
ms
Imag
e re
ady
Sec
onda
ry p
aper
feed
sta
rtS
econ
dary
pap
er fe
ed s
tart
Imag
e re
ady
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
Pot
entia
l st
age
drop
ping
Out
put o
ff tr
igge
r
2BC/D
2-4-8
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 8C
op
yin
g o
nto
a s
hee
t o
f A
4/11
" ×××× ×
81/ 2
" co
py p
aper
fro
m t
he
dra
wer
2Im
age
read
yS
econ
dary
pap
er fe
ed s
tart
Out
put o
ff tr
igge
r
163
ms
100
ms
100
ms
56 m
s
58 m
s
58 m
s
58 m
s
50 m
s
50 m
s
128
ms
128
ms
250
ms
150
ms
250
ms
500
ms
600
ms
Pot
entia
l st
age
drop
ping
18-A
4
3-A
2
20-4
3-B
2
18-A
6
16-5
12-1
2
12-9
15-A
3
15-B
3
4-13
4-15
4-11
PF
CL2
7-27
FC
L1-L
FC
L1-H
18-A
1
FC
L2-H
18-A
8
FC
L318
-B3
FC
L418
-B5
ES
W
PF
SW
1
PF
SW
220
-7
PF
SW
320
-10
PF
SW
420
-13
RS
W
RC
L
PF
M
MC
RE
M
DB
RE
M
IFM
PC
M
PC
L1P
CL2
CL
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
70 m
s
10 m
s
166
ms
86 m
s
380
ms
12-3
TC
RE
M
12-5
SC
RE
M
155
ms
344
ms
220
ms
2BC/D
2-4-9
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 9C
op
yin
g o
nto
a s
hee
t o
f A
4/11
" ×××× ×
81/ 2
" co
py p
aper
fro
m t
he
dra
wer
3
100
ms
100
ms
250
ms
150
ms
250
ms
500
ms
600
ms
Pot
entia
l st
age
drop
ping
128
ms
128
ms
128
ms
56 m
s
58 m
s
50 m
s
100
ms
50 m
s16
3 m
s
70 m
s
58 m
s10
ms
58 m
s
58 m
s
Sec
onda
ry p
aper
feed
sta
rtO
utpu
t off
trig
ger
18-A
4
3-A
2
20-4
3-B
2
18-A
6
16-5
12-1
2
12-9
15-A
3
15-B
3
4-13
4-15
4-11
FC
L1-L
FC
L1-H
18-A
1
FC
L2-H
18-A
8
FC
L318
-B3
FC
L418
-B5
FC
L518
-B7
PF
CL3
8-7
ES
W
PF
SW
1
PF
SW
220
-7
PF
SW
320
-10
PF
SW
420
-13
PF
SW
520
-16
PF
SW
620
-19
RS
W
RC
L
PF
M
16-6
DD
M
MC
RE
M
DB
RE
M
IFM
PC
M
PC
L1P
CL2
CL
166
ms
86 m
s
380
ms
12-3
TC
RE
M
12-5
SC
RE
M
155
ms
344
ms
220
ms
Imag
e re
ady
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
2BC/D
2-4-10
Tim
ing
ch
art
No
. 10
Co
pyi
ng
on
to a
sh
eet
of
A4/
11"
×××× × 81
/ 2"
cop
y p
aper
fro
m t
he
dra
wer
4
190
ms
50 m
s
50 m
s
163
ms
128
ms
128
ms
128
ms
58 m
s
125
ms
58 m
s
58 m
s 70 m
s
10 m
s
100
ms
58 m
s
56 m
s
100
ms
100m
s
250
ms
150
ms
250
ms
500m
s
600m
s
Pot
entia
l st
age
drop
ping
Sec
onda
ry p
aper
feed
sta
rtO
utpu
t off
trig
ger
18-A
4
3-A
2
20-4
3-B
2
18-A
6
16-5
12-1
2
12-9
15-A
3
15-B
3
4-13
4-15
4-11
FC
L1-L
FC
L1-H
18-A
1
FC
L2-H
18-A
8
FC
L318
-B3
FC
L418
-B5
FC
L518
-B7
DF
CL
26-1
4
PF
CL4
26-1
2
ES
W
PF
SW
1
PF
SW
220
-7
PF
SW
320
-10
PF
SW
420
-13
PF
SW
520
-16
DP
CS
W1
26-2
DP
CS
W2
26-5
RS
W
RC
L
PF
M
16-6
DD
M
MC
RE
M
DB
RE
M
IFM
PC
M
PC
L1P
CL2
CL
166
ms
86 m
s
380
ms
12-3
TC
RE
M
12-5
SC
RE
M
155
ms
344
ms
220
ms
Imag
e re
ady
Sta
rt k
ey: O
n
2BC/D
2-4-11
Ch
art
of
imag
e ad
just
men
t p
roce
du
res
Item
Imag
eD
escr
ipti
on
Adj
ustin
g th
e po
sitio
n of
the
lase
r sc
anne
r un
it (p
rintin
g ad
just
men
t)A
djus
ting
the
late
ral s
quar
e-ne
ss (
prin
ting
adju
stm
ent)
––
1-6-
32––
Item
No.
Mo
de
Ori
gin
alP
age
Rem
arks
Mai
nte
nan
ce m
od
e
U08
9 (1
dot
-LIN
E)
Ad
just
-in
go
rder
1
Pol
ygon
mot
or s
peed
adj
ustm
ent
Adj
ustin
g th
e m
agni
ficat
ion
in th
e m
ain
scan
ning
di-
rect
ion
(prin
ting
adju
stm
ent)
PO
LYG
ON
M
OT
OR
1-
4-20
U05
3U
053
test
pa
ttern
2
Adj
ustin
g th
e LS
U p
rint s
tart
tim
ing
Adj
ustin
g th
e ce
nter
line
of
the
bypa
ss ta
ble
(prin
ting
adju
stm
ent)
LSU
OU
TT
he c
ente
r lin
e of
the
bypa
ss
tabl
e is
use
d as
the
refe
renc
e in
the
adju
stm
ent o
f the
cen
ter
lines
for
othe
r pa
per
sour
ces.
1-6-
17U
034
U03
4 te
st
patte
rn4 5
Reg
istr
atio
n cl
utch
turn
ing
on ti
min
g (s
econ
dary
pap
er fe
ed s
tart
tim
ing)
Adj
ustin
g th
e le
adin
g ed
ge
regi
stra
tion
(prin
ting
adju
st-
men
t)
RC
L O
NTo
mak
e an
adj
ustm
ent f
or
dupl
ex c
opyi
ng, s
elec
t “R
CL
ON
(D
UP
)”.
1-6-
15U
034
U03
4 te
st
patte
rn
6
LSU
illu
min
atio
n st
art t
imin
gA
djus
ting
the
lead
ing
edge
m
argi
n (p
rintin
g ad
just
men
t)LE
AD
1-
6-18
U40
2U
402
test
pa
ttern
7
LSU
illu
min
atio
n en
d tim
ing
Adj
ustin
g th
e tr
ailin
g ed
ge
mar
gin
(prin
ting
adju
stm
ent)
TR
AIL
To m
ake
an a
djus
tmen
t for
du
plex
cop
ying
, sel
ect “
TR
AIL
(D
UP
)”.
1-6-
18U
402
U40
2 te
st
patte
rn
8
Imag
e fo
rmat
ion
mot
or s
peed
adj
ustm
ent
Adj
ustin
g th
e m
agni
ficat
ion
in th
e au
xilia
ry s
cann
ing
di-
rect
ion
(prin
ting
adju
stm
ent)
MA
IN M
OT
OR
1-
4-20
U05
3U
053
test
pa
ttern
3
LSU
illu
min
atio
n st
art/e
nd ti
min
gA
djus
ting
the
left
and
right
m
argi
ns (
prin
ting
adju
st-
men
t)
A/C
1-
6-18
U40
2U
402
test
pa
ttern
2BC/D
2-4-12
Item
Imag
eD
escr
ipti
on
Dat
a pr
oces
sing
Adj
ustin
g m
agni
ficat
ion
of
the
scan
ner
in th
e m
ain
scan
ning
dire
ctio
n (s
cann
ing
adju
stm
ent)
MA
IN S
CA
N A
DJ
No
adju
stm
ent f
or c
opyi
ng
usin
g th
e D
F.1-
6-34
U06
5
Item
No.
Mo
de
Ori
gin
alP
age
Rem
arks
Mai
nte
nan
ce m
od
e
Test
cha
rt
Ad
just
-in
go
rder
!
Orig
inal
sca
nnin
g sp
eed
Adj
ustin
g m
agni
ficat
ion
of
the
scan
ner
in th
e au
xilia
ry
scan
ning
dire
ctio
n (s
cann
ing
adju
stm
ent)
SU
B S
CA
N A
DJ
––U
065:
For
cop
ying
an
orig
inal
pl
aced
on
the
cont
act g
lass
.U
070:
For
cop
ying
orig
inal
s fr
om th
e D
F.
1-6-
351-
6-70
U06
5U
070
Test
cha
rt
@
Orig
inal
sca
n st
art t
imin
gA
djus
ting
the
lead
ing
edge
re
gist
ratio
n (s
cann
ing
ad-
just
men
t)
AD
JUS
T D
ATA
LEA
D E
DG
E A
DJ
U06
6: F
or c
opyi
ng a
n or
igin
al
plac
ed o
n th
e co
ntac
t gla
ss.
U07
1: F
or c
opyi
ng o
rigin
als
from
the
DF.
1-6-
361-
6-70
U06
6U
071
Test
cha
rt
$
Adj
ustin
g th
e ce
nter
line
(s
cann
ing
adju
stm
ent)
AD
JUS
T D
ATA
––U
067:
For
cop
ying
an
orig
inal
pl
aced
on
the
cont
act g
lass
.U
072:
For
cop
ying
orig
inal
s fr
om th
e D
F.
1-6-
371-
6-69
U06
7U
072
Test
cha
rt
#
Adj
ustin
g th
e or
igin
al s
can
data
(im
age
adju
stm
ent)
Adj
ustin
g th
e le
adin
g ed
ge
mar
gin
(sca
nnin
g ad
just
-m
ent)
B M
AR
GIN
B M
AR
GIN
U40
3: F
or c
opyi
ng a
n or
igin
al
plac
ed o
n th
e co
ntac
t gla
ss.
U40
4: F
or c
opyi
ng o
rigin
als
from
the
DF.
1-6-
381-
6-72
U40
3U
404
Test
cha
rt
%
Adj
ustin
g th
e or
igin
al s
can
data
(im
age
adju
stm
ent)
Adj
ustin
g th
e tr
ailin
g ed
ge
mar
gin
(sca
nnin
g ad
just
-m
ent)
D M
AR
GIN
D M
AR
GIN
U40
3: F
or c
opyi
ng a
n or
igin
al
plac
ed o
n th
e co
ntac
t gla
ss.
U40
4: F
or c
opyi
ng o
rigin
als
from
the
DF.
1-6-
381-
6-72
U40
3U
404
Test
cha
rt
^
Adj
ustin
g th
e or
igin
al s
can
data
(im
age
adju
stm
ent)
9
Adj
ustin
g th
e po
sitio
n of
the
ISU
(sc
ann-
ing
adju
stm
ent)
Adj
ustin
g th
e la
tera
l squ
are-
ness
(sc
anni
ng a
djus
tmen
t)––
1-
6-33
––U
089
(1 d
ot-L
INE
)
0
Adj
ustin
g th
e or
igin
al s
can
data
(im
age
adju
stm
ent)
Adj
ustin
g th
e le
ft an
d rig
ht
mar
gins
(sc
anni
ng a
djus
t-m
ent)
A M
AR
GIN
/C
MA
RG
INA
MA
RG
IN/
C M
AR
GIN
U40
3: F
or c
opyi
ng a
n or
igin
al
plac
ed o
n th
e co
ntac
t gla
ss.
U40
4: F
or c
opyi
ng o
rigin
als
from
the
DF.
1-6-
38
1-6-
72
U40
3
U40
4
Test
cha
rt
2BC/D-1
2-4-13
Whe
n m
aint
enan
ce it
em U
092
(Adj
ustin
g th
e sc
anne
r au
tom
atic
ally
) is
run
usi
ng th
e sp
ecifi
ed o
rigin
al (
P/N
2A
0680
20),
the
follo
win
g ad
just
men
ts a
re a
utom
atic
ally
mad
e:•
Adj
ustin
g th
e sc
anne
r ce
nter
line
(U
067)
•A
djus
ting
the
scan
ner
mag
nific
atio
n in
the
mai
n sc
anni
ng d
irect
ion
(U06
5)•
Adj
ustin
g th
e sc
anne
r le
adin
g ed
ge r
egis
trat
ion
(U06
6)•
Adj
ustin
g th
e sc
anne
r m
agni
ficat
ion
in th
e au
xilia
ry s
cann
ing
dire
ctio
n (U
065)
•A
djus
ting
mar
gins
for
read
ing
an o
rigin
al o
n th
e co
ntac
t gla
ss (
U40
3)W
hen
mai
nten
ance
item
U07
4 (A
djus
ting
the
DF
aut
omat
ical
ly)
is r
un u
sing
the
spec
ified
orig
inal
(P
/N 2
AC
6824
1), t
he fo
llow
ing
adju
stm
ents
are
aut
omat
ical
ly m
ade:
•A
djus
ting
the
DF
mag
nific
atio
n (U
070)
•A
djus
ting
the
DF
lead
ing
timin
g (U
071)
•A
djus
ting
the
DF
orig
inal
cen
ter
line
(U07
2)•
Adj
ustin
g m
argi
ns fo
r D
F o
rigin
al r
eadi
ng (
U40
4)
Imag
e q
ual
ity
Item
Spe
cific
atio
ns10
0% m
agni
ficat
ion
Cop
ier:
±0.
8%U
sing
DF
: ±1.
5%E
nlar
gem
ent/r
educ
tion
Cop
ier:
±1.
0%U
sing
DF
: ±1.
5%La
tera
l squ
aren
ess
(cop
ier
mod
e)C
opie
r: ±
1.5
mm
/375
mm
Usi
ng D
F: ±
2.5
mm
/375
mm
Late
ral s
quar
enes
s (p
rinte
r m
ode)
±1.
0 m
m/3
75 m
mM
argi
ns (
copi
er m
ode)
A: 2
.0+
2.0 m
mB
: 3.0
± 2
.5 m
mC
: 2.0
+2.
0 mm
D: 3
.0 ±
2.5
mm
Mar
gins
(pr
inte
r m
ode)
A: 0
.5 m
m o
r m
ore
B: 3
.0 ±
2.5
mm
C: 0
.5 m
m o
r m
ore
D: 3
.0 ±
2.5
mm
Lead
ing
edge
reg
istr
atio
nD
raw
er: ±
2.5
mm
Byp
ass:
±2.
5 m
mD
uple
x co
pyin
g: ±
2.5
mm
Ske
wed
pap
er fe
ed (
left-
right
diff
eren
ce)
Dra
wer
: 1.5
mm
or
less
Byp
ass:
1.5
mm
or
less
Dup
lex
copy
ing:
2.0
mm
or
less
Late
ral i
mag
e sh
iftin
gD
raw
er: ±
2.0
mm
Byp
ass:
±2.
0 m
mD
uple
x co
pyin
g: ±
3.0
mm
–1.5
–1.5
2BC/D-1
2-4-14
Maintenance parts listMaintenance part name
Part No. Fig. No. Ref. No.Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Primary paper feed unit PARTS,ASS’Y PRIMARY PAPER FEED,SP 2BC93010 7 1Forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 2BC06810 6,7 57,35Upper paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2BC06900 6,7 9,4Lower paper feed pulley LOWER PULLEY,PAPER FEED 33906060 6,7 43,15Bypass forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 33906470 27 49Bypass upper paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY,BYPASS 61706770 27 45Bypass lower paper feed pulley LOWER PULLEY,PAPER FEED 33906060 27 69Registration cleaner brush PARTS,REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP 2BC93180 8 (33,35)Lower registration cleaner PARTS,LOWER REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP 2BC93190 17 (17,18)Paper conveying belt BELT,CONVEYING 2BC16130 17 7Middle paper conveying belt BELT B,CONVEYING MIDDLE 2BC16480 17 6Ozone filter FILTER,OZONE 2BC16350 1 14Transfer unit PARTS,ASS'Y TRANSFER CHARGER,SP 2BC93020 20 3Charger wire TUNGSTEN WIRE(OX) SP (50M) 74669000 20 24Cleaning pad CLEANING PAD ASS'Y 33900940 20 15
Slit glass CONTACT GLASS,ADF 35911450 11 3Contact glass CONTACT GLASS 35912010 11 9Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2AC12140 10 49Mirror 2 MIRROR B 2AC12150 10 53Reflector REFLECTOR,SCANNER 2AC12130 10 26Exposure lamp LAMP,SCANNER 2BC12150 10 27Original size detection sensor SENSOR,ORIGINAL DETECTION 35927290 10 36
Developing unit PARTS,ASS'Y DEVELOPING,SP 2BC93040 13 –Lower developing cover LOWER COVER,DEVELOPING 2BC14120 13 4Developing unit upper seal UPPER SEAL,DEVELOPING 2BC14150 13 6Developing duct DUCT,DEVELOPING 2BC14130 22 71Developing duct filter FILTER,DEVELOPING DUCT 2AC14560 22 74Sub hopper coupling COUPLING,SUB HOPPER 33915540 30 3
Drum SET,DRUM 2BC82020 8 24Main charger unit PARTS,ASS'Y MAIN CHARGER,SP 2BC93030 9 –Charger wire cleaning pad MC CLEANING PAD ASS’Y 2A068220 9 15Grid wire cleaning pad GRID CLEANING PAD ASS’Y 36768081 9 23Charger wire WIRE,MAIN CHARGER 2A068240 9 14Main charger grid GRID ASS'Y 2A068171 9 26Cleaning lamp LAMP,CLEANING LAMP 2AR27031 9 18Pre-cleaning lamp LAMP PCL 2BC27090 8 2
Cleaning unit PARTS,CLEANING ASS'Y,SP 2BC93050 14 1Cleaning lower seal LOWER SEAL,CLEANING 2BC18070 14 39Cleaning brush BRUSH,CLEANING 2BC18190 14 22Front cleaning seal PART,FRONT CLEANING SEAL 2BC93160 14 (37,52,53)Rear cleaning seal PART,REAR CLEANING SEAL 2BC93170 14 (38,53,54)Cleaning blade BLADE,CLEANING 2BC18460 14 55Thrust gear GEAR 45B,THRUST 2BC18680 14 32Blade side front sponge FRONT SPONGE,BLADE SIDE 2BC18340 14 7Blade side rear sponge REAR SPONGE,BLADE SIDE 2BC18350 14 8Bushing sponge SPONGE,BRUSH BUSHING 2BC18700 14 50Drum separation claw unit PARTS,ASS'Y SEPARATION CLAW(SP) 2BC93130 14 40Waste toner box DISPOSAL TANK ASS'Y 2BC60010 15 11
Fixing unit PARTS 120,ASS'Y FIXING,SP 2BC93070 19 –Fixing unit PARTS 230,ASS'Y FIXING,SP 2BC93080 19 –Heat roller ROLLER,HEAT 2BC20530 19 24Press roller PRESS ROLLER 2BC20260 19 16Press roller separation claw CLAW,PRESS ROLLER 36720493 19 54Fixing unit thermistor THERMISTOR,FIXING 2BC20430 19 42Fixing web roller FELT,CLEANING 2A020330 19 65Lower cleaning roller LOWER ROLLER,CLEANING 2A020340 19 6Fixing heater M HEATER M,FIXING(120) 2BC20290 19 46
HEATER M,FIXING(220 - 240) 2BC20310 19 46Fixing heater S HEATER S,FIXING(120) 2BC20300 19 47
HEATER S,FIXING(220 - 240) 2BC20320 19 47Heat roller separation claw unit PARTS,ASS'Y FIXING EJECT GUIDE,SP 2BC93090 26 38Heat roller separation claw SEPARATION CLAW B 61720750 19 41
2BC/D-1
2-4-15
Maintenance part namePart No. Fig. No. Ref. No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
Duplex pressure release solenoid* SOLENOID,STOPPER 18327130 24 32
DF forwarding pulley PULLEY,LEADING FEED 3BC07010 34 5DF feed pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 3BC07020 34 6DF separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 3BC07020 34 27DF registration roller ROLLER,REGISTRATION 3BC08050 36 56Front reading pulley FRONT PULLEY,READING 3AL08480 36 7DF registration pulley PULLEY B,REGISTRATION 3BC08220 35 12Original feed switch SWITCH L,FEED 63227150 34 17Lower original conveying roller LOWER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3AL08112 36 32Upper original conveying roller UPPER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3AL08161 36 30Upper original conveying pulley UPPER PULLEY,CONVEYING 3AL08140 31 5Original conveying guide GUIDE,CONVEYING 3AL08033 36 1Original conveying pulley cover COVER,CONVEYING PULLEY 3AL08302 36 4Middle original conveying roller INNER ROLLER,CONVEYING 3BC08150 36 19Middle original conveying pulley INNER PULLEY,CONVEYING 3AL08100 36 52Eject pulley PULLEY,EJECT 3AL08170 35 11Switchback roller ROLLER,LOOP 3AL10020 35 6Eject pulley PULLEY,EJECT 3AL08170 35 20Eject roller ROLLER,EJECT 3AL08130 36 39Original size length switch filter FILTER CF SENSOR 78706241 33 16Original holder mat MAT,ORIGINAL HOLDER 3AL04060 31 16Original holder sheet SHEET,ORIGINAL HOLDER 3AL08401 36 10Original size indicator sponge SPONGE,ORIGINAL SIZE INDICATOR 35912531 11 4
Drum drive grounding plate GROUND PLATE,DRUM DRIVE 2AC08160 22 41Ozone filter FILTER,MAIN 2BC23020 1 39
2-4-14-1
* Duplex pressure release solenoid (DUPPRSOL) is attached in MOUNT, SWITCHBACK RELEASE SOLENOID (P/N : 2A017210). Refer to P.2-2-5 and the Parts List for the position.
2BC/D-1
2-4-16
This page is intentionally left blank.
2BC/D-1
2-4-17
Periodic maintenance procedures
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Test copy and Perform at the maximum Test copy Every servicetest print copy size
Run maintenance item U923 (Checking/clearing the transfer charger cleaning counter) to clear the count value. (Refer topage 1-4-71.)
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Paper feed Primary paper feed unit Clean or replace Every service 1-6-3section Forwarding pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3
Replace after feeding 150,000sheets (drawers 1 and 2) or300,000 sheets (paper deck).
Upper paper feed pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3Replace after feeding 150,000sheets (drawers 1 and 2) or300,000 sheets (paper deck).
Lower paper feed pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-3Replace after feeding 150,000sheets (drawers 1 and 2) or300,000 sheets (paper deck).
Bypass forwarding pulley Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10Replace after feeding 300,000sheets.
Bypass upper paper feed Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10Replace after feeding 300,000sheets.
Bypass lower paper feed Clean or replace Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth. 1-6-10Replace after feeding 300,000sheets.
Registration cleaner Clean or replace Every service Vacuum. 1-6-13brush Replace if it does not touch the
registration roller.
Lower registration cleaner Clean or replace Every service Vacuum. 1-6-13brush Replace if it does not touch the
registration roller.
Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Clutches Clean Every service Check the leading edgeregistration and paper feedconditions.
Paper conveying belt Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Middle paper conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.belt
Ozone filter Replace Every service 1-6-14
Transfer unit Clean Every service Clean with a wet cloth and then 1-6-48a dry cloth.
Charger wire Replace Every service 1-6-48
Cleaning pad Replace Every service 1-6-48
Guides Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-15
2BC/D-1
2-4-18
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Optical section Slit glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.
Contact glass Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.
Mirror 1 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean Every service Clean with alcohol and thena dry cloth.
Lens Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Reflector Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Exposure lamp Check and replace Every service Replace if an image problem 1-6-21occurs or after the exposurelamp has been lit for 1,000 hours.
Optical rail Grease Every service Check noise and shifting andthen apply scanner rail greasePG671.
Original size detection Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.sensor
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Developing Developing unit Replace Every service 1-6-44section Lower developing Clean Every service Vacuum.
cover
Developing unit Clean Every service Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth. 1-6-46upper seal Check and replace Replace if deformation, waviness
or break of the seal is found.
Seals and sponges Clean Every service Check for vacuum and breakage.
Gears Check Every service Check noise and the levels ofwear.
Grease Every service Apply grease TMP1-200G.
Developing duct Clean Every service Vacuum.
Developing duct filter Replace Every service 1-6-47
Sub hopper coupling Check and Grease Every service Check noise and Apply greaseTMP1-200G.
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Image formation Drum Replace Every service 1-6-42section Main charger unit Clean Every service Clean the shield with a wet cloth 1-6-39
and then a dry cloth.
Charger wire cleaning Replace Every service 1-6-41pad
Grid wire cleaning pad Replace Every service 1-6-41
Charger wire Replace Every service 1-6-39
Main charger grid Clean or replace Every service Clean the shield with a wet cloth 1-6-39and then a dry cloth. Replace ifdamage or folds are serious.
Cleaning lamp Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
Pre-cleaning lamp Clean Every service Clean with a dry cloth.
2-4-16
2BC/D
2-4-19
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Cleaning Cleaning unit Replace Every service 1-6-50section Cleaning lower seal Replace Every service 1-6-50
Cleaning brush Replace Every service 1-6-53
Front cleaning seal Replace Every service 1-6-53
Rear cleaning rear seal Replace Every service 1-6-53
Cleaning blade Replace Every service 1-6-52
Thrust gear Check and replace Every service Replace if breakage or the like 1-6-52is found.
Blade side front sponge Check and replace Every service Replace if cushioning characteristicsare lost.When replacing, a frontcleaning sponge (2BC1839) is needed.
Blade side rear sponge Check and replace Every service Replace if cushioning characteristicsare lost.When replacing, a rearcleaning sponge (2BC1840) is needed.
Bushing sponge Replace Every service 1-6-53
Drum separation claw unit Replace Every service 1-6-50
Waste toner box Replace Every service
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Fixing section Fixing unit Replace Every service 1-6-55
Heat roller Replace Every service 1-6-57
Press roller Replace Every service 1-6-59
Press roller separation Clean Every serviceclaw
Fixing unit thermistor Check and clean Every service Clean with alcohol; check the 1-6-61level of wear on contactingsurfaces.
Fixing web roller Replace Every service 1-6-62
Lower cleaning roller Replace Every service 1-6-60
Fixing heater M Check Every service Check for decrease of quantity of 1-6-55light.
Fixing heater S Check Every service Check for decrease of quantity of 1-6-55light.
Heat roller separation Replace Every service 1-6-63claw unit
Heat roller separation Replace Every service 1-6-63claw
Guides Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Eject section Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Eject pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Guides Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-17
2BC/D-1
2-4-20
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Feedshift and Duplex pressure release Check or replace Every service Replace after feeding 500,000duplex sections solenoid sheets.
Rollers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Guides Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Bushes Check and grease Every service Check for unusual noise at theroller section. If unusual noiseoccurs, apply grease 1.
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
DF section DF forwarding pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67the user.
DF feed pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67the user.
DF separation pulley Replace or clean Every 100,000 counts Clean with alcohol when visiting 1-6-67-1the user.
DF registration roller Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Front reading pulley Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
DF registration pulley Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry clothif it is dirty.
Original feed switch Check or clean Every service Clean with airbrush or a dry cloth.
Lower original conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.rollerUpper original conveying Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.roller
Upper original conveying Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry clothpulley if it is dirty.
Original conveying guide Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original conveying pulley Clean Every service Clean the opposite side of the DFcover timing switch with alcohol or a dry
cloth.
Middle original conveying Clean Every 400,000 counts Clean with alcohol (Remove theroller front, rear and right covers and
original conveying pulley mountplate).
Middle original conveying Clean Every 400,000 counts Clean with alcohol (Remove thepulley front, rear and right covers and
original conveying pulley mountplate).
Eject pulley Check or clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry clothif it is dirty.
Original size length switch Clean Every service Clean with alcohol. Filter
Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol.
Original holder mat Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original holder sheet Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original size indicator Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.sponge
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
2-4-18
2BC/D-1
2-4-21
MaintenanceSection part/location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Page
Other Drum drive grounding Check and grease Every service Apply conductive greaseplate GE-334C.
Ozone filter Replace Every service
• Run the following maintenance modes.
Method Maintenance item contents Page
U126 Setting of effective potential correction 1-4-33
U130 Initial setting for the developer 1-4-34
U160 Applying toner to the cleaning blade 1-4-38
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count 1-4-32
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time 1-4-33
U909 Checking/clearing the fixing web count 1-4-69
U921 Checking/clearing the waste toner box maintenance count value 1-4-70
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count 1-4-52
2-4-18-1
2BC/D-1
2-4-22
This page is intentionally left blank.
2BC/D
2-4-23
Optional devices supplied parts list
Multi finisher
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.Main tray Main tray 3B804140Finisher connecting plate Finisher connecting plate 3B803010Stapler cartridge Stapler cartridge 3B827020M4 × 12 binding screw M4 × 12 binding screw B1304120Hexagonal nut Hexagonal nut C1054070Pin Pin 33920500Sub tray Sub tray 3B804180Paper insertion aid guide plate Paper insertion aid guide plate 3B816900M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw B3314100Connecting sponge Connecting sponge 3B803020
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.Main tray Main tray 3B804140Finisher connecting plate Finisher connecting plate 3B803010Stapler cartridge Stapler cartridge 3B827020M4 × 12 binding screw M4 × 12 binding screw B1304120Hexagonal nut Hexagonal nut C1054070Pin Pin 33920500Paper insertion aid guide plate Paper insertion aid guide plate 3B816900M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw M4 × 10 tap-tight binding screw B3314100Connecting sponge Connecting sponge 3B803020
Simple finisher
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.Upper merge guide Upper merge guide 2BD60010Lower merge guide Lower merge guide 2BD60020Interlock switch backstop Interlock switch backstop 3BF19720M4 × 6 TP-A chromate screw M4×6 TP-A chromate screw B4004060M4 × 12 flat head screw M4×12 flat head screw B200412M3 × 6 TP-A bronze screw M3×6 TP-A bronze screw B4303060M4 × 8 TP-P tight screw M4×8 TP-P tight screw B4044080
Side deck
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.Core Core 2AV274400Clamp Clamp M25051900
Network scanner kit
Name used in service manual Name used in installation guide Part No.Interface PCB Interface PCB 3BS28010Interface cable Interface cable 3BS27010M4 × 6 bronze binding screw M4×6 bronze binding screw B1304060M2.6 × 5 brass binding screw M2.6×5 brass binding screw B1600050Assembly relay PCB Assembly relay PCB 2BC60020
Tandem kit
2-4-19
2BC/D
2-4-20
Functions and settings combination chart
02
02
02
02
02
02
04
05
12
12
12
12
12
17
18
14
21
21
19
20
23
11
25
26
27
02
02
02
04
08
12
12
12
12
12
17
18
21
21
19
20
23
11
25
26
27
05
12
12
16
14
13
13
10
10
15
15
15
02
02
03
02
02
02
03
02
03
02
02
03
02
02
03
02
02
02
03
02
02
02
04
04
05
05
05
07
06
06
08
24
07
06
06
12
12
09
10
11
12
12
09
11
05
12
12
09
14
13
13
10
10
11
15
15
15
12
12
02
02
02
02
02
01
01
Image quality (text mode)
Image quality (photo mode)
Image quality (text+photo mode)
Copy exposure (manual exposure adjustment)
Copy exposure (auto exposure adjustment)
Auto paper selection mode (Same size: 100% [1:1])
Auto paper selection mode (enlargement/reduction)
Auto magnification selection mode
Same size (100% [1:1]) copying
Zoom mode
Preset zoom mode
XY zoom mode
Eco print mode
Margin mode
Centering/Image shift mode
Border erase (sheet erase mode)
Border erase (book erase mode)
1-sided copying (1-sided R 1-sided)
2-sided copying (1-sided R 2-sided)
2-sided copying (2-sided R 2-sided)
2-sided copying (book R 2-sided)
Page separation/Split copy (2-sided R 1-sided)
Page separation/Split copy (book R 1-sided)
Booklet/Stitching mode
Book to Booklet mode
Cover mode
Transparency + backing sheet mode
Paper selection
Original set direction
Original size selection (standard size)
Original size selection (custom size)
Original size selection (auto selection)
Original size selection (filing)
Sort mode
Finished mode
Staple mode
Punch mode
Copy eject location
Invert mode
Mirror image mode
Print page numbers mode
Form overlay mode
Combine/Merge Copy modes
Memo mode
Batch scanning mode
Proof mode
Repeat copy mode (settings)
Repeat copy mode (print out)
Document management functions (form registration)
Document management functions (shared data box [storing documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [storing documents])
Document management functions (shared data box [printing out documents])
Document management functions (synergy print boxes [printing out documents])
Output management functions (interrupt print)
Job build copying (step 1)
Job build copying (from step 2)
Interrupt copying
Scanner functions (Scan to PC)
Scanner functions (Send E-mail)
Scanner functions (TWAIN)
Function selected secondFunction selected first
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
09
09
09
16
18
18
17
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
24
14
14
14
13
13
21
21
17
18
19
20
21
21
07
07
13
13
21
21
17
18
19
20
21
21
03
03
03
03
03
03
06
06
10
10
10
19
19
17
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
02
02
02
02
02
02
06
06
10
10
20
20
17
18
20
20
20
20
20
20
18
22
18
22
23
23
18
11
11
11
11
11
17
18
19
20
15
15
25
25
19
20
25
25
25
02
02
02
15
15
26
26
17
21
21
19
20
25
26
02
02
02
15
15
27
27
17
21
21
19
20
25
26
25
: Combination is possible---: Combination is NOT possible01: Auto exposure adjustment is not available for
the photo mode. The text+photo mode, thetext mode, or manual exposure adjustment willbe selected.
02: Only the auto magnification selection mode isavailable. That mode will be selected.
03: Only same size (100% [1:1]) copying in theauto paper selection mode is available. Thatmode will be selected.
04: The margin mode and the booklet/stitchingmode, or book to booklet mode, cannot beused in combination with each other.
05: Only available with open-faced originals(books, etc.) if they are set on the platen.
06: The border erase modes and the autoselection/filing mode cannot be used incombination with each other.
07: The border erase modes and the customoriginal size setting cannot be used incombination with each other.
08: The sheet erase mode and the book erasemode cannot be used in combination witheach other.
09: The transparency + backing sheet mode andthe 2-sided copy modes cannot be used incombination with each other.
10: Cannot be used in combination with autoselection/filing mode.
11: The 2-sided copy modes and the invert modecannot be used in combination with eachother.
12: The booklet/stitching mode and book tobooklet mode will be given second prioritywhen the2-sided copy modes or the page separation/split copy modes are selected.
13: Open-faced originals cannot be used incombination with original size selection.
14: Not available because open-faced originalsmust be set with the top edge towards the rearof the copier.
15: Not available in combination with open-facedoriginals.
16: The book R page separation/split copy modeand the transparency + backing sheet modecannot be used in combination with eachother.
17: Not available in combination with the covermode.
18: Not available in combination with thetransparency + backing sheet mode.
19: Not available in combination with original sizeselection (auto selection).
20: Not available in combination with original sizeselection (filing).
21: Not available in combination with the originalsize selection.
22: The finished mode and the staple modecannot be used in combination with eachother.
23: The punch mode and the staple mode cannotbe used in combination with each other.
24: The original set direction cannot be selectedbecause the book erase mode was selectedand originals must be set with the top edgetowards the rear of the copier.
25: Not available in combination with the formoverlay mode.
26: Not available in combination with thecombine/merge copy mode.
27: The memo mode and the booklet/stitchingmode, or book to booklet mode, cannot beused in combination with each other.
¡ Insert blank sheet™ Start on front of copy£ Enter number of copies (copy sets) to be
made
A B C D E F G H I J
A B C D E F G H I J
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
General wiring diagram 2BC/D
2-4-21
P.G
BE
P.G
BE
P.G
BE
24V
RD
24V
RD
FINISHER
P.G
BE
24V
RD
24V
S.G
BE
SCANNER DRIVEPCB
DIG
KE
Y_4
YW
SC
AN
_7 Y
W
5V Y
W
LCD
LO
AD
WE
LCD
CP
WE
LCD
VS
S(S
.G)
WE
LCD
VD
D(5
V)
WE
LCD
D2
WE
LCD
D3
WE
LCD
D0
WE
LCD
D1
WE
12111098765432
S.G
ND
YW
1
Y2
WE
X2
WE
VD
D(5
V)
VS
S(S
.G)
Y1
WE
LCD
FR
AM
E W
E
X1
WE
24V
YW
P.G
ND
YW
LAM
P O
FF
YW
TOUCH PANEL
VE
E O
FF
WE
LCD
DIS
P O
FF
WE
DIG
KE
Y_8
YW
SC
AN
_5 Y
WD
IG K
EY
_9 Y
W
SC
AN
_8 Y
WD
IG L
ED
_7 Y
W
DIG
KE
Y_5
YW
DIG
KE
Y_6
YW
DIG
KE
Y_7
YW
SC
AN
_6 Y
W
LCD
OPCB-L OPCB-R
DF
b
S.G
BE
P.G
BE
P.G
BE
24V
RD
24V
RD
a
5V OES.G BE
SH
IELD
BO
X
96
Z CROSS SIG GN
SLEEP SIG YW5V OE
PR
IPC
B
PM
BD
LD
3-1
READY YWYWYW
START YWG(5V) YWCLOK YW
3-53-6
3-2
3-43-3
G(5V) WE/BD - WE/BD + WEG(5V) WER5V WEWE
2-32-22-1
2-42-5
G(5V) WE/VD2 - WE/VD2 + WE/VD1 - WE/VD1 + WEG(5V) WE/EN WEG(5V) WE/ADJUST 2 WEG(5V) WE/ADJUST 1 WEG(5V) WER5V OE
1-131-121-111-10
1-9
1-31-21-1
1-41-5
1-8
1-61-7
LSU
HDD
DF
TS
W B
N
SZ
SW
A P
K
DF
SS
W1
GN
SE
T S
W B
N
DF
SS
W2
GY
SZ
DE
T L
B
DF
SH
OR
T Y
W
OF
SW
PK
OS
BS
W G
N
119874 65321
b
S.G
N.C
5VP.G
P.G24V
24V
SB
FS
SO
L G
Y
OF
SO
L(R
ET
) LB
OF
SO
L(A
CT
) P
K
OF
M C
LK B
N
OF
M C
WB
GY
OC
M E
NA
BLE
LB
OC
M C
LK P
K
OC
M C
WB
GN
OC
M V
ref Y
W
OC
M M
3 B
N
DF
OS
LED
(R
ED
) P
K
OS
LED
(G
N)
LB
SB
PS
OL
(RE
T)
WE
SB
PS
OL
(AC
T)
GN
OF
CL
BN
EF
SS
OL
YW
OF
M E
NA
BLE
GN
OF
M R
ET
YW
OC
M M
2 G
Y
OC
M M
1 LB
2-12-22-32-42-52-62-7
1-11-21-31-41-51-61-71-81-91-101-11
CCDPCB(4ch)
DUPESW WE
DUPJSW WE
BE
DUPPCSW1 WE
SET SIG WE
S.G BE
S.G BE
5V OE
5V OE
SIG LB
5V OE
S.G BE
SIG BN
SIG YW
SIG GN
S.G BE
5V OE
DU
PE
SW
DU
PJS
WD
UP
PC
SW
1D
UP
FS
SW
OPTIONSH
21
h
i h 2 134
6 5910
8 7
i
9-13
1
32
14
56
78
910
1112
1314
1516
1718
1920
21
24-13
24-9
5432112345
5432112345
OU
T
IN
OUT RDIN RD
2122 22 e
e
1 21 2
13
13
12
12
FW
EB
SO
L
IFF
M
12
21
12
21
HD
DF
M
R24
V R
DD
SP
S B
NS
G B
EP
G B
E
14-1
014
-914
-814
-7
24V
WE
24V
WE
21
12 FFMR24V WE
FFM WE
32
11
23
98
76
12
34
51
23
49
87
65
k
k1314
1516
7-327-31
MSW SW OFF REM WE24V WE
21
43
56
78
910
1112
12
37
89
104
56
11
2019181716151413121110987654321
2 11 2
j
j
a
1819
2021
1710
1112
1314
1516
32
11
23
14-214-1 24V RD
HDDFM BK
14-614-5
2-6 771
65
43
21
65
43
2 61
23
45
6 8-6
DPLSW3-RWTBSWDPLSW2-R
DPLSW3-L
G(5
V)
BE
G(5
V)
BE
2-3
2-4
6-11
6-7
i
12-3
2re
serv
e ou
t
rese
rve
in12
-31
DH
1
NCNC
5-9
2-7
5V O
E
12
1-111-101-91-81-71-61-51-41-31-21-1
1-12
1110
98
76
54
32
1
12
NCNC26-10
26-11
26-2226-21
10-3
1615
1413
1211
109
87
65
43
21
22
11
12
21
64
21
35
810
79
1412
1113
1618
2015
1719
4-20NC GY
24V RDPCL2 BN
4-164-15
24V RDPCL1 LB
4-144-13
PCL2
PCL1
9876543219123456789
GND BEWTDS YW
5V OE
16-1116-1016-9
PT
C
3-9
4-5
24V
RD
P.G
BE
g
NC
18-B
9N
C18
-A2
7-247-237-227-21
7-87-77-67-5
12
3
5V WEDSW-R WES.GND WE
5V WEDSW-L WES.GND WE
GYGYGY
GYGYGY
5
S.G BE5V OE 5-10
6-10
5V OE
S.G(5V) BE
17-817-7
21
ha
h
21
7-327-31
N.CN.C
8
8-138-12
8-11
12
31
23
2-5
Heater controlcircuit
12-1
12-48-3
13-6
24V
RD
DH REM WE
17-6
DH WE
21
1-14
14 12-1PTC ALM GY
20-2
20-1
20-3
8
20-3
620
-35
20-3
7
5V B
ND
PLS
W3-
L B
NS
.GN
D B
N
5V G
YD
PLS
W3-
R G
YS
.GN
D G
Y
32
11
23
13 213 2
21
21
43
34
12
21
65
43
41
23
41
23
FCL2-L FCL5FCL4FCL3FCL2-H
14
32
16
54
32
61
23
45
104
53
21
98
76
P.G
161514131211109
FE
ED
RE
QE
ST
FE
ED
SW
SIG
FEED REQEST(SIDE DECK)13-10
FEED SW SIG(SIDE DECK)13-9
RE
SE
TS
ET
SIG
TxD
G(5
V)
RxD
G(5
V)
RE
AD
YF
EE
D
S.G 5V 24V
24V
P.G
BACKLIGHT
CC
FT
HO
TN
.CN
.CC
CF
T C
OLD
6-4
6-3
6-2
6-1
LCD
VS
S(S
.G)
WE
CN1
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12 5-
55-
65-
75-
8
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
4-4
4-3
4-2
4-1
X1
Y1
X2
Y2
PF
SW
6 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
WG
YG
Y
GY
321123
321123
PF
SW
5 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
WG
YG
Y
GY
PF
SW
4 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
W
PF
SW
3 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
WG
YG
Y
GY
GY
GY
GY
PF
SW
2 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
W
321123
321123
321123
321123
321
32
11
23
32
11
23
5V WEDLISW WES.GND WE5V WEDPCSW2 WES.GND WE
12
33
21
12
33
21
i
S.GND(SIDE DECK)13-6
FEED(SIDE DECK)
READY(SIDE DECK)13-7
13-8
RxD(SIDE DECK)
S.GND(SIDE DECK)13-4
13-5
TxD(SIDE DECK)
SET SIG(SIDE DECK)
RESET(SIDE DECK)
13-3
13-2
13-1
KM
AS
CON WEN.C
DREQ PKACK GN
TD YWS.GND BE
RD BNS.GND BES.GND BES.GND BE
5V OE5V OE
16-1116-1016-916-816-716-616-516-416-316-216-1
16-12
12
2112
g
OPERATION UNIT
4-6
P.G
MAINPCB
S.G(3.4V) BE3.4V OE
24V RDP.G BE5V OE
18-6 S.G(3.4V) BE18-5 3.4V BN18-4 S.G BE18-3 5V OE18-2 P.G BE18-1 24V RD
8
WTDS
N.CN.C
S.G
ND
WENC
20-3
4
N.C
N.C
10-B
1610
-B17
10-A
17
BU
ZZ
ER
WE
17
DIG
LE
D_6
WE
13121110987654321
11-1
311
-12
11-1
111
-10
11-9
11-8
11-7
11-6
11-5
11-4
11-3
11-2
11-1
DIG
LE
D_4
WE
DIG
LE
D_3
WE
DIG
LE
D_2
WE
DIG
LE
D_1
WE
SC
AN
_4 W
E
DIG
KE
Y_3
WE
DIG
KE
Y_2
WE
SC
AN
_2 W
ES
CA
N_1
WE
DIG
LE
D_5
WE
DIG
KE
Y_1
WE
SC
AN
_3 W
E
LCD
CO
NT
LCD
DIS
P O
FF
1 2
DH
3
A10
A10
B12
B10
B11
B12
B11
B10
12
WT
BS
W W
E
16-12NC
A10
A10
B12
B11
B10
B12
B11
B10
2112
N.C21-5
8-14
8-108-9
8-188-17
8-168-15
R24V WEDLM-R WE
R24V WEDLM-L WE
19-B
8N
.C19
-B7
19-A
619
-A5
321123
123
GN
D(5
V)
WE
YW
YW
YW
FD
ES
W W
E5V
WE
FDESW
43
21
512
1110
98
76
43
21
51
23
46
78
910
1112
21
31
12
21
12
34
12
3
21 1 2
DH
2
24-1224-1124-10
22-A122-B122-A222-B2
22-B322-A3
22-B422-A4
22-B522-A5
22-B622-A6
22-B722-A7
22-B822-A8
22-A922-B9
22-A1022-B10
21-8
21-1221-1121-1021-9
21-721-6
21-421-3
21-221-1
BEYW
PEGYLBGNBEYWBE
BERD
KE
YC
OU
NT
ER
(OP
TIO
N)
KE
Y C
AR
D(O
PT
ION
)
G(5V)TxDRxD
G(5V)RxD
COPYING SIGEJECT COUNTFEED COUNT
COIN ENG(5V)
FG
G(24V)
FG
OP
TIO
Non
ly fo
r ja
pan
24V
TxD
CO
IN V
EN
DE
R
KEY CARD REM24VS.GNDCopy enableb05Vb15Vb25Vb35Vb45Vb55Vb65V
KE
Y C
AR
D(M
K-1
)O
PT
ION
(onl
y fo
r ja
pan)
b75V
SET G BE
R24V RD
COUNT REM BK
SET SIG BN
CN
6
CF
12345678987654321
321 654 321 321321456 123 123 123123
13 213 213 213 2
123
DPLSW1-RDPLSW2-L
DPLSW1-LPFSW6PFSW1 PFSW2 PFSW3 PFSW4 PFSW5
20-2
320
-22
20-2
1
5V G
YD
PLS
W2-
R G
YS
.GN
D G
Y20
-32
20-3
120
-30
5V G
YD
PLS
W1-
R G
YS
.GN
D G
Y
20-2
920
-28
20-2
75V
BN
DP
LSW
2-L
BN
S.G
ND
BN
20-2
620
-25
20-2
4
5V B
ND
PLS
W1-
L B
NS
.GN
D B
N
GY
GY
GY
YW
YW
YW
WE
WE
WE
GY
GY
GY
YW
YW
YW
WE
WE
WE
20-2
020
-19
20-1
8
20-3
3
NC
20-1
720
-16
20-1
5
20-1
420
-13
20-1
2
20-1
120
-10
20-9
20-8
20-7
20-6
20-5
20-4
20-3
20-4
0
20-3
9
PF
SW
1 Y
W5V
YW
GN
D Y
W
19-A
119
-A2
TC
TC
WE
R24
V W
E
32
13
21
S.G GY
OSDS1 GY
OSDS2 GY
S.G GY
5V GY
5V GY
7-67-57-4
7-37-27-1
OS
DS
2O
SD
S1 16-8
16-616-416-2
LOCK DRAIVE GY
P.G BER24V RD
DDM REM BN
1-11-2
1-41-3D
DM
PF
M
16-716-516-316-1
LOCK DRAIVE GY
P.G BER24V RD
PFM REM BN
1-11-2
1-41-3
13
24-1
24-2
19-B
6
4323 2 14
1
HUMS
S.G
(TH
) W
ET
H W
E
HU
MS
SIG
WE
5V W
E
A5
A1
10-1510-16
10-4
10-1310-14
10-1210-1110-1010-910-810-710-610-5
10-210-1
65
43
21
32
11
23
12
3
15
42
37
610
1112
1314
1516
89
24VG(24V)
1-151-16OSDS1 GY
OSDS2 GY
65
43
21G(5.1V)
5.1V6-6
6-5
c
12
34
56
1-4
G(5V) GY
EL ON
G(24V)
1-6
1-33-424V24V
3-53-6
1-21-1
3-1
6-4
6-3
6-2
6-1G(24V)
24V
SD
PC
B
5-15-25-3
5V WEODSW WEGND WEODSW GY
SM Vref GYSM M1 GY
1-131-14
4-34-24-1
SM M3 GYN.CN.CSM CLK GYSM CWB GYSM RET GYSM ENABLE GYEL ON REM GYSHPSW GY
5V OESHPSW GNGND BE
SH
PS
W
EL ON
G(24V)
3-23-3
1-51-4
B WEA WE
2-12-22-32-42-52-6
SM
24V WE
24V WE
1-121-111-101-91-81-71-61-5
1-31-21-1
SM M2 GY
2-1
2-4
INP
CB
EL
OD
SW
14-4
4-184-19
24V RDCL BK
CL
NC
NC
9-B9
9-B8
9-B7
9-B6
9-B5
9-B4
9-B3
9-B2
9-B1
IFM
PC
M
19-B
319
-B4
19-B
5
18-B
118
-B2
18-A
318
-A1
19-A
419
-A3
12-9
12-8
R24V WE
3-B93-B8
3-B73-B6
3-B53-B4
3-B33-B23-B1
3-A6
3-A93-A83-A7
25-425-3
25-2
25-1
21
12R24V WE
PCFM WE
B5
B5
PCFM
B6
B4
FIX
ING
UN
IT
3-A33-A4
A4S.GND WE
SET SIG WE
A2
A3
A3
A5
21
B9
B9
12
98
76
54
32
1
3
78
94
56
12
3
12
3
32
1
SET SIG WE
26-14
S.GND WEPKPK
B1
B9
26-9
A9
A9
41
233
41
2
EFM2EFM1
19-B
119
-B2
EF
M2
WE
2 11 2
15-B115-B215-B315-B415-B515-B615-B715-B815-B9
15-A115-A215-A315-A415-A515-A615-A715-A815-A9
987654321
987654321
10
123456789
NC
P.G YW
R24V YW
S.G YW5V YW
IFM REM YWLOCK ALM YW
CLOCK YW
R24V YW
P.G YW
1-10
1-81-9
1-61-7
1-11-2
1-51-41-3
10
123456789
NC
P.G WE
R24V WE
S.G WE5V WE
PCM REM WELOCK ALM WE
CLOCK WE
R24V WE
P.G WE
1-10
1-81-9
1-61-7
1-11-2
1-51-41-3
5V WEDPCSWI WES.GND WE YW
YWYWWEWEWELBLBLB
BKRD
5V WEDPSW WES.GND WE
BNBNBN
5V WEPSW3 WES.GND WE5V WELILSW WES.GND WE
5V WEPSW2 WE
S.GND WE5V WE
LILSW2 WES.GND WE
5V WEPSW1 WE
S.GND WE
26-1326-12
26-2026-19
26-1826-17
26-15
26-16
R24V WEPFCL4 WE
12
21
26-826-726-626-526-426-326-226-1
8-88-78-68-58-48-38-28-1
7-287-277-267-25
7-127-117-107-9
2-6
2-5
11-4
11-32-2
2-1
11-5
11-6
24-324-4
24-524-624-7
19-A
719
-A8
18-B
818
-B7
18-B
618
-B5
18-B
418
-B3
18-A
918
-A8
18-A
718
-A6
18-A
518
-A4
CO
M(G
) LB
17-1
017
-917
-817
-717
-6
17-5
17-4
17-3
17-2
17-1
14-1414-13
14-3 24V RDFWEBSOL GN
RDBK
14-1114-12
R24V RDIFFM BK
13-5
13-2
13-7
13-3
13-8
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-6
12-2
12-4
12-3
12-5
12-7
9-A1
9-A2
9-A3
9-A4
9-A5
9-A6
9-A7
9-A8
9-A9
BYPPFCL YW
R24V YW
7-17
7-147-13
7-207-197-18
7-167-15
PWSW-L DIG 0 LB
PWSW-L DIG 2 LBS.GND LB
PWSW-L DIG 1 LBBK
BKBK
BK
PW
SW
-L
7-47-37-27-1
6-12
6-11
6-106-9
6-86-7
6-6
6-5
6-4
6-3
6-2
6-1
5-65-5
5-45-35-25-1
4-17
4-124-11
4-104-94-84-7
TNS GNR24V RD
OUT LBG(5V) BE
4-64-5
4-44-3
4-24-1
5V WERSW WEG(5V) WE
GYGYGY
3-A5
3-A23-A1
DE
V •
BIA
S
S.G(5V) BE
21
24-8
9-19-29-39-49-5
9-119-12
9-109-9
9-6
9-89-7
8-58-48-38-28-1
7-47-37-27-1
CN
4C
N3
CN
2
1312
1110
98
76
54
32
1
1-13
RDRD
YW
1-12
R24V GY
GND(24V) GY
1-6SC/TC ALM GY
1-5SC CONT GY
1-1PTC REM GY
1-3TC CONT GY
1-11
1-10
MC REM GY
DB REM GY HV
TP
CB
1-8
1-7
1-9
1-4
AC
TC
1-2
DB CONT GY
G CONT GY
SC REM GY
TC REM GY
MC ALM GY
5V YW
BYPPLSW YW
G(5V) YW
G(5V) YW
BYPTSW YW
BYPPWSW DIG 0 YW
BYPPWSW DIG 1 YW
G(5V) YWGYBEPKPKPK
YW
BE
BE2BOE
GYGYGY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
12
43
98
76
12
34
5
BYPPWSW DIG 2 YW
21
3 11
23
2
12
34
12
3 98
76
5
BY
PP
WS
W
BY
PT
SW
BY
PP
LSW
13
12
12
76
54
3
12
32
1
R24V YW
BYPSOL YW75
12
34
6
S.GND YW
BYPPSW YW
5V YW
BY
PP
SW
BY
PS
OL
BY
PP
FC
L
DS
W-L
DS
W-R
DP
CS
W1
DP
CS
W2
12
31
23
DF
CL
B6
B5
B4
B3
B9
B8
B7
B2
B8
B3
B2
B1
B7
B6
B5
B4
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
DE
CK
CO
NV
EY
ING
UN
IT
12
DP
SW
2
DFCL WERDBK
DLI
LSW
2P
FC
L4
21
A1
21 DLM
-R
21 DLM
-L
2 11 2
R24
V Y
WF
CL2
-L Y
W
FCL1-L
2 11 2
R24
V Y
WF
CL1
-L Y
W
FCL1-H
EF
M1
WE
2 11 2
PLS
W-U
PLS
W-L
PW
SW
-U
PA
PE
R F
EE
D
UN
IT C
12
DP
SW
1
PFCL3 WER24V WE
OEPKBEOEWEBE
BKRD
12
31
23
DLI
LSW
1P
FC
L3
21
87
65
43
21
41
23
56
78
PA
PE
R F
EE
D
UN
IT B
12 P
SW
2
PFCL2 WER24V WE
12
31
23
LILS
W2
PF
CL2
21
87
65
43
21
41
23
56
78
PA
PE
R F
EE
D
UN
IT A
12
1234DSPS
CF
M W
E24
V W
E
CFM
TCCM FWD WETCCM REV WE
GYGY
GYGY
GYGY
FSSOL A WEFSSOL P WECOM(R24V) WE
B1
B2
B8
A1
A9
TCCM
A9
A6
A4
A5
A5
A4
RSW
A2
A8
A6
A3
FSSOL
LM-L
R24
V L
BLM
-L L
B
UP
LES
W1
LB
UP
LES
W2
LB
LM-U
R24
V P
KLM
-U P
K
UP
LES
W1
PK
CO
M(G
) P
KU
PLE
SW
2 P
K
G(5V) WE
5V WEFSSW SIG WE
G(5V) WE
WE
WE
BK
BK
BK
BKBK
BK
5V WEESW SIG WE
GYGYGY
GY
GYGY
GY
GYGY
YWGNRD
WE
WEWE
YW
YWYW
FTH SIG WE
5V(TH) WE
FSSW
ESW
B7
B3
A3
A7
98
76
54
32
18
76
54
32
1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15-1115-1015-915-815-715-615-515-415-315-215-1
9
NS
PC
B
1615
1413
1211
1099
1011
1213
1415
16
98
76
54
32
11
23
45
67
81
23
45
67
8
f
FG
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P.GP.G
FG
P.G
N.C
GN
N.C
P.G24V24V24V5V OE
G(5V) BEE 5V OE
12
34
56
78
d
RxD GNG(5V) BETxD BNG(5V) BE
SET SIG PKRESET YW
Fin
ishe
r
Side deck
34
5-2
3-63-5
4-9
3-6
3-5
4-10
5-4
4-1
3-1
3-7
4-8
5-2
6-2
1-6
2-3
1-7
2-4
1-10
1-4
7-27-1
6-65-57-37-4
1-5
S.G(12V) BE12V PE
12
34 S.G BE
6-3
5-3
CN
5
21
ts
24V RD
24V RD
1-3
1-2
F202 8A F201 8A F301 4A
5V
24V
24V
F202
F201
F3015-45-3
3-83-7
3-43-33-23-1
A7
A8
A4
B8
B7
B4
B3B4
B2
B5
B1
B6
A4
A3
A5
A2
A6
A1
1110
98
76
54
32
112
1110
98
76
54
32
1
S.G BE5V OE
2-22-1
TA
MP
CB
22
(S.G)(5V)
TAM PCB
5V OES.G BE
B2
B1
242322212019181716151413121110987654321 10
k
j
i
h
gf
e
d
c
b
a
k
21 3
4 65 9
10879
1087
j
i
h
g
f
ed
c
b
aJOINT CONNECTOR
6453
21
4-7
2-2
5V O
E5V
OE
5V O
E
5V
t
s
3-8
6-4
5-6
3-2
3-3
3-4
4-2
4-3
4-4
5-11
5-12
5-16-9
6-1
2-7
6-82-65-7
HDD5V OES.G BE
MAINPCB
SIDEDECK
d
5V5V5V
G(analog)G(analog)+12VN.COS4 -OS4 +OS3 -OS3 +OS1 -OS1 +OS2 -OS2 +
BEBEPE
YWBNGYLBPKGNYWBN
GY
GYGYGYGYGYGYGYGYGYGYGY
BNYWGNPKLBGYBNYWOEOEOE
GYGY
GYGY
GYGYGYGYGYGYGY
15-12
14-1114-1014-914-814-714-614-514-414-314-214-1 11
109
87
65
43
21
1211
109
87
65
43
21
A2
A1
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1B2
B3B4
B5
B6
4321
56
24V
RD
P.G
BE
P.G
BE
24V
RD
2-12
2-82-92-102-11
43
21
R24V RD
R24V
23
1
DUPPRSOL A WE
12
34
5
23
45
67
89
1011
12131
23
45
67
89
1011
1213
2 12 12 13 1 2 1 11 2
R24
V Y
WF
CL5
YW
1 21 211 3 1 2
R24
V Y
WF
CL4
YW
R24
V P
KF
CL3
PK
R24
V Y
WF
CL2
-H Y
W
R24
V Y
WR
CL
YW
R24
V Y
WF
CL1
-H Y
W
S.G BE5V OE
BEOE
R24V RD
R24V RDR24V RD
RDRD
RDRD
DUPPEVCL WE
12V PE
5V OES.G BES.G BE
P.G
24V
LIVE OUT BK
LIVE IN(MSW ON) BK
BK
56
95V
201918171615141312
312
DU
PR
EV
CL
DU
PF
WD
CL
21
REMR24V
21
REMR24V
CN2 CN3
S.G
ND
YW
12-3
0
c
MSW
B6
B3
A2
A1
A2
A1
OPCB
10-B
1510
-B14
10-B
1310
-B12
10-B
1110
-B10
10-B
910
-B8
10-B
710
-B6
10-B
510
-B4
10-B
310
-B2
10-B
1
VS
S(S
.G)
LCD
FLA
ME
LCD
LO
AD
LCD
CP
LCD
D0
LCD
D1
LCD
D2
LCD
D3
16151413121110987654321 14 15 171613121110987654321
DIG
LE
D_8
YW
321
3
21
321
32
1
DUPPCSW2 WE
S.G BE
5V OE
SIG PK
DU
PP
CS
W2
CN1
CN1
24V
P.G
S.G
f
24V
RD
10-A
1610
-A15
10-A
1410
-A13
10-A
1210
-A11
10-A
1010
-A9
10-A
810
-A7
10-A
610
-A5
10-A
410
-A3
10-A
210
-A1
12-2
112
-22
12-2
3
12-2
412
-25
12-2
612
-27
12-2
812
-29
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-8
12-7
12-1
012
-9
12-1
212
-11
12-1
412
-13
12-1
612
-15
12-1
812
-17
12-2
012
-19
DUPFSSW WE
24V
SO
UR
CE
RD
DUPLEX UNIT
12
3
PA
RE
RC
ON
VE
YIN
G U
NIT
PS
W1
LILSW 1 WES.GND WE
PFCL1 WER24V WE
12
31
23
LILS
W1
PF
CL1
21
87
65
43
21
41
23
56
78
5V WE
12
12
YW
8A 250V15A 125V
230V
FUSE1100 to 120V
NOISEFILTER
TLS YWG(5V) BE
R5V OE
TFM GNGNBN
GNBN
PKBN
BELBRDGN
BEYWOE
BKRD
LBRD
BNRD
WE
WE
BKBKBKBK
TFM BN
TAM GNTAM BN
SS
W1
RD
SS
W2
RD
RD
BK
24V
SO
UR
CE
RD
BK
WE
BK
BK
WE
WE
SSW 1 SSW 2
1-9
G(R
24V
) B
E
11-1
R24
V R
D
9-1 NEUTRAL OUT WE
WE
WEBK
WE
WE
13 or 1413 or 14COM WHITE
LIVE BLACK
COM WHITE
LIVE BLACK
220-240V
120V
COM WHITE
LIVE BLACK
100V
FUSE1
TF
M
TA
M
TLD
S
RCL
PLSW-U WES.GND WE
GYGY
S.GND WEPLSW-L WE
YWYW
4PWSW-U DIG 0 PK
PWSW-U DIG 2 PKS.GND PK
PWSW-U DIG 1 PKBK
BKBK
BK
12
334
12
MC
Imag
e fo
rmat
ion
unit
TN
S
MC
CM
MCCM REV BNMCCM FWD PK
GR
ID
5V OE17-1
17-5
Z CROSS SIG GN
17-217-317-4
SLEEP SIG YW
3 DUPESSOL A WE
FH
-S R
EM
GY
FH
-M R
EM
BN
G(24V) BER24V RD
2-9
9-2
10-2
10-1Phase controlcircuit 1 FH-S
11
2
FTS
FH-M
FTH
2 1
LIVE OUT BK BK
BK
BK
WE
PR
Y R
EM
GN
24V
PSPCB
R24
V R
D11
-2
8-1
8-5
TB3
TB1
TB2
GN
RD
BE
WE
YW
GN
RD
BE
WE
5V OE
a
2-8
6-5
5-8
1-8
G(R
24V
) B
E
G(5
V)
BE
5V
OE
G(2
4V)
BE
MPCB
EPCB
SPARK SUPPRESSOR
AK
MS
W O
FF
RE
M
DUPESSOL P WE
DUPPRSOL P WE
DUPFWDCL WE
GN
LB
BN
GY
YW
PK
R24V
21
DU
PE
SS
OL
43 or 44 43 or 44
4
5
3
2
1
23 or 2423 or 24
PRY
33 or 3433 or 34
A1 or A2A1 or A2
DU
PP
RS
OL
B WE
A WE
CLP -φ CLP +φ RS +φ RS -φ CLK -φ CLK +φ SHIFT +φ SHIFT -φ
GYPELBOERDPKWEBEGNYWBNBK
GRAYPURPLE
LIGHT BLUEORANGE
REDPINK
WHITEBLUE
GREENYELLOWBROWNBLACK
SymbolWire color
©2002 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
Printed in Holland
KYOCERA MITA DANMARK A/SIndustrivej 11, DK-4632 Bjæverskov,DenmarkPhone: 56871100
KYOCERA MITA PORTUGAL LDA.CASCAISTOCK-Armazem nº8,Rua das Fisgas, Alcoitão,2765 Estoril, PortugalPhone: (21) 4602221
KYOCERA MITA SOUTH AFRICA (PTY) LTD.UNIT 3, "Kyalami Crescent,"Kyalami Business Park,1685 Midrand, South AfricaPhone: (11) 466-3290
KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.Headquarters:225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008,Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008,U.S.A.Phone: (973) 808-8444
KYOCERA MITA AUSTRALIA PTY.LTD.Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road, North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113 AustraliaPhone: (02) 9888-9999
KYOCERA MITA NEW ZEALAND LTD.1-3 Parkhead Place,Albany, Auckland, New ZealandPhone: (09) 415-4517
KYOCERA MITA (THAILAND) CORP.,LTD.9/209 Ratchada-Prachachem Road,Bang Sue, Bangkok 10800, ThailandPhone: (02) 586-0320
KYOCERA MITA SINGAPOREPTE LTD.121 Genting Lane, 3rd Level,Singapore 349572Phone: (65) 7418733
KYOCERA MITA HONG KONGLIMITED11/F., Mita Centre,552-566, Castle Peak Road,Tsuen Wan, New Territories,Hong KongPhone: (852) 24297422
KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-kuOsaka 540-8585, JapanPhone: (06) 6764-3555
KYOCERA MITA EUROPE B.V.Hoeksteen 40, 2132 MS Hoofddorp,The NetherlandsPhone: (020) 6540000Home page: http://www.kyoceramita-europe.comEmail: [email protected]
KYOCERA MITA NEDERLAND B.V.Hoeksteen 40, 2132 MS Hoofddorp,The NetherlandsPhone: (020) 5877200
KYOCERA MITA (UK) LIMITED8 Beacontree PlazaGillette Way,Reading RG2 0BS UKPhone: (0118) 931 1500
KYOCERA MITA ITALIA S.P.A.Via Verdi 89/91 20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio (Milano) ItalyPhone: 02-92179 1
S.A. KYOCERA MITA BELGIUM N.V.Hermesstraat 8A, 1930 Zaventem, BelgiumPhone: (02) 7209270
KYOCERA MITA FRANCE S.A.Parc les AlgorithmesSAINT AUBIN91194 GIF-SUR-YVETTEFrancePhone: (01) 69852600
KYOCERA MITA ESPAÑA S.A.Edificio Kyocera, Avda. De Manacor Nº2,Urb. Parque Rozas, Apartado de Correos 76,28230 Las Rozas, Madrid, SpainPhone: (91) 631-8392
KYOCERA MITA FINLAND OYKirvesmiehenkatu 4, 00810 Helsinki,FinlandPhone: (09) 478-05200
KYOCERA MITA (SCHWEIZ) AGIndustriestrasse 28,8604 Volketswil, SwitzerlandPhone: (01) 908 4949
KYOCERA MITA DEUTSCHLAND GMBHMollsfeld 12 40670 Meerbusch,GermanyPhone: 02159-918120
KYOCERA MITA GMBH AUSTRIAEduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 95,1230, Wien, AustriaPhone: (01) 86338-0
KYOCERA MITA SVENSKA ABSiktgatan 2,162 50 Vällingby, SwedenPhone: (08) 4719999
